JP7283599B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. These gaming machines are known to be equipped with a display device having a display section, such as a liquid crystal display device. The game machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit using the image data read from the memory ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

Also, a configuration is known in which moving image data is provided as image data. The amount of moving image data tends to be larger than that of still image data, and is sometimes stored in a compressed state in the memory for image data.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-208830

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, the display effect using moving image data is preferable, but the increase in the amount of data is not preferable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of moving image data. and

The present invention
a display means having a display;
display storage means for storing image data in advance;
display control means for displaying an image on the display section using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used for reproducing a moving image of a size that can be displayed on the entire display unit, and a smaller size and smaller amount of data than the moving image data. predetermined image data, and
The display control means is
a rendering means for rendering any moving image data in a rendering area to create still image data;
display effect executing means for executing a display effect for displaying a moving image of an image corresponding to the moving image data over a predetermined display period by using the still image data developed by the developing means;
with
As effects based on the image data stored in the display storage means, a first effect in which a background image and a predetermined moving character image that overlaps the background image and moves over time are displayed; A second effect that does not include a background image and includes a background image is configured to be continuous,
By inserting a predetermined image using the predetermined image data, the display effect executing means inserts the image related to the second effect and the predetermined image in at least a part of the effect period of the display effect. is provided with a means capable of displaying an image superimposed on
By moving the predetermined moving character image, it is possible to prevent the predetermined moving character image from being displayed from the predetermined display area of the display section.

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform a display effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of moving image data.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows game round control processing executed by the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing a variation start process executed by the main controller; 9 is a flowchart showing main processing, which is another form of the processing configuration of the main controller. It is another form of the processing structure of a main-control apparatus, and is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU; 4A to 4C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed in VDP; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created along with the execution of drawing processing; 4 is a flow chart showing hidden surface processing using a Z-buffer performed in VDP; 10 is a flow chart showing mask calculation processing executed by a display CPU. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific contents of the first mask display; FIG. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific contents of the second mask display. 10 is a flow chart showing mask calculation processing executed by a display CPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an operation generation command response process executed by a display CPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for a display mode background executed by a display CPU; 4 is a flow chart showing symbol calculation processing executed by a display CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing background setting processing executed in VDP; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing background drawing data creation processing executed in VDP; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing timings at which separately stored data for the first display mode and separately stored data for the second display mode are created; FIG. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining connected objects; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for connected objects executed by a display CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for connected object rendering executed in VDP; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a connected object effect. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a particle dispersion object; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a particle dispersion texture; (c) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining key data; is an explanatory diagram of . (a) is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for connected objects executed by a display CPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a blending table. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing for particle dispersion effect executed in VDP; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion rendering, and (b-1) and (b-2) are diagrams for simply explaining in what trajectory each individual particle image is displaced. It is an explanatory diagram. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing another form of setting processing for particle dispersion effect executed in VDP; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sea surface object, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining normal map data. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of applying a pair of normal map data (a) and (b) to a sea surface object; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how to apply change data to each surface data. (a) is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for sea surface display executed by a display CPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining sea surface animation data. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing for sea surface display executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing normal parameter setting processing executed in the VDP; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a method of setting color information in each surface data. 4(a) is a flowchart showing a sea surface display color information setting process executed in the VDP, and (b) is a flowchart showing a sea surface adjustment process executed in the VDP. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface display, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for simply explaining a setting mode of color information of an area where the sea surface is displayed. 10 is a flowchart showing another form of color information setting processing for sea surface display executed in VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for production|presentation in the opening-and-closing execution mode performed by display CPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of VRAM used for adjusting focus in VDP, and (b) is a flow chart showing drawing data synthesizing processing executed in VDP. (a) is a flowchart showing focus effect adjustment processing executed in the VDP, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a focus range and each blurring range. (a) is a flowchart showing the blurring generation process executed in the VDP, and (b-1) and (b-2) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a manner of extracting a unit area during the blurring generation process. . (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which focus display is not performed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which focus display is performed. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special object; (b-1) to (b-3) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first partial texture; -4) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second partial texture. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for special characters performed by display CPU. 10 is a flow chart showing texture mapping processing for special characters performed in VDP. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the pattern change display; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of round moving image data; (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content by round moving image data, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content by insertion image data. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for round production|presentation performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing decoding processing by a video decoder; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for round effect executed by VDP; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing round effect mapping processing executed by the VDP; FIG. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the state of the round effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of round moving image data in another form; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode of the first round video data, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode of the second round video data, and (c) each round video 4 is a graph for explaining the bit rate of image data; It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for round production|presentation in another form. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for round effects in another form, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the mapping process for round effects in another form. It is a time chart for demonstrating the execution aspect of round production|presentation. FIGS. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining each object used to display a sandy beach background image; FIGS. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each texture used to display a sandy beach background image; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a change in perspective due to a change in viewpoint; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each object when creating a background image for effect; 10 is a flow chart showing sandy beach background arithmetic processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a background calculation process for a sandy beach sprint effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the distance of each object from a viewpoint and the relative speed with respect to the viewpoint. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for production|presentation of a beach sprinting production|presentation. (a) An explanatory diagram showing a display surface on which a sandy beach background image is displayed, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of a sandy beach sprint effect. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a refraction object, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first modified embodiment, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second modified embodiment, (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining α data for refraction; 9 is a flowchart showing distortion effect calculation processing; (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first coordinate mapping data, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the second coordinate mapping data. 9 is a flowchart showing drawing processing in the second embodiment; 9 is a flowchart showing setting processing for distortion effect; 10 is a flow chart showing distortion effect texture mapping processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fusion process for distortion production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a distortion effect is produced; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a base object and a partial object, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a base texture, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining each partial texture. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for blink effects. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of a blinking effect;

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

The inner frame of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right sides serving as a support side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. In addition, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the game machine main body 12 cannot be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general prize winning port 21, a variable prize winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display section 33, a character display section 34, and the like. ing.

When a ball enters the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the bottom of the game board 20, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 27.例文帳に追加The game board 20 is also provided with a large number of nails 28 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling directions of the game balls, as well as various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the out port 27, the game ball entering the variable winning device 22, the upper operation port 23, the lower operation port 24 or the through gate 25 is also expressed as a prize.

The upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 20 . Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, the two working ports 23 and 24 are arranged vertically so that the upper working port 23 faces upward. The lower operation port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 24, and the electric accessory 24a becomes the open state (supported state or guide state), thereby lowering the operation opening. 24 can be won.

The variable winning device 22 includes a large winning opening 22a leading to the back side of the game board 20, and an opening/closing door 22b for opening and closing the large winning opening 22a. The opening/closing door 22b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot or hardly win a prize, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 22b is switched to a predetermined open state in which game balls can easily win a prize. It's like Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (eg 15 rounds) as the upper limit, with the elapse of a predetermined time (eg 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (eg 10) as one round. There is a mode to be done.

The main display section 33 and the accessory display section 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the main display section 33, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is performed. The results of the internal lottery conducted based on the results are clearly displayed. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, winning to the upper working port 23 and winning to the lower working port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery. The result of the internal lottery that is determined is clearly displayed on the main display portion 33, which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the main display unit 33 displays a predetermined stop result. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

The main display unit 33 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may include a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by other types of display devices such as CRT, dot matrix and the like. In addition, the patterns variably displayed on the main display unit 33 include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed. A configuration in which the colors of the seeds are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the character object display unit 34, the winning of the through gate 25 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is displayed. indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the display part 34 for the accessory and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operation opening 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 26 is provided with a pattern display device 31 for variably displaying a pattern, which is one type of pattern. A center frame 32 is arranged in the variable display unit 26 so as to surround the pattern display device 31 . The upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface of the pattern display device 31, so that the problem of lowering the visibility of the display surface caused by the falling of the game ball does not occur. .

The pattern display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. The pattern display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the symbol display device 31, the variable display of symbols is started based on the winning of the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. - 特許庁That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display section 33, the variable display is performed on the pattern display device 31 accordingly. Then, for example, in a game cycle in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line.

The display contents of the pattern display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a view showing the display surface G of the pattern display device 31. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2(a) to 2(j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 3A, on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31, three pattern rows SA1, SA2, SA3 of upper, middle and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row SA1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower pattern row SA3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row SA1 and the lower symbol row SA3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row SA2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row SA2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 3(b), on the display surface G, three symbols are stopped for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are stopped. It's like Also, five effective lines are set on the display surface G, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row SA1→lower symbol row SA3→middle symbol row SA2, and all symbol rows SA1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number is formed on any of the activated lines. When the variable display of ~SA3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a normal big win result or a 15R probability variable big win result, which will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 15R probability variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols are used. The combination is displayed frozen. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. be.

Also, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result to be described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is completed in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, A demonstration video is displayed.

The pattern display device 31 may arbitrarily display the symbols in any manner without being limited to the above, and may include the number of pattern rows, the direction of the pattern variation display in the pattern rows, the number of symbols in each pattern row, and the like. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 31 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

In addition, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 23 and 24, the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 start the variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. It corresponds to one game time.

A first holding light emitting section 35 corresponding to the main display section 33 and the pattern display device 31 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32 . The number of winning game balls in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first reservation light emitting part 35. - 特許庁

In the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second holding light emitting section 36 corresponding to the character item display section 34 is provided. The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 25 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second reservation light emitting part 36. - 特許庁It should be noted that the functions of the holding light emitting units 35 and 36 may be realized by display in a part of the pattern display device 31 .

A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, and the rail portion 37 constitutes a guide rail. A game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball shooting mechanism performs a game ball shooting operation by operating a shooting handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14 .

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 through which substantially the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a window panel (not shown). The window panel is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42 . A display light emitting portion 44 is provided above the window portion 42 as part of the light emitting means. Speaker units 45 are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44 to output sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 42 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 46a which opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a which likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. As shown in FIG. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 46a. Game balls paid out from a payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper tray 46a and the lower tray 47a.

In the area facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the upper bulging portion 46, there is provided an operation device 48 for presentation having an operation portion manually operated by the player. The operation unit of the operation device for effect 48 is manually operated by the player to set the effect content on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31 to predetermined effect content.

A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, as already explained, a back pack unit is provided on the back of the inner frame, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply and a firing control device. is installed. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 has a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, the board box housing the main control board 51 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. can be As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are inseparably connected, and the structure of the connecting part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer that is to be adhered by peeling it off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case body is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51 . The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 52, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 53. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

As the ROM 53, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used, which allows random access when reading the control program and fixed value data and does not require external power supply for memory retention. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be implemented as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power supply and launch control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52 . The power supply and launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 51 generates operating power necessary for each, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 130 which will be described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply and launch control device 57 . In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is sent to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes processing for power failure. It becomes possible to

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52 . As a part of the various sensors, there are detection sensors provided one-to-one with respect to the ball-entering portions corresponding to the winning such as the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 and the through gate 25. The MPU 52 makes a winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a jackpot generation lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winnings to the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24, and executes a reach generation lottery and a display duration determination lottery for each game round.

Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

During the game, the MPU 52 uses various types of counter information to set the lottery for the occurrence of big wins, set the display of the main display unit 33, set the display of symbols of the symbol display device 31, set the display of the display unit 34 for accessories, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot generation lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results, and symbols. A reach random number counter C3 used for a reach generation lottery when the display device 31 fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and fluctuations in the main display part 33 and the pattern display device 31 A variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is to be in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 54 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54 . Among them, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored when a prize is won in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as means.

The reserved ball storage area 54b includes a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3 and a fourth reservation area RE4. , Each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 are reserved and stored. In addition, the reservation area RE is provided with a reservation number storage area NA, and in the reservation number storage area NA, for specifying the number of pending storage of winning history to the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24 information is stored.

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display on the main display section 33. Based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of success or failure is performed.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by one within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success/failure table in a success/failure table storage area as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 53 . As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is twenty. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers for winning is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24. - 特許庁

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The results of these multiple jackpots are (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 22 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the bottom after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operation port 24.

As a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning of the variable winning device 22 is relatively high from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 22a is performed 15 times (high frequency number of times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening takes 30 seconds (high frequency time). ) has passed, or until the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (the number of times for low frequency), and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). or until the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 22a reaches 6 (low frequency number).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds. . On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the big winning opening 22a once is 0.2 sec as described above. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the large winning opening 22a is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode.

In the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of openings and closings of the large winning port 22a, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. However, as long as the frequency of winning to the variable winning device 22 increases from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set larger good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 22 occurs. configuration. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the limited number of openings is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, for one opening, It is also possible to set the product of the game ball launch cycle and the number of opening limits to be longer than the opening limit time. Also, even if the shooting interval of the game ball and the opening time of the big winning hole 22a once are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which substantially no winning to the variable winning device 22 occurs.

As the support mode for the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously shot in the same manner to the game area, the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening states per unit time is relatively high or low. and are set.

Specifically, in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role product opening lottery using the electric role product opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. A long time is set. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs multiple times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time required for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operation opening 24 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working port 23 is higher than the lower working port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 24 is more likely to be won than the upper working port 23. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is awarded to the lower operation port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls he has. be able to.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. In addition, after one electric accessory open lottery is performed, the time secured for the next electric accessory open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 25, the accessory display unit 34 In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time are prepared, high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected than low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may have been Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time secured when the next electric accessory open lottery is performed after one electric accessory open lottery is performed (that is, , shortening the variable display time for one time on the character product display unit 34), shortening the average time of the securing time, and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or any combination of conditions is applied. This may increase the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM53. And, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and a 15R probability variable jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the normal jackpot state (low-probability special game state).

The explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winner/failure lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big-hit state winning, and the game shifts to a big-hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding game state).

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big-hit state winning, and the game shifts to a big-hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the 15R probability variable jackpot state (high probability special game state).

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state refers to a state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the normal jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot results. , and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is set as the probability variable jackpot result, the aspect of the probability variable jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of variable probability jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, and the opening and closing execution. Although the low-frequency winning mode is the mode, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, which is the high-frequency support mode, is the lowest in the support mode. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As a kind of probability variable jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode, and the support mode is maintained as it was before. A different non-explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result (non-explicit high probability corresponding game result or result of latent probability variable state) may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variable jackpot results is achieved.

Furthermore, as a kind of loss result in the success/failure lottery, there may be included a special failure result in which transition to the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and transition to the success/failure lottery mode and the support mode do not occur after the transition to the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. . In the configuration in which both the non-explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result and the special loss result as described above are set, the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. On the other hand, due to the difference in the transition mode of the winning lottery mode, for example, in the normal game state, if one of the non-expressed 2R probability variable jackpot result or the special loss result occurs, it It is possible to allow the player to predict which outcome actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24. - 特許庁

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 31. - 特許庁The expected effect is a game machine equipped with a pattern display device 31 capable of performing variable display of patterns, and in a game cycle in which the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result. In the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the pattern display device 31 starts the variable display of the symbols, the display state is set to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result. say.

There are two types of expectation effects: the ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the special display result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of jackpot patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is achieved by stopping and displaying the patterns of some of the plurality of pattern strings displayed on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31.例文帳に追加A display state is included in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols with which there is a possibility of being established is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the symbols in the remaining pattern rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to perform a ready-to-win effect. , after reducing or hiding the combination of the ready-to-win pattern, a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform the ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, for the ready-to-win display related to the variable display of symbols, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, on a preset effective line in the display surface of the symbol display device 31, to generate a high frequency winning mode A ready-to-win line is formed by stop-displaying a combination of ready-to-win patterns in which there is a possibility that a combination of corresponding jackpot patterns will be established. is to do.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 3 will be described. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the main symbols having the same number on the lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the middle symbol row SA2. It becomes a reach display by being drawn. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbols having the same number as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row SA2. The variable display of the symbol ends.

In the advance notice display, after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the display surface of the symbol display device 31, the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, or in some of the symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3. It also includes a background image in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows SA1 to SA3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game round when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed, but the rate when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in the game times in which the opening/closing execution mode that is the high-frequency winning mode is entered, and the reach random number is displayed in the game times in which the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency winning mode. It is not executed regardless of the value of counter C3. In addition, in game rounds that do not shift to the open/close execution mode, the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 is referenced, and the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission control device 60 .

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the variation display time on the main display section 33 and the variation display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 31 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the main display section 33 and at the start of the variation of the symbols by the symbol display device 31 . When determining the variable display time, a variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

The output side of the MPU 52 is connected with a payout control device 55 and a power source and a launch control device 57 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding ball entering portion. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 50 . A firing permission command is transmitted to the power supply and firing control device 57 based on the fact that the firing handle 41 is being operated. The power supply and shooting control device 57 drives the game ball shooting mechanism 58 based on the shooting permission command received from the main control device 50 to shoot the game ball toward the game area.

A main display section 33 and a character object display section 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52 , and display control of the main display section 33 and the character object display section 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52 . In other words, display control of the main display section 33 is executed in the MPU 52 at each game round. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 24a is specified, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52 .

In addition, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a variable winning driving unit that opens and closes the open/close door 22b of the variable winning device 22 and an electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 24a of the lower operation opening 24. . In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section so that the big winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 24a is won in the open state, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed.

Further, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to an audio emission control device 60, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60. FIG.

<Processing Executed by MPU 52 of Main Control Unit 50>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progress process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progress process, a normal process that is repeatedly executed in a first cycle and a second cycle that is started in a shorter cycle than the first cycle and executed by interrupting the normal process. and timer interrupt processing are set.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It should be noted that this process is started by the MPU 52 periodically (for example, at intervals of 2 msec).

First, in step S101, read processing is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors are read, the states of the various winning detection sensors are determined, and the processing of storing the winning detection information is executed. Also, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the winning detection sensor corresponding to the generation of the winning ball, a winning ball command for instructing the payout control device 55 to pay out the winning ball is set.

In subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 25 is executed. In the win-through process, the value of the electric role product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is set to the value of the electric role product release counter C4 on condition that the number of stored role product reserves stored in the power reserve area 54c is less than 4. Store in the reservation area 54c.

After that, in step S105, the winning process for the working openings associated with the winning of the working openings 23 and 24 is executed. In the winning process for the working opening, if the winning to the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 has occurred, the number of start pending storage stored in the holding ball storage area 54b is the upper limit number (for example, " 4") On the condition that it is less than that, each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b. . In this case, the data is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current starting reservation storage number. After executing the process of step S105, the timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal processing is processing that is started after the main processing that is activated upon power-on is executed. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S209 is executed as processing in a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S210 and S211 is executed in the remaining time.

In step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 55 . Moreover, when a predetermined command for effect is set, it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. - 特許庁

In subsequent step S202, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

In the following step S203, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control process, determination of a big hit, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 31, display control of the main display section 33, and the like are performed.

After that, in step S204, game state transition processing for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition processing, when the game round corresponding to the winning of the jackpot has ended, the transition processing to the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the opening/closing processing of the variable winning device 22 is started. When starting the opening/closing execution mode, during the opening/closing execution mode, and when ending the opening/closing execution mode, various commands for the opening/closing execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 . In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the transition to the win/fail lottery mode and the transition to the support mode are executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game round that triggered the start of the mode.

In the following step S205, a demonstration display process is executed. In the demonstration display processing, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game round being started after the game round is completed in a situation where the open/close execution mode is not in progress. A determination process is executed to determine whether or not the Also, after the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game round being started. A determination process is executed to determine whether or not the Then, when it is determined that the period has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 .

Note that the demo display is a start waiting effect displayed on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demo image, an image is displayed in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 perform a predetermined action. After the display of the displayed image, or instead of the displayed image, a moving image of the manufacturer name, the model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, the symbols that were finally stopped and displayed in the previous game cycle may be used as the symbols. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

In subsequent step S206, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower working opening 24 is executed. In this electric service support process, the information stored in the electric service reservation area 54c of the RAM 54 is used to determine whether or not the electric role product 24a is in the open state, the opening/closing process of the electric role product 24a, and the electric role product processing. It performs display control of the display unit 34 and the like.

Thereafter, in step S207, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 58 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 57. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S208, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM54. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S210, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Further, in step S211, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S208 that the power failure flag is stored, it means that the power has been shut down, so the power failure processing from step S212 onwards is executed. That is, in step S212, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S213, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored, and in step S214, access to the RAM 54 is prohibited, and then the power supply is completely cut off. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

Next, the game round control processing of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 8 and the like.

In the game round control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is in the open/close execution mode, the game round control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S302. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the winning to the operation ports 23 and 24 has occurred.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display section 33 is in the variable display mode. If the main display section 33 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start processing of steps S303 to S305.

In the game turn start process, first, in step S303, it is determined whether or not the number N of start pending balls is "0". A case where the number N of starting pending balls is "0" means that pending information is not stored in the pending ball storage area 54b. Therefore, this game round control process is terminated as it is.

If the number N of starting pending balls is not "0", data setting processing for setting the data stored in the pending area RE of the pending ball storage area 54b for variable display is executed in step S304. Specifically, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Thereafter, after executing the variation start process in step S305, the game round control process is terminated.

The fluctuation start processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, a success/fail determination process is executed for determining whether or not the pending information corresponding to the current fluctuation start process corresponds to the winning of the jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be won by referring to numerical information relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the reserved information shifted to the execution area AE and a hit/fail table corresponding to the current win/fail lottery mode. do.

In the subsequent step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. If the jackpot is won, type determination processing is executed in step S403. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified by referring to the numerical information relating to the jackpot type counter C2 among the reserved information shifted to the execution area AE and the distribution table.

In the subsequent step S404, stop result setting processing corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game turn related to the start of the current fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 53, The specified information is stored in the RAM 54 . In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 are set differently for each type of jackpot result, and are specified in step S403 in step S404. The RAM 54 stores information on the form of the pattern according to the type of the jackpot result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the jackpot has not been won, in step S405, a stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed. Specifically, in the game round related to the start of the current variation, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is specified from the stop result table for the time of failure stored in advance in the ROM 53, The specified information is stored in the RAM 54 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing the process of step S404 or step S405, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S406.

In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 54a of the RAM 54 is acquired. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs when the game round related to the start of this variation is a big hit result. Also, even if the result is not a big hit, it is determined that a ready-to-win display occurs when the numerical information related to the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time table for reach occurrence stored in the ROM 53 is referred to acquire the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS, and the fluctuation Display time information is set in a variable display time counter provided in RAM 54 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the fluctuation display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 53 is referred to, and the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the reachable variable display time table.

It should be noted that the variable display time information at the time of reach non-occurrence is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of start pending balls increases. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected. A variable display time table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the variable display time does not change according to the number of start pending balls and the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the cases of losing reach and non-reach.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S406, the command for variation and the type command are set in step S407. The variable command includes information on the variable display time. Here, the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence as described above is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach generation. Even if the command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, it is possible for the voice light emission control device 60, which is a sub-side control device, to specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as the game result information, any of normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result information, 15R probability variable jackpot result information, and off result information.

The variation command and type command set in step S407 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S201 of the normal processing (FIG. 7). After executing the process of step S407, the main display section 33 starts to display the pattern in a variable manner in step S408. After that, the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 8), when the main display section 33 is performing the variable display, the processes of steps S306 to S309 are executed. In this process, first, at step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode in the main display section 33 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S308. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 54 in the process of step S404 or step S405 is specified, and the main display part 33 is operated so that the pattern mode corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display part 33. display control.

In the subsequent step S309, a fluctuation end command is set. The fluctuation end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S201 in the normal processing (FIG. 7). The sound emission control device 60 terminates the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. In addition, a command corresponding thereto is transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 70, and the display control device 70 confirms and displays (final stop display) the combination of final stop symbols in the game round. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

<Another form of processing configuration in MPU 52 of main controller 50>
The processing configuration executed by the MPU 52 is not limited to the above, and may be the following processing configuration. 10 and 11 are flowcharts for explaining another form of processing in the MPU 52. FIG. 10 shows the main processing executed when the supply of operating power is started, and FIG. 11 shows the main processing. A timer interrupt process that is periodically interrupted and started is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the main process, first, in step S501, start-up processing associated with power-on is executed. In the subsequent step S502, access to the RAM 54 is permitted. After that, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and firing control device 57 is turned on. In step S505, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in subsequent step S506, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data.

If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the power failure flag is stored, and the RAM determination value is normal, the power failure flag is erased from the RAM 54 in step S507, and the RAM is cleared in step S508. Clear the judgment value. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S510, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S511. After executing the processing of steps S509 to S511, the process returns to step S509, and the processing of steps S509 to S511 is repeated.

It should be noted that the setting of interrupt prohibition may be performed immediately after the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S509. In this case, the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, may be configured to wait until the next interrupt permission setting is performed when the activation timing comes in a situation where interrupt prohibition is set. .

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to steps S512 and S513. Also, when power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality is confirmed in the data stored and held by the RAM judgment value, the process similarly proceeds to steps S512 and S513.

At step S512, the used area of the RAM 54 is cleared to "0", and at step S513, the RAM 54 is initialized. After that, the process proceeds to steps S509 to S511.

FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in this alternative mode.

In the timer interrupt process, in steps S601 to S605, processes similar to those in steps S101 to S105 are executed.

After that, in step S606, update processing of the variation type counter CS is executed, in step S607 game round control processing is executed, in step S608 game state transition processing is executed, and in step S609 demonstration display processing is executed. , and in step S610 an electric support support process is executed, in step S611 a game ball launch control process is executed, and in step S612 an external output process is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. The detailed contents of each of these processes are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9 above.

<Audio emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

The sound emission control device 60 includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted, as shown in FIG. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

As the ROM 63, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used, which allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require external power supply for memory retention. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be implemented as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to the operation device 48 for presentation and the main control device 50, and the output side of the MPU 62 is connected to various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, the speaker unit 45 and the display control device 130. there is

By receiving the variation command transmitted from the main controller 50, the MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start the game round effect, and executes the game round effect start processing. Further, by receiving an end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and executes the end processing for the effect for the game round. Further, by receiving various commands for the big win performance transmitted from the main controller 50, it recognizes that the big win performance needs to be started or progressed, and executes the big win performance processing. Also, by receiving the demonstration display command transmitted from the main controller 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to start the demonstration display, and executes the demonstration display processing.

Note that the MPU 62 receiving a command from the main controller 50 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the main controller 50, but also includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board.

In the game cycle production start processing, based on both the command for variation and the type command, the variation display time comprehension processing for comprehending the variation display time of the corresponding game cycle, and the reach display comprehension processing for comprehending the presence or absence of the reach display. Then, a jackpot result grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Also, based on the results of the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31 in this game cycle is determined. Execute the type recognition process. Then, based on the results of each of the grasping processes, a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a pattern designation command including information on the type of pattern to be displayed in the final stop display are sent to the display control device. 130.

In addition, in the game cycle production start process, in addition to the above grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for determining whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery for the advance notice display is also executed. Then, in the case of winning the occurrence of the advance notice display, a notice command including information on the type of notice display is transmitted to the display control device 130 .

In addition, in the game round effect start process, the game round display light emission table and the game round sound table are read out from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of the above processes. The display light emission table for game round defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the course of progress of the corresponding game round. Further, the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the course of progress of the corresponding game round is defined by the game round sound table.

In the game round effect end processing, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game round are ended. In addition, in the game round effect end processing, an end command including information for ending the game round effect is transmitted to the display control device 130 .

In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for the jackpot effect, the effects such as the opening, each round, between rounds, and the ending are grasped, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped results is obtained. command to the display control device 130 . Further, based on the grasped result, the display light-emitting table for the jackpot effect and the sound table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light-emitting mode of the display light-emitting part 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker part 45 during the jackpot effect. stipulate.

In the demonstration display processing, based on the received demonstration display command, the effect mode of the demonstration display is grasped, and a demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 130 . Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for demonstration display and the sound table for demonstration display are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emission section 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker section 45 during the demonstration display are determined. stipulate.

The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 50 includes processing for controlling light emission of the first holding light emitting unit 35 and the second holding light emitting unit 36 in addition to the above processing. included.

Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the operation device 48 for production has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the operation device 48 for production based on the operation of the operation unit of the operation device 48 for production. and execute the operation handling process. Also, when the operated state is canceled, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding processing is executed.

Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operating device 48, the effect of changing the display mode is executed based on the operation of the effect operating device 48. FIG. The display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed before the game round starts and the game round image displayed while the game round is being executed are set to predetermined types. display mode is set. The detailed contents of the display mode and the processing configuration related to the switching of the display mode based on the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation will be described in detail later.

<Display control device 130>
A hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

The display CPU 131 functions as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected via a bus to an input port 137 mounted on a display control board 136, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. be done. Note that receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the sound emission control device 60, and includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board. be

The display CPU 131 is connected to a work RAM 132, a memory module 133 and a VRAM 134 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Give a transfer instruction to transfer. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the pattern display device 31. conduct. The memory module 133, work RAM 132, VRAM 134 and VDP 135 will be described below.

The memory module 133 is storage means for pre-storing control data including control programs and fixed value data, and pre-storing various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image. The memory module 133 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply for storing data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write-only read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 133 include image data for objects such as patterns and characters displayed on the pattern display device 31, image data for textures to be applied to the objects, and image data for one frame. and image data for the rear surface forming the rearmost image in the image of .

Here, an object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices of three-dimensional coordinates. In image data for objects, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates set in advance for each object as an origin in order to apply a surface model, for example. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative positions (that is, orientation and size) of each polygon are three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

A texture is an image to be pasted on each polygon of an object, and by pasting the texture onto the object, an image corresponding to the object, for example, a display image including patterns and characters is generated. Image data for textures can be stored in any manner, but at least includes a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. there is

The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The image data for the back surface may be held in any manner, but for example, the two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate polygons are used.

The work RAM 132 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 133 and transferred, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data, and more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 . Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 134 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the pattern display device 31 . The VRAM 134 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 134 has an expansion buffer 141 , and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 . In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of processing in the VDP 135 using the image data. The VRAM 134 is also provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data (generated data) is created by the VDP 135 . The VRAM 134 is also provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144 and a mode buffer 145, the details of which will be described later.

The VDP 135 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the pattern display device 31 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131, using data stored in the expansion buffer 141, specifically by processing the data. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 31b incorporated in the pattern display device 31 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 31a. Since the VDP 135 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing dedicated firmware for drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation section 151 , a rendering section 152 , a register 153 , a display mode control section 154 and a display circuit 155 . These circuits are interconnected via a bus, and are also connected to an I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I/F 157 for the VRAM 134 .

The I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 causes the register 153 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 . Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object designated as the object to be arranged within the world coordinate system. Also, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging an object in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface G.

Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the rendering unit 152 performs light source adjustment and texture application on each clipped object to determine the appearance of the object. The rendering unit 152 also projects each object onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on the depth information to render one frame of drawing data, which is two-dimensional data, into a frame buffer. 142. Drawing data for one frame means data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. say.

It should be noted that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by a drawing list. may be configured such that the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 execute processing depending on the contents of the . Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute processing only by operation of hardware circuits corresponding to the drawing list without using programs.

Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame region 142a and a second frame region 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 31a (that is, the display surface G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which each dot can display only 256 colors, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, the drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to perform drawing on the pattern display device 31. , drawing data to be used in the future for other frame regions is created. That is, the frame buffer 142 employs a double buffer system.

In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b. It is output to the pattern display device 31 via the connected output port 138 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 155 from the frame regions 142 a and 142 b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 31 and converted into gradation data. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the pattern display device 31 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

Further, the display mode control unit 154 executes predetermined processing based on the drawing list stored in the register 153 when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode. The predetermined processing will be explained later.

<Basic processing in the display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, the main processing that is started when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing.

In the main process, first, in step S701, an initial setting process is executed.

In the initial setting process, an initial adjustment process for the scaler of the display circuit 155 is executed. In the initial adjustment process, when an image signal is output based on drawing data created in each frame area 142a, 142b of the VRAM 134, the image signal is output in correspondence with the number of dots of the liquid crystal display section 31a. A command for initial resolution adjustment is transmitted to the VDP 135 as shown. This initial adjustment value is adjusted in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as the resolution initial adjustment command.

By transmitting the resolution initial adjustment command to the VDP 135 , numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the scaler resolution adjustment area in the register 153 of the VDP 135 . As a result, when an image signal is output from the VDP 135 to the pattern display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output after being adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display section 31a.

Also, in the initial setting process, an initial adjustment process of the ground color is executed. In the initial adjustment process, a ground color initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 135 so that the numerical information set as the initial value in the unit area of each frame area 142a, 142b of the VRAM 134 becomes the initial numerical information. This initial numerical value information is adjusted in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the result of the adjustment is set as the background color initial adjustment command.

When the ground color initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 135 , the initial numerical value information is stored in the ground color adjustment area of the register 153 of the VDP 135 . As a result, dots corresponding to unit areas that have not been updated from the initial numerical information when drawing data is created display the ground color. Although black is set as the initial ground color in this pachinko machine 10, it is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

After executing the initial setting process in step S701, various interrupts are permitted in step S702. This allows the display CPU 131 to execute command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. After that, in the main process, the process of step S702 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing will be described.

The command interrupt process is a process that is started with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the sound emission control device 60, regardless of what process is being executed at that time. In command interrupt processing, a command received at the input port 137 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 132, and a flag indicating that a new command has been received is set in the corresponding area. After that, the command interrupt processing is terminated, and the processing before starting the command interrupt processing is resumed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec.

When the VDP 135 outputs the image signal for one frame to the pattern display device 31, it starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display surface G, and then outputs the image signal on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged side by side, and image signals are sequentially output to the dots from the left to the right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output to the dot in the lower right corner of the display surface G. FIG. In this case, the VDP 135 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 131 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and makes the display CPU 131 recognize that the update of the image for one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt process can be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V interrupt process was started, a new V interrupt process is started.

In the V interrupt process, command analysis processing is first executed in step S801. Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 132 is analyzed. In subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received based on the analysis result of step S801. If a new command has been received, command handling processing is executed in step S803.

In the command correspondence process, the data table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 133 . The data table defines the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the received command on the display surface G of the pattern display device 31. Information group.

Here, the commands that the display CPU 131 receives from the sound emission control device 60 include the variation pattern command, the design designation command, and the advance notice command, as described above. When these commands are received, the data table necessary for executing the game-turn production corresponding to each of these commands on the pattern display device 31 is read. Further, the command to be received includes an end command, and when the command is received, the data table necessary to finally stop the currently executed game-turn effect is read out. Further, as the commands to be received, there are various commands for the big win effect, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the big win effect is read. Further, the command to be received includes a command for demonstration display, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the demonstration display is read. Further, based on the read data table, other program data necessary for executing the process are also read.

After command handling processing is executed in step S803, pointer update processing is executed in step S804. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. As a result, the display CPU 131 can grasp the processing necessary to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time.

In the following step S805, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display one frame of image corresponding to the update timing of this time, parameters necessary for giving drawing instructions to the VDP 135 are calculated. Details of the task processing will be described later.

In the subsequent step S806, drawing list output processing is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 135 creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 according to this drawing list. Processing in this VDP 135 will be described later in detail. After that, the V interrupt processing is terminated.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In task processing, first, in step S901, setting processing for starting control is executed. In the control start setting process, the display CPU 131 executes a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in this processing. Note that the individual image is one two-dimensional image defined by still image data such as back image data, or one three-dimensional image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data. It's about images.

Specifically, regarding the control start setting process, first, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image for which control is to be started in the current processing. If it exists, the work RAM 132 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as the control start target on a one-to-one basis. Allocate a free buffer area so that Furthermore, initialization processing is executed for all the secured empty buffer areas, and parameters for starting control according to individual images are set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

In the following step S902, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

In the following step S903, background arithmetic processing is executed. In the background calculation process, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, the rotation angle, the scale, the light information for adding contrast, and the projection for the backmost image that constitutes the background image and the background character are calculated. A process of computing and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list, such as camera information and Z-test designation, is executed.

In the subsequent step S904, a performance calculation process is executed. In the effect calculation process, the various parameters described above are calculated and derived for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as ready-to-win display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect.

In the subsequent step S905, a symbol calculation process is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for the image of the symbol that is the object of variable display in each game cycle.

Incidentally, in each process of steps S903 to S905, a process of updating the parameters for starting control set in step S901 is executed. Also, in each process of steps S903 to S905, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image is updated is used. This animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 133 and is determined according to the type of individual image.

After that, in step S906, the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task process ends. In the process of grasping the object to be placed in the world coordinate system, the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list is grasped among the individual images that have been subject to control update by the processes in steps S903 to S905. to run. The grasping is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since more individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 are set than individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S906. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S906 is executed. no longer needed.

In order to distribute the processing load of the display CPU 131 in the control start setting process in step S901, the control start timings of the individual images may be distributed and set.

<Basic processing in VDP 135>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

In the VDP 135, processing for setting the value of the register 153 based on the command sent from the display CPU 131, processing for creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b is executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) associated with the I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 . In addition, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 . Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

The processing for creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of this process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 15A to 15C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created for the one-frame image related to the drawing list is set. there is Various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of various designation information will be described later. When moving image data is included as the image data handled by the VDP 135, the header information includes whether there is a decoding designation and information on the address where the moving image data to be decoded is stored in the memory module 133. may be set.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing list contains multiple types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time. Parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set to be serial numbered numerical information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 15(a), the back image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. there is In addition, the image data for effect is set after the image data for background, for example, object A for effect is set as m-th, object B for effect is m+1, and so on. there is In addition, the image data for the design is set as the order after the image data for the effect, for example, the design object A is set as the n-th, the design object B is set as the (n+1)th, and so on. there is

The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the one described above, and the order in which the image data is set may be the order opposite to that described above. Image data for effect or image data for background may be set after the data, and image data for design is set in order between predetermined image data for effect and other image data for effect. may have been

Parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3), ..., P(m), P(m+1), ..., P(n), P(n+1), ... has multiple parameters. Specifically, regarding the parameter P(1) of the image data for the rear surface, as shown in FIG. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the back, and the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the back Rotation angle information that indicates the rotation angle inside, scale information that indicates the magnification when setting to the world coordinate system with respect to the scale that is set as the initial state of the image data for the back, and the image for the back and uniform α value information indicating overall transparency information (or transparency information) when data is set.

Here, coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of image data for an object. Also, this coordinate information is set for object image data, but is not set for texture image data. In the image data for texture, the coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each vertex of the image data for object. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state attached to a combination of object image data and texture image data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 during texture mapping.

The parameter (P1) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and orientation of the virtual camera when projecting the image data for the back onto a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and when rendering the image data for the back. and light information, including position and orientation information for a virtual light source that determines the shadow in the .

The parameter (P1) contains Z-test designation information indicating whether or not the Z-buffer method, which is a type of method for removing hidden surfaces, is applied. In the Z-buffer method, when many objects and two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) lined up on the Z-axis This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When applying the Z-buffer method, the Z-buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration for hidden surface processing using the Z-buffer 143 will be described later.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is also used as a method for removing hidden surfaces. The Z-sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel arranged on the Z-axis is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When applying the Z sorting method, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, addition processing of the numerical information and arithmetic processing for fusion are executed. Although a detailed description of the processing configuration of hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when an effect image is to be displayed.

The parameter (P1) contains α data specification information indicating whether or not to apply α data and to whom it is applied, fog specification information indicating whether or not fog is to be applied and to whom it is applied, and a background created to display a background image. Separate storage designation information indicating whether or not separate storage is to be performed for image drawing data is set.

Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As methods for setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. A uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and texture image data, and is stored in the memory module 133 in advance as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture image data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

By setting the uniform α value and α data as described above, the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and image data for textures is not finely controlled for each pixel, but is uniform for all pixels. In a situation where it is possible to control with , it is possible to reduce the required data volume by uniformly responding with the α value, and by applying α data, it is also possible to finely control the transparency on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically in the Z-axis direction, in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame is fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object placed on the back side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained, so another fog is set for the object. configuration. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

Storing separately means writing and storing the drawing data for the background image once created in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b in order to use it as it is in subsequent frames. As shown in FIG. 4, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode area 145a and a second mode area 145b so as to correspond to each display mode on a one-to-one basis. The specific content of this separate storage will be described later in detail.

For other parameters such as parameter P(2), as shown in FIG. 15(c), among the various types of information shown in FIG. information and is set. As such information, address information of areas in which objects and textures are stored in the memory module 133 is set.

Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, the manner in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S<b>1001 , it is determined whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 131 . If a new drawing list has been received, a background setting process is executed in step S1002.

In the background setting process, the background image data and the character object for displaying the background image are grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the character object have already been placed in the world coordinate system.

If it is not arranged, an empty buffer area to be referred to for arranging in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and when an empty buffer area is secured, the area is initialized. After that, the address where the image data is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped and read out, and the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data are set so that the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. to the coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and set in the buffer area secured above.

If so, the various parameters set in the already reserved buffer area are updated. In the background setting process, a control end process is executed to erase background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In the subsequent step S1003, setting processing for effect is executed. In the effect setting process, the object for displaying the effect image is grasped among the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already placed in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, update processing of various parameters is executed. Also, in the effect setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In the subsequent step S1004, a symbol setting process is executed. In the pattern setting process, the object for displaying the pattern is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already placed in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, update processing of various parameters is executed. Also, in the design setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for a design not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004, as shown in FIG. 17, the drawing list designates the drawing list as a placement target within the world coordinate system defined by the X, Y, and Z axes. Setting of a scene in which the backmost image PC1 and various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles, and scales also designated by the drawing list is completed.

Note that FIG. 17 simply shows how the rearmost image PC1 and various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged. In addition, the backmost image PC1 does not need to have the coordinates in the Z-axis direction set to the far side with respect to all of the various objects PC2 to PC10. , the coordinates in the Z-axis direction may be on the front side of some objects. However, the region of the backmost image PC1, which has the same coordinates in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction as the part of the objects, has the coordinates in the Z-axis direction behind the object. The object is not covered with the backmost image PC1.

In subsequent step S1005, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set with the viewpoint as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 17, a viewpoint PC11 indicated by a camera shape is set, and a corresponding coordinate system is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (backmost image PC1 and various objects PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it becomes possible to switch viewpoints individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 17 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

In subsequent step S1006, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the transformation process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is transformed into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image closer to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image farther from the viewpoint is reduced.

In the following step S1007, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, the respective individual images extracted in step S1006 are grasped with their respective corresponding viewpoints as a common origin. Then, in this state, the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b (that is, the display surface G of the pattern display device 31) to be drawn is used as a reference and extracted in step S1006. clip each individual image

In the following step S1008, lighting processing is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows and reflections are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

In the following step S1009, color information setting processing is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices. In such a color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process is executed to paste a texture corresponding to each object extracted by the clipping process. Also, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are performed.

Thereafter, in steps S1010 and S1011, each individual image extracted in step S1007 and further subjected to lighting processing and color information setting processing is projected onto the screen region PC12, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). or parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, in step S1010, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the background, drawing data for the background is created by projecting onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal on the background image and the object set as the background image.

Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. Buffers for effects and patterns are set in which drawing data for is written collectively. In addition, areas with the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 are set in the buffer for background and the buffer for effects and patterns. The background drawing data created in step S1010 is written to the background buffer. Note that if the background image data is not specified in the drawing list, the background drawing data is not created.

In the subsequent step S1011, drawing data creation processing for effects and symbols is executed. In the drawing data creation process for effects and patterns, objects set as effects images and objects set as patterns are projected onto the screen area PC12 while removing hidden surfaces, thereby creating a screen buffer. At 144, drawing data for effects and patterns are created in buffers for effects and patterns. Incidentally, when the image data for effects and patterns are not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for effects and patterns are not created.

After that, in step S1012, the drawing data synthesizing process is executed, and then the drawing process ends. In the drawing data synthesizing process in step S1012, the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for effects and patterns, which are individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes in steps S1010 and S1011, are synthesized, The synthesized result is written as drawing data for one frame in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b.

In this case, the writing order is defined to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for background→drawing data for effect and design. Therefore, the drawing data for the background is first written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then the drawing data for effects and patterns are written. At this time, if the target pixel for drawing has a completely transparent α value, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is changed. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the standard ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side overwrites the image on the back side. , an operation for fusion is performed.

Here, the calculation for fusion will be described in more detail. Each RGB numerical information of each dot in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn is set to pixels to be drawn in the drawing data for effects and patterns. Based on the α value of
R: "R value of back side image" x ("1" - "α value") + "R value of front side image" x "α value"
G: "G value of back side image" x ("1" - "α value") + "G value of front side image" x "α value"
B: "B value of back side image" x ("1" - "α value") + "B value of front side image" x "α value"
becomes.

Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area of one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion where projection is not performed in the drawing data for effects and patterns.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. An image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the pattern display device 31 based on the created drawing data. This is performed in parallel with the generation of drawing data for the next frame for the relevant frame. The display circuit 155 has a selector circuit for alternately switching between the frame regions 142a and 142b to be referenced each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame regions 142a and 142b, which are drawing targets, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

Note that steps S1002 to S1007 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S1008 to S1012 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152. FIG.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, mask display using the Z-buffer 143 will be described.

The Z-buffer 143 is used for hidden surface removal by the Z-buffer method, as already described. Hidden surface processing using the Z-buffer executed by the VDP 135 will now be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Hidden surface processing using the Z-buffer is started in each drawing data creation process in steps S1010 and S1011 in the drawing process (FIG. 16) when the Z test is specified in the drawing list. When specifying the Z test, the display CPU 131 sets the Z axis of the screen region PC12, which is the reference for hidden surface processing using the Z buffer, so as to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. A pixel to be displayed is determined between pixels arranged in a direction parallel to the Z-axis direction.

In the drawing data creation process for the background in step S1010, the background image and the background object are subjected to hidden surface processing. objects are subject to hidden surface removal. In the hidden surface processing in drawing data creation processing for effects and patterns, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion in which neither the effect object nor the pattern object is set.

Only one Z-buffer 143 is set, and has an area with the same number of dots as the background buffer in the screen buffer 144 and an area with the same number of dots as the effect and design buffer. are doing.

First, in step S1101, with the current projection target dot in the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) as a reference, an individual image included on the Z-axis and being the target pixel of the individual image to be tested this time. Know the set Z value. In the subsequent step S1102, the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the dot to be drawn on a one-to-one basis in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

In the subsequent step S1103, it is determined whether the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the front side in the Z axis direction than the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S1102. If it corresponds to the front side, the process advances to step S1104 to overwrite the dot area referred to in step S1102 in the Z buffer 143 with the Z value grasped in step S1101. In the subsequent step S1105, the area of the dot to be projected this time is overwritten in the drawing target buffer in the screen buffer 144 with the numerical value information for drawing such as the color information set in the pixel referred to in step S1101. After that, the process proceeds to step S1106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that it does not correspond to the near side, the process proceeds to step S1106 without executing the processing of steps S1104 and S1105. In other words, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot in the Z buffer 143 or on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is not updated. In addition, the already set numerical value information for drawing is held as it is. On the other hand, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the Z-axis direction front side of the Z value already set for the target dot in the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated and , the numerical information for drawing is also updated.

In step S1106, it is determined whether or not the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not, return to step S1101 to perform the Z test on the new target pixel.

If completed, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the Z test has been completed for all dots in the screen area PC12. If not completed, in step S1108, after updating the projection target dot, the process returns to step S1101 to perform the Z test on the new projection target dot. If completed, the hidden surface processing ends.

By executing hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z axis, only the individual image closer to the viewpoint is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, background characters are masked (that is, partially displayed) using the hidden surface processing. This masking is performed by setting the Z value of the object for masking in the display CPU 131 .

Hereinafter, the calculation processing for masking executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19 . Note that the mask arithmetic processing is executed in the background arithmetic processing in step S903 in the task processing (FIG. 14) when it is indicated in the data table that the mask arithmetic processing should be executed for the area referred to. is executed.

First, in step S1201, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the current processing time corresponds to the first mask display. Here, as the mask display, a first mask display and a second mask display are set. The first mask display is a display mode in which a state in which a character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames. It is a display mode that gradually increases over time and finally disappears.

If the first mask display is supported, in step S1202, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1203, pixels to be masked in the object grasped in step S1202 are grasped based on the currently set data table.

After that, in step S1204, the processing for setting the Z value is executed, and then this calculation processing ends. In the Z-value setting process, the pixels to be masked in the object are set so that their Z-values are on the back side of the image on the backmost surface, and the pixels not to be masked are set to The Z value is set so as to correspond to the position where it should be displayed, which is on the front side of the image on the backmost background.

By executing the arithmetic processing for the mask as described above and sending the drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set as the drawing target to the VDP 135, the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer for hidden surface processing. Hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) is performed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display surface G. FIG. Specific contents of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 20 shows the three-dimensional image as a two-dimensional image.

FIG. 20(a) shows a case where the character CH1 is normally displayed without the first mask display. 20(a-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20(a-1), the Z value is set for each pixel so that it is on the front side of the backmost image, so as shown in FIG. 20(a-2) , the character CH1 is displayed in its entirety.

FIG. 20(b) shows the case where the first mask display is performed. 20(b-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20(b-1), the Z value is set for some of the pixels so that they are on the front side of the backmost image, but the remaining pixels are set to the backmost image. The Z value is set so as to be on the back side of the image of . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20(b-2), the character CH1 is displayed only at a portion corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set so as to be on the near side.

A plurality of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131 for the same character CH1. In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of types of first mask display modes for the same character CH1.

Returning to the description of the calculation processing for masking (FIG. 19), if it is determined in step S1201 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second mask display. Since it means that it corresponds to the display, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the second mask display.

If it is the start timing, in step S1206, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S1207, a dedicated table for masking is read based on the currently set data table. This dedicated mask table is stored and held until the current second mask display is completed. In the subsequent step S1208, the pixels set as the initial erasure targets in the dedicated table for masking are grasped.

After that, in step S1209, the processing for setting the Z value is executed, and then this calculation processing ends. In the Z-value setting process, the Z value of the pixel recognized as the target of initial deletion in step S1208 in the object is set to be on the back side of the image on the backmost surface, and the pixel is determined as the target of initial deletion. For pixels that are not displayed, the Z value is set to correspond to the position where it should be displayed, which is on the front side of the image on the backmost background.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1205 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, the erase target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In the subsequent step S1211, data corresponding to the value of the erase target counter updated in step S1210 is checked in the currently read dedicated table for masking, and pixels to be erased are grasped.

After that, in step S1212, after the Z value setting process is executed, this calculation process ends. In the Z-value setting process, the pixels of the object identified as objects to be erased in step S1211 are set so that their Z-values are on the back side of the backmost image, and thus they are objects to be erased. For pixels that do not have a Z value, the Z value is set to correspond to the position where it should be displayed on the front side of the backmost image.

By executing the arithmetic processing for the mask as described above and sending the drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set as the drawing target to the VDP 135, the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer for hidden surface processing. Hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) is performed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display surface G. FIG. Specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 21 shows the three-dimensional image as a two-dimensional image.

FIG. 21(a) shows an image diagram of the information set in the dedicated table for masking, and FIG. 21(b) shows the case where the character CH2 is displayed normally without performing the second mask display. is shown. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the object PC14 corresponding to the character CH2 has a plurality of pixels, and in the dedicated table for masking, these plurality of pixels are grouped by a plurality of groups. In contrast, the order of frames to be erased is set. Specifically, the group indicated as "a1" is set as an initial erasure target, and thereafter, the group indicated as "a2" → the group indicated as "a3" → the group indicated as "a4" → indicated as "a5" Deleted in order of group.

In the frame where the second mask display is started and the group indicated as "a1" is to be erased, as shown in FIG. Character CH2 is displayed. Further, in the subsequent frame, when the group indicated as "a2" is to be erased, in addition to the group "a1", pixels corresponding to the group "a2" The character CH2 is displayed with a missing part. Then, the character CH2 is not displayed in the frame in which the group indicated as "a5" is finally to be erased.

As described above, the Z-buffer 143 can be used to mask objects. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform masking calculations on the program of the display CPU 131, and the VDP 135 does not need to set mask data, which is a type of image data. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required to store the image data.

Further, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131 so much. In addition, a plurality of types of mask displays, such as the first mask display and the second mask display, can produce the excellent effects described above.

Also, a Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set for the portion to be hidden. Since the rearmost image is an image that always constitutes the rear surface in any frame, it serves as an absolute reference for the Z-axis (depth direction) position. By setting the Z value of the part to be hidden based on this, it is possible to make the setting mode of the Z value in the case of being hidden uniform, and the process related to the setting of the Z value This reduces the processing load of

Note that only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. In addition, in the second mask display, instead of erasing each pixel, each pixel may be erased, and a pixel that has been erased may be set as a display object again. may be

In addition, by setting the above Z value in reverse, characters are displayed so as to appear sequentially over a display period of a plurality of frames instead of being erased sequentially over a display period of a plurality of frames. It may be configured to be

<Another Form of Mask Processing Using Z Buffer 143>
Another form of mask display using the Z-buffer 143 will be described.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing another form of mask arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 .

First, in step S1301, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is time to start. If it is the start timing, in step S1302, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1303, based on the currently set data table, the initial Read the mask table.

In subsequent step S1304, a mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S1303. .

The lottery counter is configured to be updated, for example, each time the process of step S702 is executed in the main process (FIG. 12), and when the counter value reaches one cycle, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be In the initial mask table, information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counter. Among them, a plurality of pixels are regarded as one group, and each group corresponds to each other on a one-to-one basis.

In the subsequent step S1305, pixels to be erased are grasped from the information to be erased obtained in step S1304. After that, in step S1306, the processing for setting the Z value is executed, and then this calculation processing ends. In this Z-value setting process, the pixels of the object identified as objects to be erased in step S1305 are set so that their Z-values are on the back side of the backmost image, and thus they are objects to be erased. For pixels that do not have a Z value, the Z value is set to correspond to the position where it should be displayed on the front side of the backmost image.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1301 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, the mask table is rewritten so that the erase target information already set as the erase target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set as the object to be erased is rewritten so that it is redundantly assigned to other information to be erased. This assignment may be performed at random, or may be assigned to information to be erased corresponding to the immediately lower counter value on the table.

After that, using the mask table rewritten in step S1307, the processing of steps S1304 to S1306 is executed, and then this calculation processing ends.

As described above, according to this embodiment, pixels to be erased are selected at random, so that mask display modes can be diversified.

The mask display using the Z-buffer 143 may be applied not only to background characters but also to performance characters and designs. For example, when applied to a production character, the hidden surface processing is performed on the background image data and the production image data collectively. Based on the Z value of the image, the Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted. Also, when applying to a pattern, the hidden surface processing is performed collectively for the background image data, the effect image data, and the pattern image data. , based on the Z value of the backmost image, the Z value of the display object and the non-display object may be sorted.

Also, even if hidden surface processing is performed separately for the background, effects, and patterns, it is determined that the pixels for which the Z value is set on the back side of the backmost image in the VDP 135 are not to be drawn. If so, the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the backmost image in the same manner as in the above configuration.

In addition, the Z value of the display target and the non-display target is not divided based on the Z value of the backmost image. , the Z value of the object to be displayed may be set to the Z value on the back side of the viewpoint.

Hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed based on the direction of the viewpoint instead of the Z axis of the world coordinate system.

<Configuration for Switching Display Modes>
Next, a configuration for switching between display modes will be described.

As already explained, the display mode is a state in which the standby image displayed before the start of the game round and the game round image displayed while the game round is being executed are set to predetermined types. , and multiple types of display modes are set. Specifically, a first display mode and a second display mode are set.

The display mode of the background image and the display mode of each pattern are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, when the symbols with the same number are compared, the outline and shape of the symbols are the same between the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and patterns are different. As for the background image, the type of the background image differs between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and type of characters displayed in front of the background image also differ. The number of displayed characters is set larger in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

The switching of the display mode is performed based on the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation. Specifically, the display mode is sequentially switched by operating the operating device 48 for presentation in a situation where the game round or the opening/closing execution mode is not executed. In addition, switching is made based on the fact that the operation device 48 for presentation is operated under a predetermined condition while the game round is being executed.

A specific processing configuration for switching between display modes will be described.

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing operation generation command handling processing executed by the display CPU 131 . The operation generation command handling process is executed in the command handling process of step S803 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 13).

First, in step S 1401 , it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching has been received from the sound emission control device 60 . If it has not been received, the operation command handling process ends, and if it has been received, the process advances to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period during which neither the game cycle nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether it is the first switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1402, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is the first switchable period, a first switch execution flag is set in a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1403.

On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the flow advances to step S1404 to determine whether it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in the situation where the game round is being executed. Specifically, when the game cycle effect is executed on the symbol display device 31, the variable display of symbols in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is started→high speed variation display in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3→low speed variation. It includes a display flow of sequential stop of each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of the variable display of symbols in all of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 to the end of the high-speed variable display of all of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of symbols is as follows: starting variable display of symbols in all symbol rows SA1 to SA3 → acceleration period of all symbol rows SA1 to SA3 → high-speed fluctuation display in all symbol rows SA1 to SA3 (high speed is constant) speed)→low speed fluctuation display (low speed is constant speed), and then the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are sequentially stopped. In this case, the second switchable period may be the period during which the high-speed fluctuation display is executed in all of the symbol rows SA1-SA3.

Further, medium-speed fluctuation display may be included between the high-speed fluctuation display and the low-speed fluctuation display. In other words, the number of specific stages is arbitrary as long as the mode of the variable display of the pattern is switched in a plurality of stages such as two stages, three stages, or four stages or more. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of a low recognizable stage in which the recognizability of the symbols for the player is low among the stages.

In addition, the specific variation mode is arbitrary as long as it includes the state of the variation display in the relatively low discrimination mode → the variation display in the high discrimination mode in the flow of the variable display of the pattern, for example, any mode However, in the variable display in the low identification mode, the pattern is displayed as transparent, translucent, hollowed out, or partially removed, and in the variable display in the high identification mode, the entire pattern is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period during which variable display is performed in the low identification mode.

Information for specifying whether it is the second switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1404, it is determined whether it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is determined that it is not the second switchable period, this operation generation command handling process is terminated as it is. to set the second switching execution flag.

After executing either step S1403 or step S1405, the process advances to step S1406. In step S1406, the display mode counter is updated.

The display mode counter is a counter for specifying the current display mode in the display CPU 131 and is provided in the work RAM 132 . A counter value is set in the display mode counter in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, as described above, two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set. A numerical value of "1" corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the counter for the display mode is set as "0", when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the 1 display mode is set.

In step S1406, the counter for the display mode is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order each time the operation device 48 for presentation is operated. Specifically, when the processing of step S1406 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is "0" and the first display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to "1" and the second display mode is set. When the process of step S1406 is executed in a situation where the display mode is switched to the display mode and the display mode counter is "1" and the second display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to "1" and the second display mode is set. 1 Switch to display mode. After executing the process of step S1406, the operation generation command handling process ends.

Next, the display mode background arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed in the arithmetic processing for the background in step S903 in the task processing (FIG. 14). In addition, when executing a jackpot effect, etc., the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed, so the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is not executed, and when displaying the standby image or executing the effect for the game round Calculation processing for the display mode background is executed.

First, in step S1501, the display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132 is referenced to determine whether or not the current display mode is the first display mode. If it is the first display mode, in step S1502, the first background image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1503, various parameters of the grasped first background image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S1504, an object corresponding to the first display mode and to be updated for the background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S1505, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

On the other hand, if it is the second display mode, in step S1506, the second backmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1507, various parameters of the grasped second backmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S1508, an object corresponding to the second display mode and to be updated for the background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1509, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

At the execution timing of the process of step S1502, the setting process (step S901) for starting control of the background object corresponding to the first background image and the first display mode has been completed. At the execution timing of the process of step S1506, the setting process (step S901) for starting control of the background object corresponding to the second backmost image and the second display mode has been completed.

After executing the process of step S1505 or step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not either the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132 . If any of the switching execution flags is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether the processing load is heavy.

A situation in which the processing load is heavy means that the processing load of the VDP 135 is large enough to cause a drop in processing when both geometry calculation and rendering for the image data specified in the current drawing list are executed by the VDP 135. It refers to a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 135 is relatively large even if a drop does not occur. Information on whether or not the processing load is heavy is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1511 is performed based on that information.

If the processing load is not heavy, it is determined in step S1512 whether or not the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been saved separately. Here, separate storage means to individually store the background drawing data for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode and to maintain the stored state. For separate storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 4).

The mode buffer 145 has a first mode area 145a in which background drawing data for displaying a background image corresponding to the first display mode is written, and a first mode area 145a for displaying a background image corresponding to the second display mode. and a second mode area 145b in which background drawing data is written. The VDP 135 also has a function of writing background drawing data to either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and reading out the written background drawing data to the screen buffer 144. and a display mode control unit 154 having a writing function.

If the data has not been stored separately, the execution designation information for the separate storage is stored in step S1513, and then this operation processing ends. If the data has been stored separately, the processing ends directly.

When the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing contains the background for either the first display mode or the second display mode. information of the usage instruction of the image data is set. Further, when the process of step S1513 is executed, execution designation information for separate storage is set. The separate storage execution specification information includes information indicating that separate storage should be executed, and also includes information on the address of the separate storage destination.

On the other hand, if the processing load is heavy (step S1511: YES), it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the background image of the display mode to be switched to has been saved separately. If the data has not been stored separately, the calculation process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the data has already been stored separately, the information for designating the use of the separately stored data is stored in step S1515, and then this calculation processing ends.

When the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing contains the background for either the first display mode or the second display mode. information of the usage instruction of the image data is set. Also, if the process of step S1515 has been executed, the use designation information of the separately saved data is set. The separately stored data use specification information includes information indicating that the separately stored data should be used, and information of the address where the separately stored data is stored.

Next, the symbol arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol arithmetic processing is executed in step S905 of the task processing (FIG. 14).

First, in step S1601, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute control update processing for the symbol. The case where it is not necessary to execute includes the case of executing a jackpot performance, and the case where it is necessary to execute includes the case of executing the performance for game rounds and the case of displaying a standby image. If there is no need to execute, the symbol calculation processing is terminated as it is, and if it is necessary to execute, at step S1602, based on the currently set data table, whether or not the game cycle is being executed. determine whether or not

If the game round is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132 in step S1603. When the first switching execution flag is set, at step S1604, the symbol to be controlled is changed in accordance with the display mode to be switched. Specifically, the information of the pattern to be controlled (for example, the information of the stored address) is retained while the parameter information of each empty buffer area reserved for the control of the pattern in the work RAM 132 is held as it is. only is rewritten to information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. Note that the processing of steps S1603 and S1604 may be configured to be executed in the control start setting processing (step S901) in the task processing (FIG. 14). Also, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S1603 or if the process of step S1604 is executed, the process advances to step S1605. In step S1605, based on the currently set data table, the object of the pattern to be controlled is grasped, and in subsequent step S1606, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the arithmetic processing for this symbol is terminated.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the symbol image data corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode is included in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. is set.

If the game round is being executed (step S1602: YES), in step S1607, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not all symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are being displayed at high speed. judge. When all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are being displayed at high speed, it is determined whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132 at step S1608.

If the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed in accordance with the switching destination display mode. This is because when the drawing process (FIG. 16) corresponding to the current drawing list is executed by the VDP 135, if the pattern to be controlled is changed in accordance with the display mode to be switched to, the processing will fail. If no processing failure occurs, it is determined that the change is possible, and if processing failure occurs, it is determined that the change is impossible.

For example, if new background image data corresponding to the display mode switching is set in the drawing list this time, the VDP 135 needs to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system. The processing load on the VDP 135 is increased. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol cannot be changed. On the other hand, when separately saved data is set as background image data in the current drawing list, or when background image data corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set Since the VDP 135 does not need to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system, the processing load of the VDP 135 is relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the design can be changed.

Information as to whether or not it is possible to change is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1609 is performed based on this information. Also, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, the second switching execution flag is cleared.

If it is determined in step S1609 that the change is possible, then in step S1610 the pattern to be controlled is changed in accordance with the display mode to be switched to. The specific content of this process is the same as that of step S1604. After executing the process of step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1613.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the change is not possible, in step S1611 a change waiting flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132, and then the process proceeds to step S1613. . The change waiting flag is a flag for specifying in the display CPU 131 that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting. When the change wait flag is set, even if it is determined in step S1608 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S1612 is executed, and the process of step S1609 is executed. executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change wait flag are not set, the process proceeds directly to step S1613. Also, the change standby flag is cleared when an affirmative determination is made in step S1612.

In step S1613, based on the currently set data table, the object of the pattern to be controlled is grasped, and in subsequent step S1614, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the arithmetic processing for this symbol is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for symbols is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes instructions for using image data for symbols corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode. information is set. In this case, if it is determined in step S1609 that the design cannot be changed to the design corresponding to the switching destination display mode, the information of the usage instruction of the image data of the design corresponding to the switching source display mode remains unchanged. Set in the draw list. As a result, a pattern that does not correspond to the display mode is finally displayed on the display surface G. However, since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is during the high-speed fluctuation display, the player can avoid the above state. Unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

Further, when the pattern cannot be changed to the pattern corresponding to the display mode to be switched to, a change waiting flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing. As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily switch the display mode while preventing processing dropouts from occurring in the VDP 135 . It should be noted that the processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the pattern corresponding to the display mode to be switched to is changed within the range where the high-speed variation display is performed.

If the high-speed change display is not being performed (step S1607: NO), the process proceeds to step S1615. In step S1615, based on the currently set data table, the object of the pattern to be controlled is grasped, and in the following step S1616, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the arithmetic processing for this symbol is terminated. When the arithmetic processing for symbols is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes instructions for using image data for symbols corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode. information is set.

Next, the background setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the background setting process is executed in step S1002 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not use of separately saved data is specified in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S1702, the register 153 stores information for setting the separately saved data corresponding to the designation as background drawing data.

If not set (step S1701: NO) or after executing the process of step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, the backmost image specified in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1704, various parameters specified for the backmost image are grasped. After that, in step S1705, the background image is set to the world coordinate system. The contents related to this setting are as already explained.

In step S1706, the background object specified in the current rendering list is grasped, and in step S1707, various parameters specified for the object are grasped. After that, in step S1708, the setting process for the background is finished after executing the process of setting the object to the world coordinate system.

By executing the setting process for the background as described above, drawing Image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Along with this, for example, when the current drawing list is related to the switching of the display mode, it is possible to perform the setting for starting control of the image data corresponding to the switching destination display mode.

Next, the drawing data creation process for the background executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing data creation process for the background is executed in step S1010 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the information of the use setting of the separately stored data is set in the register 153 or not. If not set, in step S 1802 , hidden surface processing is executed to create background drawing data in the screen buffer 144 . Hidden surface processing has already been described.

In the following step S1803, it is determined whether or not execution of separate saving is specified in the current drawing list. If it is not set, the drawing data creation process is terminated. If it is set, in step S1804, the background image created in step S1802 is transferred to the target mode area of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Write the drawing data of As a result, the drawing data for the background is saved separately. After that, the drawing data creation process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1801, if the information on the use setting of the separately saved data is set in the register 153, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, the separate saved data is read out from the currently specified mode area, and the read separate saved data is transferred to the current mode area. It is written in the screen buffer 144 as background drawing data. After that, the drawing data creation process is terminated.

By executing the background drawing data creation process as described above, the background drawing data obtained through geometry calculation and rendering or the background drawing data related to the separately saved data is stored in the screen buffer 144. . Further, in a frame in which an image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, drawing data creation processing for effects and symbols (step S1011) is executed to create drawing data for effects and symbols. Drawing data synthesizing processing (step S1012) is executed to create drawing data for one frame.

Here, the timing of creating the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 28A shows background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 28B shows background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode. 28(a) shows the power ON/OFF state of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 28(b) shows the existence of the first display mode, and FIG. 28(c) shows the existence of the second display mode. 28(d) shows the presence or absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 28(e) shows the presence or absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at timing t1, power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the display CPU 131 starts processing. Further, since the display mode is set to the first display mode, the drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 in order to display the image corresponding to the first display mode after the timing t1. Further, based on the drawing list, the VDP 135 starts to create drawing data corresponding to the first display mode.

After that, at the timing of t2, the generation of background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode is completed. is stored in the use area 145a. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. An image is displayed. Further, the separately saved data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. Also, at timing t2 or at a predetermined timing thereafter, display of an image corresponding to the first display mode is started.

After that, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the operation of the production operating device 48 at the timing of t3. Then, drawing data for the second display mode is created, and display of an image corresponding to the second display mode is started. At this timing, the creation of the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode is completed. stored in In the background image based on the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. An image is displayed. Further, the separately saved data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

Here, the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode has more objects to be set than the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode. In this case, if the switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a state where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large, there is concern that the VDP 135 may fail processing. On the other hand, by creating the separately stored data for the first display mode among the separately stored data by using the time during which the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on, the processing load is large. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode under certain circumstances, it is possible to avoid processing failure by using the separately stored data.

On the other hand, the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode has a small processing load on the VDP 135 for its creation. It is set so that processing dropouts do not occur. However, the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode is also stored separately, and even if the processing drop does not occur, the switching to the second display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load is relatively large. , the separately stored data is used.

By creating the separately saved data as described above, when the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short period of time as shown at the timing of t4 to t9, the separately saved data is saved in each display mode. By using this to display the background image, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omissions.

In addition, the object of separate storage is the background image, and the individual image such as the pattern whose variation attracts attention is not included. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual images are fluctuating, even if the images using the separately stored data are displayed, the movements of the individual images whose fluctuations are noted are not continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set to three stages or four stages or more. Even in this case, by separately storing the background drawing data corresponding to each display mode, the display mode can be switched satisfactorily.

In addition, regardless of the display mode switching timing, the pattern type switching may be performed without waiting. Also, the pattern may be configured so as not to differ between the display modes.

Also, the characters for presentation may be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the character for presentation may be configured not to be separately stored, or may be configured to be separately stored.

<Configuration for Displaying Three-Dimensional Image Using Connected Objects>
Next, a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image using connected objects will be described.

A connected object is a single unit object in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected using connecting parts as joints. is set. By using connected objects, a character in a three-dimensional image can be smoothly moved. In view of the fact that the connected object has a skeleton and joints, it can also be referred to as a bone model.

A connected object is set to display a character that performs a predetermined action. Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of connected objects are set for displaying a common character. These multiple types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, a first connected object PC15 and a second connected object PC16 are set to display a common character. The first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 each have a plurality of connecting portions CT1 and CT2, but the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 are set at mutually different locations.

Specifically, the first connected object PC15 does not have a connecting portion at the knee portion, but has a connecting portion CT1 at the elbow portion. It is possible to display the operation as shown. On the other hand, the second connected object PC16 does not have a connecting portion at the elbow portion, but has a connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, as shown in FIGS. Actions can be displayed. As described above, connecting parts are set at different locations, so that the character can perform different actions depending on whether the first connected object PC15 is used or the second connected object PC16 is used. becomes.

Although both connected objects PC15 and PC16 have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 in common, they may not have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 in common. Although a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, textures may be set individually for each of them. If a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 can be prepared to allow the character to perform different actions, the positions of the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 and the type of character are arbitrary.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying a state in which the character is moving using the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for connected objects executed by the display CPU 131 . Arithmetic processing for connected objects is executed in the performance arithmetic processing in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14). Further, the arithmetic processing for connected objects is started when a data table corresponding to game rounds in which effects using connected objects PC15 and PC16 are executed is set.

First, in step S1901, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not an effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (the character is being displayed). If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not it is time to start the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16. If it is not the start timing, this operation processing ends as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process advances to step S1903.

In step S1903, information specifying the start of connected object rendering is stored, and in subsequent step S1904, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as objects to be controlled based on the currently set data table. do. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S1904, the process for starting control has been completed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 in the previous setting process for starting control (step S901). Information for controlling both connected objects PC15 and PC16 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the current series of effects using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is completed.

In the subsequent step S1905, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated to update control information related to the first connected object PC15. Also, in step S1906, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated to update control information related to the second connected object PC16.

In the subsequent step S1907, the designation information of the first presentation period is stored. Here, the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is divided into a plurality of types of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period and a third effect period. During the first rendering period and the third rendering period, the character is displayed using the first connected object PC15, and during the second rendering period, the character is displayed using the second connected object PC16. After that, in step S1908, the parameters of the first connected object PC15 out of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set so as to be designated by the current drawing list.

In the subsequent step S1909, based on the currently set data table, another object for the first effect period and to be updated this time is grasped. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the processing in step S1909, the processing for starting control has been completed for the object to be updated this time in the previous setting processing for starting control (step S901). After that, in step S1910, various parameters of the grasped other objects are calculated, and after updating the control information related to these other objects, this calculation processing ends.

When the operation processing for the connected object is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the usage instruction information for both the connected objects PC15 and PC16, and the The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. In addition, the connected object effect start designation information indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 should be started and the first effect period designation information indicating the first effect period are set in the drawing list. be done.

On the other hand, if the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (step S1901: YES), in step S1911, based on the currently set data table, whether it is during the first effect period or not. determine whether or not If it is during the first rendering period, the processing of steps S1904 to S1910 is executed, and then this calculation processing is terminated. Incidentally, since this time is during the first rendering period, the first connected object PC15 will perform the predetermined first action (see FIG. 29A) as the first rendering period progresses. Then, parameter calculation is performed in step S1905.

When the operation processing for the connected object is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the usage instruction information for both the connected objects PC15 and PC16, and the The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. In addition, designation information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S1911 that it is not in the first effect period, in step S1912 it is determined whether or not it is in the second effect period based on the currently set data table. If it is during the second rendering period, in step S1913, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as objects to be controlled based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S1914, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated to update control information related to the first connected object PC15. Also, in step S1915, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated to update control information related to the second connected object PC16. By the way, this time is during the second rendering period, so that the second connected object PC16 performs a predetermined second action (see FIG. 29(b)) as the second rendering period progresses. Then, parameter calculation is performed in step S1915.

In subsequent step S1916, the specification information for the second rendering period is stored, and in step S1917, parameters of the second connected object PC16 out of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are specified in the current drawing list. set.

In the subsequent step S1918, based on the currently set data table, other objects for the second rendering period that are to be updated this time are grasped. Here, the second rendering period is a state in which the rendering has developed more than the first rendering period, and at least the number of objects displayed increases when switching from the first rendering period to the second rendering period. The setting process (step S901) for starting control of the objects increased when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1918. After that, in step S1919, various parameters of the grasped other objects are calculated, and after updating the control information related to these other objects, this calculation processing ends.

When the operation processing for the connected object is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the usage instruction information for both the connected objects PC15 and PC16, and the The parameters of the second connected object PC16 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. In addition, designation information of the second effect period indicating that it is the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S1912 that it is not during the second rendering period, it means that it is during the third rendering period, so the process proceeds to step S1920. In step S1920, based on the currently set data table, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as objects to be controlled.

In the following step S1921, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated to update control information related to the first connected object PC15. Incidentally, this time is during the third rendering period, so that the first connected object PC15 performs a predetermined first action (see FIG. 29A) as the third rendering period progresses. Then, parameter calculation is performed in step S1921. Also, in step S1922, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated to update control information related to the second connected object PC16.

In the subsequent step S1923, the information specifying the third rendering period is stored, and in step S1924, the parameters of the first connected object PC15 out of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are designated in the current rendering list. set.

In the subsequent step S1925, based on the currently set data table, another object for the third effect period and to be updated this time is grasped. Here, the third rendering period is a state in which the rendering is more developed than the second rendering period, and at least the number of objects displayed increases when switching from the second rendering period to the third rendering period. The setting process (step S901) for starting control of the objects increased when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1925. After that, in step S1926, various parameters of the grasped other objects are calculated, and after updating the control information related to these other objects, this calculation processing ends.

When the operation processing for the connected object is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the usage instruction information for both the connected objects PC15 and PC16, and the The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. In addition, designation information of the third effect period indicating that it is the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

Next, setting processing for connected object rendering executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting processing for connected object rendering is executed in the setting processing for rendering in step S1003 in the drawing processing (FIG. 16). Also, the connected object rendering setting process is started when either the start of the connected object rendering or the designation of the first through third rendering periods is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the start designation of the connected object effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2002, based on the current drawing list, the address where the first connected object PC15 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the first connected object PC15 is drawn. read out. Also, in step S2003, based on the current drawing list, the address where the second connected object PC16 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the second connected object PC16 is read out.

In the subsequent step S2004, a uniform α value setting process for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “1”, which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “0”, which is completely transparent information. do. As a result, the color information preset for all pixels of the first connected object PC15 (including the α value information set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is, whereas the An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the connected object PC16 of 2.

In subsequent step S2005, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC15 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16. After that, in step S2006, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set to the world coordinate system.

Since this time is the processing for specifying the start of the connected object rendering, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Also, although the shapes of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are generally the same, the connecting portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the first connected object PC15 are applied to the second connected object PC16 as they are, there will be pixels whose coordinate designations do not match. .

In subsequent step S2007, other objects for the first rendering period specified in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S2008, various parameters designated for the objects are grasped. After that, in step S2009, after the object is set to the world coordinate system, the setting process for connecting object effect is finished.

By executing the setting process for the connected object rendering as described above, the placement of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 with respect to the world coordinate system is started at the same time. In addition, since the same parameters are applied to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are superimposed at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the process of step S2004 is executed, the second connected object PC16 is handled as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering. Only PC15 is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the start designation of the connected object effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not designation of the first effect period is set in the current drawing list.

If it is set, the setting process ends after the processes of steps S2004 to S2009 are executed. In this case, in step S2006, the various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from the parameter information set in the drawing list so as to correspond to the first connected object PC15. Update.

Various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated by executing the setting processing for the connected object rendering as described above. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first connected object PC15 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2005 corresponds to the first connected object PC15, the first connected object PC15 is changed so as to perform the first action on the display surface G as the first effect period progresses. Object PC15 is displayed.

If it is determined in step S2010 that the designation of the first rendering period is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not designation of the second effect period is set in the current drawing list.

When it is set, in step S2012, a uniform α value setting process for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “0”, which is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “1”, which is opaque information. do. As a result, the color information preset to all pixels of the second connected object PC16 (including the α value information set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is, whereas the second An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of one connected object PC15.

In subsequent step S2013, the parameters specified for the second connected object PC16 in the current rendering list are grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16. After that, in step S2014, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set to the world coordinate system.

Since this time is the processing for updating the second rendering period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list so as to correspond to the second connected object PC16. Update by grasping from the information of the parameters that are stored. In this case, the shapes of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are generally the same, but the connecting portions of the part objects are different. Then, even if it is attempted to apply the parameters of the second connected object PC16 to the first connected object PC15 as they are, there will be pixels whose coordinate designations do not match. .

In subsequent step S2015, other objects for the second rendering period designated in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S2016, various parameters designated for the objects are grasped. After that, in step S2017, after executing the setting processing for the world coordinate system for the object, the setting processing for this connected object rendering ends. Here, if the current processing time is timing related to switching from the first rendering period to the second rendering period, the number of displayed objects increases, so in step S2017 the processing corresponding to that is executed. .

Various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated by executing the setting processing for the connected object rendering as described above. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the second connected object PC16 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2013 corresponds to the second connected object PC16, the second connected object is set so that the second action is performed on the display surface G as the second effect period progresses. Object PC16 is displayed.

If it is determined in step S2011 that the designation of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, it means that the designation of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list. The process proceeds to step S2018.

In step S2018, a uniform α value setting process for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “1”, which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “0”, which is completely transparent information. do. As a result, the color information preset for all pixels of the first connected object PC15 (including the α value information set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is, whereas the An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the connected object PC16 of 2.

In the subsequent step S2019, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC15 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16. After that, in step S2020, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set to the world coordinate system.

Since this time is the processing for updating the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list so as to correspond to the first connected object PC15. Update by grasping from the information of the parameters that are stored.

In subsequent step S2021, other objects for the third rendering period specified in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S2022, various parameters specified for the objects are grasped. After that, in step S2023, after executing the setting process for the world coordinate system for the object, the setting process for this connected object effect is finished. Here, if the current processing time is timing related to switching from the second rendering period to the third rendering period, the number of displayed objects will increase, so in step S2023 the processing corresponding to that will be executed. .

Various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated by executing the setting processing for connected object rendering as described above. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first connected object PC15 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S2019 corresponds to the first connected object PC15, the first connected object is changed so that the first action is performed on the display surface G as the third effect period progresses. Object PC15 is displayed.

Next, the contents of the connected object rendering will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the connected object rendering. Also, FIG. 32(a) shows the first presentation period, FIG. 32(b) shows the second presentation period, and FIG. 32(c) shows the third presentation period. 32(a-1), (b-1) and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 32(a-2), (b-2) and (c-2) are A display surface G is shown. In addition, although the background images and patterns are omitted in FIGS. 32(a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background images are actually displayed behind the images for each effect. and a pattern is displayed on the near side.

In the first rendering period, as shown in FIG. 32(a-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC16 undergoes transparency processing. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(a-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first action is performed as the first effect period progresses. . Also, characters CH4 to CH6 indicated by "A" to "C" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 32(b-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the first connected object PC15 undergoes transparency processing. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(b-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the second connected object PC16 is displayed on the display surface G, and the second action is performed as the second effect period progresses. .

Here, when comparing FIG. 32(a-2) and FIG. 32(b-2), both characters CH3 are shown as if they have different shapes. The same texture is mapped to the PC 16, making the joints (joints) inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first presentation period is switched to the second presentation period, the same, substantially the same or similar image is displayed on the display surface G for the character CH3, making it difficult for the player to recognize the switching. . However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Also, in the second rendering period, characters CH4 to CH8 indicated by "A" to "E" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH4 to CH8 is greater than in the first presentation period.

In the third rendering period, as shown in FIG. 32(c-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC16 undergoes transparency processing. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(c-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first action is performed as the third effect period progresses. . Also, in the third effect period, characters CH4 to CH10 indicated by "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH4 to CH10 is greater than in the second rendering period.

As described above, since a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set for a common character, it is possible to switch between the connected objects PC15 and PC16 to be displayed according to the type of motion using joint parts. . For example, if multiple types of actions are to be performed with a single connected object, it will be necessary to set the corresponding number of connecting parts and part objects for that single connected object. In this case, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is concern that the memory module 133 may exceed the capacity that can be stored as a single image data. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time will be long. On the other hand, since it is set as a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16, it is possible to make the character perform a plurality of types of actions without causing the above inconvenience.

Further, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many opportunities to modify the performance, and if the entire movement of the connected objects is reviewed each time the movement of the character is modified, the time required for the design will be lengthy. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 according to the type of action to be performed as described above, even if it becomes necessary to modify the effect, the already created connected object PC15 , PC 16 need not be modified. Therefore, while the pachinko machine 10 can be well designed, the character can be made to perform a plurality of types of actions.

Prior to the timing at which connected objects are switched to display a character, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object are subject to control by the display CPU 131, and the VDP 135 arranges them in the world coordinate system. Targeted. As a result, when it is time to switch, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute control start processing for the switching destination object, but instead execute control update processing with a smaller processing load than the control start processing. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

In particular, the switching timing is a timing when the processing load on the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 becomes relatively large because the effect develops and the number of displayed objects increases. In this case, assuming a configuration in which control start processing is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that the display CPU 131 or VDP 135 may experience a processing failure. Since it is only necessary to execute the processing, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the processing failure.

In addition, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are simultaneously placed in the world coordinate system, and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between completely transparent information and non-transparent information. Switching can be designated, and the VDP 135 can switch the uniform α value to be applied according to the designation. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while suppressing the complexity of the processing configurations of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 .

Further, the display CPU 131 provides the VDP 135 with only the parameter information for the connected object to be displayed among the connected objects PC15 and PC16 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. This reduces the amount of data set in the drawing list. Also, in the VDP 135, since the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 can be updated in the same manner, the processing load of the VDP 135 can be reduced.

Note that in the switching between the first effect period to the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the action of the character for effect different from the characters for which the plurality of connected objects are prepared is performed. It may be configured to be newly added, or it may be configured to start displaying a performance character with a large processing load separately from the character for which the plurality of connected objects are prepared.

Also, the control start timing in the display CPU 131 and the control start timing in the VDP 135 for the second connected object PC16 may not be the same as for the first connected object PC15. For example, it may be before the timing of switching from the first rendering period to the second rendering period, but after the timing of starting control of the first connected object PC15.

Also, although the processing load at the switching timing of the presentation period increases more than the above configuration, the configuration may be such that the control of the second connected object PC16 is started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are not placed in the world coordinate system at the same time, it is not necessary to uniformly adjust the α value to switch the display object.

Further, for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, switching of the display target may be performed by switching the rendering target instead of uniformly adjusting the α value. In this case, rendering is not performed for connected objects that are not to be displayed, so the processing load during rendering is reduced compared to the above configuration.

Also, the third rendering period may be incomplete, or the fourth rendering period or longer rendering period may be set. Alternatively, three or more connected objects may be prepared for one character.

<Configuration for Particle Dispersion Production>
Next, the configuration for performing the particle dispersion effect will be described.

The particle dispersion effect is a effect in which a large number of single particle images are displayed as if they were dispersed over a plurality of continuous frames (a plurality of image update timings). At the time of this dispersion, at least some of the multiple single particle images are displayed such that they are displaced along different trajectories. In the particle dispersion rendering, a particle dispersion object having a large number of vertex data set in correspondence with a large number of single particle images on a one-to-one basis, and each vertex set in correspondence with the particle dispersion object. A particle dispersing texture having a large number of single image data for displaying the corresponding single particle images at positions corresponding to the data is used.

These particle dispersion object and particle dispersion texture will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b). FIG. 33(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion object PC17, and FIG. 33(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion texture PC18.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the particle dispersion object PC17 includes vertex data, coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data, and other data. A large number of vertex data such as vertex (1), vertex (2), vertex (3), . . . , vertex (99), vertex (100) are set. Each vertex in PC 17 is identified. A large number of coordinate data are set such as coordinate (1), coordinate (2), coordinate (3), . , VDP 135 recognize the position of each vertex of the particle dispersion object PC 17 in the world coordinate system based on these coordinate data.

Other data include, for example, initial scale data of the particle dispersion object PC17, initial α value data uniformly applied to all vertex data, and initial rotation angle data of the particle dispersion object PC17. include.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the particle dispersion texture PC 18 includes single data, correlation data corresponding to the single data, single image data corresponding to the single data, and other data other than these. contains. The single image data correspond to each single data in a one-to-one manner, and are divided into single image data (1), single image data (2), single image data (3), . Image data (100) and many are set. Each single image data includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. Each single image data is data for displaying a single particle image of the same type. Specifically, it is data for displaying a "spherical bubble", and the shape, initial size, and color of the "spherical bubble" are different in part or all of each single image data. In this case, in order to reduce the processing load on the VDP 135 in executing the particle dispersion effect and to increase the number of particle single images to be displayed at the same time, even if all the single image data are set with the scale in the initial state, On the display surface G, the configuration is such that the single image of all the particles can be displayed at the same time.

Note that the types of particles may be different for at least some or all of the individual image data. Moreover, the particles may be of the same type and may have the same shape, initial scale, and color.

The single data of the particle dispersion texture PC 18 are set in a large number as single (1), single (2), single (3), . A large number of single image data set in the particle dispersion texture PC 18 are individually recognized by the data. A large number of correlation data are set such as vertex (1), vertex (2), vertex (3), . , VDP 135 recognizes which of the vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC 17 each single image data in the particle dispersion texture PC 18 corresponds to, based on these correlation data.

The other data includes α value data that is applied individually to each single image data, α value data that is uniformly applied to each single image data, and the like.

Here, initial data is set for each coordinate data in the particle dispersion object PC17, and these initial data are different coordinates. Each coordinate data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritable, and when the particle dispersion object PC17 is set in the world coordinate system, each coordinate data is rewritten to data of coordinates different from the initial data. is set in the A plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set as rewriting reference data used for performing such rewriting.

At least two types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. Three types of KD3 are set. Each of these key data KD1 to KD3 includes correlation data and coordinate data corresponding to the correlation data.

Specifically, the correlation data of the first key data KD1, the correlation data of the second key data KD2, and the correlation data of the third key data KD3 are all the vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 to be applied. Vertex (1), vertex (2), vertex (3), .

On the other hand, a large number of coordinate data of the first key data KD1, coordinate data of the second key data KD2, and coordinate data of the third key data KD3 are set in one-to-one correspondence with each correlation data, It is different when comparing between the same correlation data.

Specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 are coordinate (1-1), coordinate (2-1), coordinate (3-1), ..., coordinate (99-1), coordinate (100 -1), and the coordinate data of the second key data KD2 are coordinates (1-2), coordinates (2-2), coordinates (3-2), ..., coordinates (99-2). ), coordinate (100-2), and the coordinate data of the third key data KD3 are coordinate (1-3), coordinate (2-3), coordinate (3-3), . Many coordinates such as coordinates (99-3) and coordinates (100-3) are set. Also, the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (1) is the coordinate (1-1) for the first key data KD1, the coordinate (1-2) for the second key data KD2, and the coordinate (1-2) for the third key data KD3. 1-3), and the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (100) is the coordinate (100-1) for the first key data KD1, the coordinate (100-2) for the second key data KD2, and the third key Different coordinate data are set for one vertex data, such as the coordinate (100-3) in the data KD3.

Incidentally, each of the key data KD1 to KD3 is set to have a data capacity smaller than that of the particle dispersion object PC17 because the α value data and the rotation angle data are not set.

Each of the key data KD1 to KD3 is set to determine the displacement trajectory of each particle single image as described above, and the order of application to the particle dispersion object PC17 is predetermined. Specifically, the second key data KD2 is used to set coordinate data on the front side of the displacement direction of each single particle image relative to the first key data KD1, and the third key data KD3 is used to set the second key data. This is used when setting coordinate data ahead of KD2 in the displacement direction of each single particle image. When the particle dispersion object PC17 is set in the world coordinate system, the coordinate data of the key data KD1 to KD3 are applied to each vertex data, so that each particle single image corresponding to each vertex data is generated. is displaced on the trajectory of

In this case, for at least a predetermined number of frames, a plurality of key data KD1 to KD3, more specifically, coordinate data of two key data KD1 to KD3 are combined and applied to each vertex data. . Specifically, the first key data KD1 that determines the coordinate data of each vertex data in the first frame (that is, the image update timing) of the particle dispersion effect is the first frame number, which is a plurality of frames after the first frame. It is used for the first frame period corresponding to (eg 99 frames). The second key data KD2 consists of the first frame period, the first switching target frame corresponding to the next frame with respect to the first frame period, and the second frame corresponding to the number of second frames, which are a plurality of subsequent frames. It is used over 2 frame periods. The third key data KD3 is used over the second frame period. In this case, the first number of frames and the second number of frames are the same number of frames.

In addition, the fourth key data may be set after the third key data KD3. In this case, the third key data KD3 is the frame next to the second frame period in the second frame period. and the third frame period corresponding to the third frame number (the same number of frames as the first frame number and the second frame number), which is a plurality of frames after that, and The fourth key data is used over the third frame period.

With this configuration, the number of the key data KD1 to KD3 is smaller than the number of continuous frames when the particle dispersion effect is executed. Even with a configuration in which the number of times the coordinate data of each vertex data is changed is set to be less than the number of changes, it is possible to smoothly display how each particle single image is displaced.

A specific processing configuration for executing the particle dispersion effect using the particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and each of the key data KD1 to KD3 will be described below. Note that the particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and each of the key data KD1 to KD3 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

FIG. 34(a) is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for a particle dispersion effect executed by the display CPU 131. FIG. Arithmetic processing for the particle dispersion effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14). Further, the arithmetic processing for the particle dispersion effect is started when the data table corresponding to the game round in which the particle dispersion effect is executed is set.

First, in step S2101, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the particle dispersion effect is being executed. If the effect is not being executed, in step S2102, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the particle dispersion effect. If it is not the start timing, this operation processing ends as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process advances to step S2103.

In step S2103, based on the currently set data table, the particle dispersion object PC17 is grasped as a controlled object. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2103, the control start process for the particle dispersion object PC17 has been completed in the control start setting process (step S901) immediately before. Further, information for controlling the particle dispersion object PC17 whose control has been started is stored and retained in the work RAM 132 until the particle dispersion effect is completed.

In the following step S2104, an initial reading process is executed to read out the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 from the memory module 133. In step S2105, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17. , update the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17. After that, in step S2106, after storing the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect, the arithmetic processing ends.

When the arithmetic processing for particle dispersion rendering is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes information on the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC17 for the particle dispersion texture PC18. The first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 read out in step S2104 and the parameter calculated in step S2105 are set together with the usage instruction information. Also, particle dispersion effect start designation information indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be started is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the particle dispersion effect is being performed, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not it is time to update the key data based on the currently set data table. Such update timing corresponds to the above-described first switching target frame.

If it is not time to update the key data (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, the particle dispersion object PC17 is grasped as a controlled object based on the currently set data table.

In the subsequent step S2109, processing for determining the blend ratio of key data is executed. In the process of determining the blending ratio, the currently set two key data KD1 to KD3 are obtained by referring to the blending table BT as shown in FIG. The data of the blend ratio when blending each coordinate data is read, and each coordinate data is blended by the read data.

In details about the blending table BT, the blending table BT is set with frame number data, and is set as front key data in a one-to-one correspondence with each frame number data. A ratio to be applied to each coordinate data set in the key data on the rear side and a ratio to be applied to each coordinate data set in the rear key data are set. In this case, the blending table BT is set so that the blending ratio changes at a constant rate every time the number of frames increases by 1, that is, every time the coordinate of each single particle image is updated. Specifically, for the key data on the front side, the blending ratio is decreased by 1% at each update timing, and for the key data on the rear side, the ratio is decreased by 1% The blending table BT is set so that the blending ratio increases step by step, and the sum of the ratio of the front side key data and the ratio of the rear side key data becomes 100% at each update timing.

Note that the blending table BT is not limited to the configuration in which the ratio is set to change by 1% at each update timing, and is set to 2% such as 2% or 3%. % or more, or may be set to change at a different rate instead of a fixed rate.

In step S2109, the blending table BT is referred to based on the currently set data table. In step S2109, based on the current pointer information set in the data table, the number of frames to be referred to in the blending table BT is grasped, and the number of front side key data set to that number of frames is determined. Read the ratio and the ratio of the key data on the rear side. In this case, if the currently set data table is the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the first key data KD1 corresponds to the front side key data, and the second key data KD2 corresponds to the rear side key data. Corresponds to data.

After that, in step S2110, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17 to update the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2111, the particle dispersion rendering is performed. After storing the update designation information, this calculation process ends.

When the arithmetic processing for particle dispersion rendering is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes information on the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC17 for the particle dispersion texture PC18. It is set together with the usage instruction information, and further the blending ratio data determined in step S2109 and the parameter calculated in step S2110 are set. In addition, update specification information for the dispersed particle effect, which indicates that the dispersed particle effect should be updated, is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S2107 that it is time to update the key data, the process advances to step S2112. In step S2112, the particle dispersion object PC17 is grasped as a controlled object based on the currently set data table.

In subsequent step S2113, a process of reading new key data is executed. In this process, the key data KD1 to KD3 next in order to the key data on the rear side of the currently set two key data are read from the memory module 133 . Specifically, since the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 are currently set, the last key data is the second key data KD2, and the next key data is It becomes the third key data KD3.

After that, in step S2114, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17 to update the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2115, the particle dispersion rendering is performed. After storing the update designation information, this calculation process ends.

When the arithmetic processing for particle dispersion rendering is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes information on the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC17 for the particle dispersion texture PC18. The third key data KD3 read out in step S2112 and the parameter calculated in step S2113 are set together with the usage instruction information. In addition, update specification information for the dispersed particle effect, which indicates that the dispersed particle effect should be updated, is set in the drawing list.

Incidentally, from the next processing when the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2107, and the processing of steps S2108 to S2111 is executed until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect. In this case, in step S2109, the blend ratios are sequentially determined with the second key data KD2 as the front side key data and the second key data KD2 as the rear side key data.

Next, setting processing for particle dispersion effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for particle dispersion effect is executed in the setting process for effect in step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the setting process for the dispersed particle effect is started when either the start designation information of the dispersed particle effect or the update designation information of the dispersed particle effect is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2202, based on the current rendering list, the address where the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored in the VRAM 134. Read out to the expansion buffer 141 . After that, in step S2203, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the current drawing list are stored in the register 153. FIG.

In subsequent step S2204, initial application processing is executed. In the initial application process, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1 to set the start coordinates of each vertex data. In step S2205, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

After that, in step S2206, the particle dispersion object PC17 is set to the world coordinate system, and then this setting process ends. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at coordinates corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1. In addition, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above, single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is generated. set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the particle dispersion effect start designation is not set in the current drawing list, the flow advances to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not new key data is specified in the current rendering list.

If not specified, coordinate blend processing is executed in step S2008. In the blending process, the currently set two pieces of key data, specifically each coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the first frame period, are set in the current drawing list. Blend according to the blend ratio data provided.

In this case, first, coordinate data corresponding to one vertex data of the first key data KD1 is read, and coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data of the second key data KD2 is read. Then, the former coordinate data is (x1, y1, z1), the latter coordinate data is (x2, y2, z2), the ratio of the front side key data read from the blend table BT is rt1, and from the blend table BT When the ratio of the key data on the rear side of the readout is rt2, the coordinate data (x, y, z) after blending is
x: x1 x rt1 + x2 x rt2
y: y1×rt1+y2×rt2
z: z1×rt1+z2×rt2
Blend so that Further, such blending is executed for coordinate data corresponding to all vertex data.

In the subsequent step S2209, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17. Thereafter, in step S2210, each coordinate data resulting from the blending in step S2208 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters grasped in step S2209 are applied to the particles. After setting for the distribution object PC 17, this setting process is terminated.

In this case, when setting each coordinate data that is the result of blending, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data that is the result of blending in step S2208. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at coordinates corresponding to the result of blending in step S2208. In addition, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above, single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is generated. set.

If it is determined in step S2207 that new key data is specified in the current rendering list, key data update processing is executed in step S2211. In the updating process, the front key data, specifically the first key data KD1, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153 is replaced with the new key data set in the current drawing list. , more specifically, to the third key data KD3.

In subsequent step S2212, application processing at the time of update is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. In step S2213, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

Thereafter, in step S2214, each coordinate data grasped in step S2212 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameter grasped in step S2214 is set to the particle dispersion object PC17. After setting the object PC 17, the setting process is terminated.

In this case, when setting the coordinate data grasped in step S2212, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten with the coordinate data grasped in step S2212. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2. In addition, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above, single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is generated. set.

Incidentally, from the next processing when the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2207, and the processing of steps S2208 to S2210 is executed until the end timing of the particle dispersion rendering. In this case, in step S2208, coordinates are blended using the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3.

Next, the contents of the particle dispersion effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion effect, and FIGS. 36(b-1) and (b-2) simply show how each individual particle image is displaced along which trajectory. It is an explanatory view for explaining.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the particle dispersion effect is executed as an effect for the game cycle, specifically when the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on one effective line when the game cycle ends. , the particle dispersion effect is executed. In the particle dispersion effect, a large number of single particle images PT that are "spherical bubbles" are displayed on the display surface G, and the large number of single particle images PT are displaced along a predetermined trajectory over a plurality of consecutive frames. to be displayed.

The predetermined trajectory will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 36(b-1) and 36(b-2). Each of the single particle image PT2 and the single particle image PT3 is displayed at a position corresponding to the starting coordinates indicated by the solid line in FIG. 36(b-1). In this case, the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

In the subsequent first frame period, the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed, so that the single particle image PT1, The single particle image PT2 and the single particle image PT3 are displayed as if they were displaced along different trajectories. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by blending the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are linear.

When the first frame period has passed, each coordinate data of the second key data KD2 is set, so that each of the single particle image PT1, the single particle image PT2, and the single particle image PT3 is displayed as shown in FIG. In 2), it is displayed at a position corresponding to the switching target coordinate indicated by the solid line. In this case, the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

In the subsequent second frame period, the blending process of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3 is executed, so that the single particle image PT1, The single particle image PT2 and the single particle image PT3 are displayed as if they were displaced along different trajectories. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by blending the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are linear. Also, the trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 in the second frame period are different from those in the first frame period.

As described above, in the particle dispersion rendering, the coordinate data of each vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC17 is set while using a blend of multiple types of key data KD1 to KD3, thereby reducing the data capacity and It is possible to perform a display effect as if a large number of single particle images are dispersed while balancing the reduction of the processing load.

That is, it is conceivable to set the animation data in which the coordinate data of the single image data are set over all the frames so as to correspond to all the single image data in a one-to-one correspondence, but in this case, the data capacity is required accordingly. Become. On the other hand, by using a blend of multiple types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, the necessary data volume can be reduced compared to the configuration in which all the animation data are set as described above. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, it is also conceivable to calculate the coordinate data of all single particle image data only by processing based on a program. A large program is required. On the other hand, by using a blend of multiple types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, the information for calculating the coordinate data is distributed appropriately between the program side and the data side. The load can be reduced.

In addition, by setting the single image data in correspondence with each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 instead of setting the single image data as an individual object, the data volume of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 can be reduced. becomes possible.

Also, in the VDP 135, when objects for setting single image data are read, instead of reading individual objects corresponding to each single image data, it is possible to read them as the particle dispersion object PC 17. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for the reading.

In addition, since the blend processing of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed by the VDP 135 instead of the display CPU 131, the processing load on the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

<Another Form of Setting Processing for Particle Dispersion Effect>
FIG. 37 is a flow chart for explaining another form of setting processing for particle dispersion effects executed by the VDP 135 .

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2302, based on the current drawing list, the address where the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the particle dispersion object PC17 is read out. After that, in step S2303, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the current drawing list are stored in the register 153. FIG.

In the subsequent step S2304, the address where the first texture and the second texture are stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the current drawing list.

Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of textures are also set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the key data KD1 to KD3. Specifically, a first texture, a second texture, and a third texture are set in one-to-one correspondence with the first key data KD1, the second key data KD2, and the third key data KD3. In a configuration in which four or more types of key data are set, four or more types of textures may be set correspondingly.

For each texture, single image data is set in one-to-one correspondence with each vertex data, similar to the particle dispersion texture PC18 shown in FIG. Since a plurality of types of textures are set for a single particle dispersion object PC17 in this way, the type of single image data set for one vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 can be set for a plurality of frames. (that is, the lapse of a plurality of update timings), and the change is made to a large number of vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17, more specifically, to all the vertex data.

For example, in the first texture, the single image data corresponding to the first vertex data is the first single image data for displaying the first single image (for example, "○" shown in FIG. 36). In the 2-texture, the single image data for the first vertex data is the second single image data for displaying the second single image (for example, "□" shown in FIG. 36). Similarly, in the first texture, the single image data for the second vertex data is the third single image data for displaying the third single image (for example, “Δ” shown in FIG. 36), In the second texture, the single image data for the second vertex data is single image data for displaying a single image different from the third single image (for example, "○" in FIG. 36).

After executing the process of step S2304, in step S2305, the initial application process is executed in the same manner as in step S2204. As a result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set to the start coordinates corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1.

Thereafter, in step S2306, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2307, After setting the particle dispersion object PC17 to the world coordinate system, the setting process ends. In addition, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the first texture out of the first texture and the second texture is applied to each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. is applied to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, the single image corresponding to the first texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the first key data KD1.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the particle dispersion rendering start designation is not set in the current drawing list, the flow advances to step S2308. In step S2308, it is determined whether or not new key data is specified in the current drawing list.

If not specified, in step S2309, the numerical information of the blending counter provided in the register 153 is updated so as to be incremented by one. Here, the blending counter is used to specify the blend ratio in the VDP 135 when blending coordinate data using a plurality of key data and when blending single image data using a plurality of textures. It is a counter for

The blending counter is set to "0" as an initial value. When the counter value is "1", the ratio of the front side key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 99% and the rear side key data is set to 99%. The ratio of the key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is 1%, the ratio of the texture on the front side (for example, the first texture) is set to 99%, and the ratio of the texture on the rear side (for example, the second texture) is set to 1%. %. When the counter value is "2", the ratio of front side key data (for example, first key data KD1) is set to 98% and the ratio of rear side key data (for example, second key data KD2) is set to 2. %, the ratio of the texture on the front side (for example, the first texture) is set to 98%, and the ratio of the texture on the rear side (for example, the second texture) is set to 2%. When the counter value is "99", the ratio of the front side key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 1% and the ratio of the rear side key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is set to 99. %, the ratio of the texture on the front side (for example, the first texture) is set to 1%, and the ratio of the texture on the rear side (for example, the second texture) is set to 99%. That is, as the number of frames advances, the application ratio of front key data is reduced, while the application ratio of rear key data is increased. Side texture application rate is increased.

Although the information of the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter as described above is stored in the memory module 133 in advance as table information, the present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical information of the blending counter is stored in advance. Information on the blending ratio corresponding to may be calculated by an arithmetic expression determined by a program.

In subsequent step S2310, a coordinate blending process is executed. In the blending process, the currently set two key data, specifically the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the case of the first frame period, are updated in step S2309. Blending is performed according to the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the later blending counter. A specific calculation method for this blend is the same as in step S2208.

In the following step S2311, texture blending processing is executed. In the blending process, two currently recognized textures, specifically each single image data of the first texture and the second texture in the first frame period, are used for blending after the update process in step S2309. Blend according to the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the counter.

For example, first, the single image data corresponding to one vertex data of the first texture is read, and the single image data corresponding to the vertex data of the second texture is read. RGB color information (r1, g1, b1) in the former single image data (here, it is assumed to be 1 pixel for convenience of explanation), and the latter single image data (here, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed to be 1 pixel). is (r2, g2, b2), rt3 is the ratio of the front texture corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter, and rt4 (rt3+rt4=1) is the ratio of the rear texture corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter. , the single image data (r, g, b) after blending is
r: r1×rt3+r2×rt4
g: g1×rt3+g2×rt4
b: b1×rt3+b2×rt4
Blend so that Further, such blending is executed for single image data corresponding to all vertex data.

Thereafter, in step S2312, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2313, After setting the particle dispersion object PC17 to the world coordinate system, the setting process ends.

In this case, when setting the coordinate data as the result of blending, the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to the coordinate data as the result of blending in step S2310. In addition, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, each single image data that is the result of blending in step S2311 is generated for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. Applies. As a result, the single image corresponding to the result of blending in step S2311 is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the result of blending in step S2310.

Here, since the VDP 135 is configured to derive the blending ratio using the blending counter as described above, the display CPU 131 does not execute processing for deriving the blending ratio. This reduces the processing load on the display CPU 131 .

It should be noted that the display CPU 131 does not display the key data when a predetermined combination of key data is used, such as the combination of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, or the combination of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3. The VDP 135 may be instructed how many times to change the data blending ratio, and according to the instruction, the VDP 135 may independently determine the blending ratio for each change for the predetermined combination of key data. In this case, when there are multiple types of periods using the same combination of predetermined key data, if the processing load on the VDP 135 is greater in a specific period than in other periods, in that specific period By reducing the number of changes instructed by the display CPU 131, the processing load of the VDP 135 can be reduced. Further, in the above configuration, the VDP 135 may be configured so that the blend ratio is changed at a constant rate at each change time. Data may be set so that the blend ratio for each change may be derived, or the blend ratio for each change may be derived by calculation.

If it is determined in step S2308 that new key data is specified in the current rendering list, a blending counter is initialized in step S2314. As a result, the calculation of the blend ratio is started from the beginning from the next processing cycle.

In subsequent step S2315, key data update processing is executed. In the updating process, the front key data, specifically the first key data KD1, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153 is replaced with the new key data set in the current drawing list. , more specifically, to the third key data KD3. Also, in step S2316, a new texture is grasped. In this process, of the two textures currently stored in the register 153, the front texture, specifically the first texture, is replaced with the new texture set in the current drawing list, specifically the first texture. 3 Rewrite to texture. Note that the third texture is read out from the memory module 133 at the time of this rewriting.

In subsequent step S2317, an update application process is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. In step S2318, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

Thereafter, in step S2319, each coordinate data grasped in step S2317 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameter grasped in step S2318 is set to the particle dispersion object PC17. After setting the object PC 17, the setting process is terminated.

In this case, when setting each coordinate data, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten with each coordinate data grasped in step S2317. In addition, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the second texture out of the second texture and the third texture is applied to each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. is applied to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, the single image corresponding to the second texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2.

Incidentally, from the next processing in which the third key data KD3 and the third texture are newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2308 until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect, and the processing of steps S2309 to S2313 is performed. to run. In this case, in step S2310, coordinate blending is performed using the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3, and in step S2311, single image data blending is performed using the second texture and the third texture. be.

In another form for executing the particle dispersion effect as described above, the texture applied to the same object is different as the effect progresses, thereby changing the display mode of the particle dispersion effect. is possible, and the monotony of the display effects can be suppressed. In this case, instead of using different textures for each frame whose display mode is changed, the texture corresponding to the first update timing and the second update timing after a plurality of update timings are used. The image data used between the first update timing and the second update timing is created by blending with the textures that have been processed, so the number of pre-stored textures can be reduced. As a result, the data capacity can be reduced.

Also, each texture is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each key data, and switching of each texture is performed in accordance with switching of each key data. Therefore, the processing load of processing related to switching in the VDP 135 can be reduced.

<Another form of particle dispersion effect>
・In the above particle dispersion effect (in the case of FIG. 35 and in the case of FIG. 37), set a larger number of key data KD1 to KD3 and set a smaller number of frames until switching of the key data KD1 to KD3 to be used occurs. By doing so (for example, every 10 frames), the single image may be displaced and displayed so as to draw a curved trajectory instead of a straight line while executing the blending of the coordinate data.

・The object to be blended using the key data KD1 to KD3 may be an α value for setting transparency in addition to or instead of the coordinate data. A vertex color may be used that enables determination of color information for a polygon composed of a plurality of vertex data. In addition, in a configuration that performs UV scrolling to change the display mode even when the same texture is pasted by changing the UV value for determining the relative pasting position of the texture with respect to the object, the UV The value may be changed using blending of key data.

- The first frame period and the second frame period are not limited to the same number of frames, and the number of frames included in these frame periods may be different. In this case, it is necessary to perform blending processing according to each frame period.

A configuration may be adopted in which the types of single image data for displaying single images are the same. In this case, since it is not necessary to set single image data corresponding to each single data in the particle dispersion texture PC 18, the data capacity of the particle dispersion texture PC 18 can be reduced.

- Instead of using two types of key data for blending, three or more types of key data may be used for blending. In this case, by appropriately changing the blending ratio of these three types of key data, it is possible to make the trajectory of the single image displaced not straight but curved. Also, when blending is performed using three or more types of key data, for example, a virtual arc or spherical surface is assumed by calculation from the three or more types of key data, and displacement is performed along the assumed virtual arc or spherical surface. A configuration may be adopted in which single images are displayed in such a way that they are displayed one after the other.

- The VDP 135 may have a dedicated circuit for calculating vertex data using key data. Also, the VDP 135 may have a dedicated circuit for calculating vertex data when key data is not used. By configuring these circuits individually, it becomes possible to specialize them in the calculation of the respective vertex data, and it is possible to perform the calculation of the vertex data favorably.

The configuration for deriving parameter data using key data as described above may be applied to a configuration for displaying an image using image data of two-dimensional information such as sprite data. For example, in deriving coordinate parameters for setting sprite data in the frame buffer 142, a plurality of key data may be blended.

<Configuration for displaying sea level>
Next, a configuration for displaying the sea surface will be described.

The sea surface display is an effect for displaying the sea surface in the background, and is an effect in which the sea surface is displayed in a wavy manner over a plurality of continuous frames (a plurality of image update timings). Note that the sea surface display is a display effect executed in the first display mode out of the first display mode and the second display mode described above. When displaying the sea surface, a sea surface object and normal map data for finely changing the movement of the sea surface object are used.

These sea surface objects and normal map data will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface object PC19, and FIG. 38(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal map data ND1 and ND2.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the sea surface object PC19 has a large number of surface data (polygons) SD defined by a plurality of vertex data in multiple rows and multiple columns. In this case, each surface data SD has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38(a), the surface data SD of the lower left corner has the information of the 1st column and 1st row as order information, and the surface data SD of the upper right corner in FIG. It has 25 rows of information as order information.

Each face data SD is defined as a quadrilateral with four vertex data, but is not limited to this, and may be defined as a triangle with three vertex data, or with five or more vertex data. It may be defined as other polygons. Also, any one surface data SD is adjacent to another surface data SD, and the vertex data of the one surface data SD also serves as the vertex data of the other surface data SD. In other words, adjacent surface data SD have common sides in each surface data SD. Therefore, basically, when the coordinate data of one vertex data is changed, a plurality of face data SD are transformed, and the coordinate data of one side composed of two adjacent vertex data is changed. In this case, the orientations of the plurality of plane data SD are changed.

Initial coordinate data of each vertex data is set in the sea surface object PC19 to determine the coordinates and orientation of the surface in the initial state of each surface data SD. In addition to this, the data of the initial scale of the sea surface object PC19, the data of the initial α value uniformly applied to all vertex data (or surface data SD), and the initial rotation angle of the sea surface object PC19 data, etc.

Here, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 is classified into a plurality of groups by grouping a plurality of adjacent surface data SD. Specifically, a first surface data group, . It has a data group (k is an integer of 2 or more, and k=25 in this embodiment). The number of surface data SD included in each surface data group is the same as a predetermined plural number (specifically, 25 pieces), but the number of surface data SD included in at least some of the surface data groups The numbers can be different. In FIG. 38(a), each unit surrounded by a thick line corresponds to the plane data group.

For each plane data group, the coordinates and plane orientation are individually determined based on the control of the display CPU 131 . Specifically, the entire surface data SD included in the first surface data group form the same surface facing a predetermined direction, and in this state, the coordinates of the surface data SD serving as a reference in the first surface data group are predetermined coordinates. The coordinates and surface orientation of each surface data SD included in the first surface data group are determined so that That is, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 are first roughly determined in units of sea surface data groups. Hereinafter, the coordinates and orientation determined for each surface data group are also referred to as the first-stage form.

Note that the reference plane data SD is a single plane data SD in each plane data group, but may be a plurality of plane data SD. Instead of setting the coordinates based on the surface data SD, it is also possible to set reference coordinates for the vertex data forming the corners of the surface data group. Reference coordinates may be set for all, or reference coordinates may be set for only one corner portion. In addition, in order to form a series of sea surface objects PC19, the coordinates and orientation of the surface are determined so that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary between the adjacent surface data groups are the same.

The normal map data ND1 and ND2 are data for differentiating the direction of each surface data SD included in each surface data group after the first stage form is determined for each surface data group. A plurality of types, specifically, two types of normal map data ND1 and ND2 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance. Each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 has a large number of unit normal data UND for changing the orientation of each surface data SD from the form of the first stage. In the following description, one of the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 is also called first normal map data ND1 and the other is called second normal map data ND2.

FIG. 38(b) is an image diagram of normal map data ND1 and ND2 having a large number of unit normal data UND. Indicates line data UND. In this case, each unit normal data UND in each normal map data ND1, ND2 has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38(b), the unit normal data UND at the lower left corner has the information of the first column and first row as order information, and the unit normal data UND at the upper right corner in FIG. 38(b) is It has the information of the 35th column and the 35th row as order information.

Each unit normal line data UND has direction data when changing the direction of each surface data SD from the form of the first stage and data of the amount of change when changing in that direction (hereinafter also referred to as change data). are doing. In this case, in one normal map data ND1, ND2, the data of the direction of change and the data of the amount of change in that direction are the same between some unit normal line data UND. However, it is not limited to this, and may be different among all the unit normal data UND.

The pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 includes the same change data determined by each unit normal line data UND, but the arrangement of the change data does not match. In this case, the change data determined by each unit normal data UND may be different in all the order information between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, and at least part of the order information may be different from each unit method. A configuration in which the change data determined by the line data UND is different may be employed. The normal map data ND1 and ND2 have the same number of unit normal data UND, but may be different.

The number of unit normal data UND in each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is set to be greater than the number of surface data SD forming the sea surface object PC19. In such a configuration, when applying the unit normal data UND of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 to the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19, in the range where the entire surface data SD is included in the normal map data ND1 and ND2, The unit normal data UND to be applied to the surface data SD serving as the reference is selected, and the relationship between them is used as a reference and the order information on the surface data SD side and the order information on the unit normal data UND side are used. The unit normal data UND corresponding to the surface data SD other than the reference surface data SD is selected.

More specifically, in the structure having the surface data SD for the m-th column and the n-th row (m and n are integers equal to or greater than 1), the reference surface data SD is the first column and first row, If the corresponding unit normal data UND is in the sth column and the tth row (s and t are integers equal to or greater than 1), the unit normal data UND used this time is in the sth column to the (s+m−1)th column. There are t-th column to (t+n−1)-th row. Therefore, the unit normal data UND are read from the normal map data ND1 and ND2. Each of the unit normal data UND thus read out is subjected to conversion of the order information by an operation in which the order information of the s-th column and the t-th row becomes the first column and the first row, and the converted order information is associated with the surface data SD having the same order information as

A method of applying a pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 to the sea surface object PC19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the normal map data ND1 and ND2 are used to change the orientation of the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19, a pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 are used for the sea surface object. It is applied to PC 19 at the same time. In this case, when the sea surface display is started, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of one of the normal map data ND1 matches the corner portion of the sea surface object PC19 on the same side, and the sea surface object PC19 Data setting is performed so that all surface data SD correspond to different unit normal line data UND. Similarly, for the other normal map data ND2, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of the normal map data ND2 matches the corner portion of the sea surface object PC19 on the same side, and Data setting is performed so that all surface data SD of the PC 19 correspond to different unit normal line data UND.

In this case, the unit normal data UND of one normal map data ND1 and the unit normal data UND of the other normal map data ND2 simultaneously correspond to the same surface data SD. When applying the changed data of the unit normal data UND to the surface data SD, the direction of the surface data SD by the changed data corresponding to one normal map data ND1 and the direction corresponding to the other normal map data ND2 are changed. Each change data is blended so as to have an orientation intermediate to the orientation of the surface data SD by the change data, and the change data resulting from the blending is applied to the surface data SD.

In FIG. 39(a), the position of the corner portion, which is the reference at the start, differs between the normal map data ND1 and the normal map data ND2. good too. Even in this case, since the arrangement of the modified data differs between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, the content of the modified data applied to the surface data SD is the same for both normal map data ND1 and ND2. Such an event does not occur for all surface data SD.

After that, as the number of frames in the sea surface display progresses, as shown in FIG. Both normal map data ND1 and ND2 are changed respectively. However, at the time of this change, the change is made so that all the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 correspond to different unit normal line data UND.

By changing the unit normal data UND corresponding to the plane data SD serving as the reference in this way, it is possible to gradually change the manner in which the direction of each plane data SD is changed, and the sea surface display can be varied. It becomes possible to assume that Further, by blending the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, even if the variation of the change data is suppressed to some extent in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is practically applied to the surface data SD. It is possible to increase the variation of change data that can be used.

Next, how to apply change data to each surface data SD will be described with reference to FIG.

As already explained, the unit normal data UND is individually associated with each surface data SD. Changed data based on the unit normal data UND is applied only to a portion of the surface data SD1 in each surface data group. Specifically, the surface data SD1 to be applied is predetermined so that the change data is not applied to the surface data SD sharing the same vertex data at the same time.

Specifically, the surface data SD1 to which the change data is applied in each surface data group is limited to a part as shown in FIG. Due to the presence of the surface data SD2, the surface data SD1 to be applied do not share the vertex data. In addition, since the surface data SD1 to be applied does not constitute a corner portion in the surface data group, the vertex data are not shared by the surface data SD1 to be applied even when viewed between the surface data groups. not With such a configuration, even if the orientation of the surface data SD is changed at random using the normal map data ND1 and ND2, the surface data SD1 to be applied can be separated from each other. Therefore, the surface data SD2 for buffering for absorbing the difference in the orientation of the sea surface object PC19 can be ensured as a surface.

FIGS. 40(b-1) and (b-2) show how the orientation of each surface data SD is changed from the form of the first stage by applying the change data to the surface data SD1 to be applied. show. As shown in FIG. 40(b-1), in the form of the first stage, the surface data SD1 and SD2 included in the predetermined surface data group face the same direction and form the same surface. there is

Among these surface data SD1 and SD2, the second and fourth surface data SD1 are the application target surface data SD1. Some change data is applied. At this time, as shown in FIG. 40(b-2), the orientations of the second and fourth plane data SD1 are changed based on the corresponding change data. Moreover, the first, third, and fifth surface data SD2, which are buffer surface data SD2 instead of the surface data SD1 to be applied, are the sea surface object in the mode with the smallest amount of change from the form in the first stage. The orientation is changed so as to ensure the continuity of the surface of the PC 19 .

A specific processing configuration for setting the orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 will be described below.

FIG. 41(a) is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for sea surface display executed by the display CPU 131. FIG. The arithmetic processing for displaying the sea surface is executed in the background arithmetic processing in step S903 of the task processing (FIG. 14). Calculation processing for sea surface display is executed in the first display mode, and is executed as part of the processing of steps S1502 to S1505 in FIG.

First, in step S2401, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the sea surface is being displayed. If sea surface display is not being executed, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not it is time to start sea surface display. If it is not the start timing, this operation processing ends as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process advances to step S2403.

In step S2403, based on the currently set data table, the sea surface object PC19 is grasped as a control target. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2403, the control start process for the sea surface object PC19 has been completed in the previous control start setting process (step S901). Further, information for controlling the sea surface object PC 19 whose control has been started is stored in the work RAM 132 until the sea surface display is completed.

In subsequent step S2404, information is stored for instructing the VDP 135 to control the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2. However, the display CPU 131 does not execute the arithmetic processing necessary to actually apply the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 to the sea surface object PC19. That is, the display CPU 131 instructs the VDP 135 to use the data ND1 and ND2 as the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2. Do not perform arithmetic processing to control This reduces the processing load on the display CPU 131 .

In the following step S2405, sea surface animation data is read out from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. FIG. FIG. 41(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface animation data AD. The sea surface animation data AD is data for controlling the sea surface object PC19 in units of surface data groups. A first-stage form is determined for the object PC19 for use.

More specifically, in the sea surface animation data AD, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set so as to have serial numbers. Data is set. For example, for the first surface data group, reference coordinate data (A1-1) and orientation data (B1-1) are set in association with the first pointer information. Reference coordinate data (A1-2) and direction data (B1-2) are set corresponding to the information, and f-th pointer information (f is an integer of 3 or more, for example, "50"). , reference coordinate data (A1-f) and orientation data (B1-f) are set. In addition, reference coordinate data and orientation data are also set for the second plane data group, .

The pointer information is updated each time the sea surface is displayed and progresses by one frame (each time the image is updated). will be changed to the order of In this case, the continuous reference coordinate data and orientation data are set so that the first stage form has motion continuity in each plane data group.

Further, although the arrangement of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data associated with the progress of the pointer information is different between the plane data groups, it should be arranged such that the morphological continuity is not lost between the adjacent plane data groups. The reference coordinate data and orientation data are set. That is, a surface data group having multiple sides in contact with another surface data group is released from contact with the other surface data group when the reference coordinates and orientation of the other surface data group are determined. Otherwise, the reference coordinates and orientation will be restricted, and in some cases will be uniquely defined. In such a situation, the reference coordinates and orientation of each plane data group are determined in advance so as not to cancel the state of contact with the other plane data group. Specifically, as already described, the reference coordinate data and the orientation data are determined so that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary between the adjacent plane data groups are the same.

Returning to the description of FIG. 41A, after reading out the sea surface animation data AD in step S2405, initial setting data is grasped from the sea surface animation data AD in step S2406. Specifically, as start data, a combination of reference coordinate data and direction data set in association with the first pointer information is read for the entire data group. After that, in step S2407, after the sea surface display start designation information is stored, this calculation processing ends.

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the sea surface is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the information of the use instruction of the sea surface object PC 19, and the first method is set in the drawing list. Information for instructing the use of the line map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is set. Furthermore, the initial setting data for the first-stage form grasped in step S2406 is set, and sea surface display start designation information indicating that the sea surface display should be started is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S2401 that the sea surface display is being executed, the process advances to step S2408. In step S2408, based on the currently set data table, the sea surface object PC19 is grasped as a control target. Also, in step S2409, the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are grasped as objects to be controlled based on the currently set data table.

In the subsequent step S2410, the pointer information of the sea surface animation data AD already read out to the work RAM 132 is updated so as to be incremented by 1, and in step S2411, update data corresponding to the updated pointer information is grasped. . Specifically, for this grasping process, a combination of reference coordinate data and orientation data set in association with the updated pointer information is read out for the entire data group as update data. After that, in step S2412, after storing the sea level display update designation information, this calculation processing ends.

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the sea surface is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the information of the use instruction of the sea surface object PC 19, and the first method is set in the drawing list. Information for instructing the use of the line map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is set. Also, the update data for the first-stage form grasped in step S2411 is set in the drawing list. Furthermore, sea surface display update specification information indicating that the sea surface display should be updated is set in the drawing list.

The pointer information of the sea surface animation data AD may correspond to the total number of frames in which the sea surface is displayed. set to a small number. In this case, the pointer information becomes the last one during the execution of the sea surface display, but the first pointer information is restored in the next frame which becomes the last order. In view of the fact that the pointer information loops in this way, the first-stage form in which the pointer information is the last order and the first-stage form in which the pointer information is the first order are the movements of the sea surface object PC19. It is preferable to have continuity.

Next, the sea surface display setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The sea surface display setting process is executed in the first display mode, and is executed as a part of the process of steps S1703 to S1708 in FIG. The sea surface display setting process is started when either the sea surface display start designation information or the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not sea surface display start designation information is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, the process advances to step S2502.

In step S2502, based on the current rendering list, the address at which the sea surface object PC19 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the sea surface object PC19 is read out to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM134. Also, in step S2503, based on the current drawing list, the memory module 133 grasps the addresses where the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are stored, and draws these first normal maps. The data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are read out to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 .

In the subsequent step S2504, the initial setting data (data extracted from the sea surface animation data AD) set in the current drawing list is grasped. Set the object PC19 for the world coordinate system. As a result, the sea surface object PC19 is set in the world coordinate system in a state of being in the form of the first stage.

In subsequent step S2506, initial setting processing of the first normal map data ND1 to the world coordinate system is executed, and in step S2507, initial setting processing of the second normal map data ND2 to the world coordinate system is executed. As a result, the unit normal line data UND and the second normal line of the first normal map data ND1 are generated for each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 so as to achieve the state described with reference to FIG. 39(a). The unit normal line data UND of the map data ND2 are associated.

Thereafter, in step S2508, normal parameter setting processing is executed, and this setting processing ends. Such normal parameter setting processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal parameter is a parameter that determines the orientation of the surface data SD, and more specifically, determines the coordinates of the vertex data that constitutes the surface data SD.

In the normal parameter setting process, first, in step S2601, an application counter provided in the register 153 is initialized. In this process, the application counter specifies the surface data SD1 to which the change data set in the unit normal data UND of the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is applied in the VDP 135. , and when the applied counter is initialized, numerical information corresponding to the number of surface data SD1 to be applied is set in the applied counter.

In the subsequent step S2602, change data is read from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical information of the applied counter in the first normal map data ND1. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the applied counter is grasped, and then the unit normal data UND associated with the surface data SD1 in the first normal map data ND1 is grasped. do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal line data UND is read.

In the subsequent step S2603, change data is read from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical information of the applied counter in the second normal map data ND2. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the applied counter is grasped, and then the unit normal data UND associated with the surface data SD1 in the second normal map data ND2 is grasped. do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal line data UND is read.

In subsequent step S2604, blending processing is executed between the modified data read from the first normal map data ND1 in step S2602 and the modified data read out from the second normal map data ND2 in step S2603. In this blending process, as already described, the orientation of the surface data SD1 based on the modified data corresponding to the first normal map data ND1 and the orientation of the surface data SD1 based on the modified data corresponding to the second normal map data ND2 are used. Blending of each change data is performed so that the orientation is intermediate between .

Note that the blending is not limited to a configuration in which the blending is performed in the middle of each orientation of the surface data SD1 when each change data is applied. The configuration may be such that the modified data side or the modified data side related to the second normal map data ND2 is used.

In subsequent step S2605, the change data resulting from the blending in step S2604 is applied to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter. As a result, the orientation of the surface data SD1 is changed from the orientation in the form of the first stage to the orientation corresponding to the changed data after blending. However, as already explained, since the change data is given as a relative amount of change from the form of the first stage as a reference, the change data is not applied as it is, but With the direction as a reference, the direction corresponding to the change data after blending is changed by the corresponding amount of change.

In the following step S2606, the surface data SD2 adjacent to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter, that is, the surface data SD2 sharing the vertex data with the surface data SD1 to be applied (the already-described buffer buffer (corresponding to surface data SD2) is changed in accordance with the change in the coordinates of the shared vertex data. In this case, for the vertex data not shared with the surface data SD1 to be applied this time, the direction of the adjacent surface data SD2 is changed without changing the coordinates from the form of the first stage.

In the following step S2607, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter, the numerical information of the application counter is updated so that the target for normal parameter setting shifts to the next surface data SD1 to be applied.

After that, in step S2608, it is determined whether or not the updated numerical information of the applied counter is information indicating that the setting for all the surface data SD1 to be applied has been completed. 0” is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S2608, the process returns to step S2602, and the processing of steps S2602 to S2607 is executed for the new surface data SD1 to be applied. , to end this setting process.

Returning to the description of the sea surface display setting process (FIG. 42), if a negative determination is made in step S2501, then in step S2509 the update data set in the current drawing list (from the sea surface animation data AD to (extracted data) is grasped, and in step S2510, the grasped update data is set in the sea surface object PC19 already set in the world coordinate system. In this case, the update data overwrites the coordinate and direction data of each plane data group of the sea surface object PC19. As a result, the sea surface object PC19 is again set in the world coordinate system in the state of the first stage.

In subsequent step S2511, update processing of the first normal map data ND1 is executed, and in step S2512, update processing of the second normal map data ND2 is executed. As a result, the unit normal line data UND and the second normal line data UND of the first normal line map data ND1 associated with each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 and the second normal line data UND are generated so as to achieve the state described with reference to FIG. 39(b). The unit normal data UND of the line map data ND2 is changed.

Thereafter, after executing the normal parameter setting process in step S2508, this setting process ends. The normal parameter setting process is as described above.

As described above, the coordinates and orientation in the world coordinate system of each surface data SD constituting the sea surface object PC19 are determined. Then, for the surface data SD, color information is set in the color information setting process of step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). In this case, setting of color information for the surface data SD is performed by a technique different from the texture mapping process. This method will be explained.

FIGS. 44A to 44C are explanatory diagrams for explaining a technique for setting color information in each surface data SD.

In the color information setting process (step S1009), as shown in FIG. 16, the process of setting each object to the world coordinate system is completed, the process of setting to the visual field coordinate system in step S1006, and the clipping process of step S1007. is executed after Therefore, at the timing when the color information setting process is executed, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 are already set after being converted into the visual field coordinate system.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 44(a), a viewpoint VD as a reference of the visual field coordinate system is set, and the sea surface object PC19 is set so as to be positioned above the viewpoint VD. there is In other words, the sea surface display in the pachinko machine 10 is a display with the sea as a background, and is an effect in which the sea surface is displayed in a state of looking up from the sea.

When setting the color information for each plane data SD, when a light source is temporarily placed above the sea surface object PC19, the transmitted light from the light source is determined by the position of the viewpoint VD in relation to the coordinates and direction of the plane data SD. Assuming whether or not it is possible to visually recognize the sea surface object PC19, the surface data SD corresponding to the transmission of the light from the light source and the light from the light source are all on the upper side of the sea surface object PC19. It is sorted into surface data SD corresponding to reflection but not transmission.

In this allocation, instead of setting the light source in the lighting process (step S1008) of the drawing process (FIG. 16), The surface data SD is sorted into one of a large amount of transmitted light and a small amount of transmitted light.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44(b-1) and (b-2), the coordinate and direction data of the surface data SD are first used to determine the shape of the surface data SD viewed from the viewpoint VD. A refraction angle β, which is an angle, is calculated. For this calculation, a table in which refraction angle data is set in one-to-one correspondence with coordinate and direction data is read from the memory module 133 and used. , the refraction angle may be calculated by the calculation formula.

Here, the setting of the color information for the surface data SD is based on the premise that light is incident on the sea surface from the atmosphere. will be less. Based on this assumption, the VDP 135, after calculating the refraction angle β, determines whether or not the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle. When the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44(b-1)), the surface data SD that produces the refraction angle β is classified as having a large amount of transmitted light, and the refraction angle β is greater than or equal to a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44(b-2)), the surface data SD that produces that refraction angle β is classified as having less transmitted light. Incidentally, the surface data SD that does not have a component in the direction facing the viewpoint VD side, such as when it has a component in the direction opposite to the viewpoint VD side, is classified as having little transmitted light. be done.

After the classification as described above, the color information of each surface data SD is determined using a color table CT as shown in FIG. 44(c). The color table CT is pre-stored in the memory module 133, and includes a plurality of color numbers. data and these color numbers. The color information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the data of . The color table CT also contains correlation data that is referred to when determining which color information is to be applied to the surface data SD.

In this case, color no. "7" is applied to the surface data SD classified as having less transmitted light. On the other hand, color No. "1" to "6" are applied to the surface data SD classified as having a large amount of transmitted light, and a plurality of types of color information are set for the surface data SD classified as such. . Which color information is set for the plane data SD of the relevant classification is determined not by the orientation of the plane data SD, but by the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD.

Specifically, the vertex data of one corner portion (for example, the lower left corner portion in the state of FIG. 38A) in the surface data SD is used as reference vertex data, and the Z coordinate data of the reference vertex data is If it is equal to or less than the first stage threshold "Z1" (that is, if the Z coordinate is closer to the viewpoint VD than "Z1"), "CL1" is selected as the color information, and the first stage threshold " Z1” and equal to or less than the second stage threshold value “Z2”, “CL2” is selected as the color information, and is greater than the second stage threshold value “Z2” and the third stage threshold value “Z2”. If it is equal to or less than the threshold "Z3", "CL3" is selected as the color information. Then, in the same manner, "CL4" and "CL5" are selected corresponding to the range of each threshold, and the Z coordinate data of the reference vertex data is greater than "Z5", which is the fifth stage threshold. In this case, "CL6" is selected as color information.

These color information "CL1" to "CL6" are set so that the color becomes darker toward the rear side. Specifically, the color information "CL1" is set as white, and the color information "CL6" is set as dark blue. , and the color information "CL2" to "CL5" are set as their intermediate colors. Further, the color information "CL7" is set as a darker color than the color information "CL6", specifically, it is set as a blue color close to black.

A specific processing configuration for setting color information in each surface data SD will be described below.

FIG. 45(a) is a flow chart showing the sea surface display color information setting process executed by the VDP 135. FIG. The color information setting process for displaying the sea surface is executed in the color information setting process of step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). The sea surface display color information setting process is started when either the sea surface display start designation information or the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S2701, initialization processing of the application counter is executed. In this process, the applied counter has the role of specifying the surface data SD for which color information is to be set in the VDP 135, and is included in the sea surface object PC 19 when the applied counter is initialized. Numerical information corresponding to the number of face data SD is set in the application counter.

In the subsequent step S2702, orientation data is grasped from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the applied counter in the sea surface object PC 19, and in step S2703, the refraction angle is calculated from the grasped orientation data. Then, in step S2704, it is determined whether or not the calculated refraction angle is greater than or equal to the reference angle.

If the angle is greater than or equal to the reference angle, in step S2705, the color No. in the color table CT is determined. 7 (“CL7”) is set for the surface data SD that is the current object. On the other hand, if the angle is less than the reference angle, the Z-coordinate data of the plane data SD of interest this time is read out in step S2706, and the corresponding color NO. . (one of "CL1" to "CL6") is set for the surface data SD that is the target this time.

After executing the processing in step S2705 or step S2707, in step S2708, the numerical information of the application counter is decremented by 1 so that the target for setting color information shifts to the next surface data SD. update the numerical information of . After that, in step S2709, it is determined whether or not the updated numerical information of the applied counter is information indicating that the setting of the color information for all the surface data SD has been completed. 0” is determined.

If a negative determination is made in step S2709, the process returns to step S2702, and the processing of steps S2702 to S2708 is executed for the new surface data SD. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, the main color information setting process ends.

FIG. 45(b) is a flowchart showing sea level adjustment processing executed by the VDP 135. FIG. The adjustment process for the sea surface is executed in the drawing data creation process for the background in step S1010 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). More specifically, although not shown in FIG. 27 and not explained, it is executed between steps S1802 and S1803. That is, after the three-dimensional image data for background is converted into two-dimensional image data, adjustment processing for sea surface is performed.

First, in step S2711, it is determined whether or not any of the sea surface display start designation information and the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current rendering list. If none of them are set, the adjustment process is terminated as it is. If either one is set, in step S2712 the sea surface is blurred, and then this adjustment process ends.

In the sea surface blurring process, the blurring process using a Gaussian filter is performed on the background two-dimensional image data created using the hidden surface process (step S1802). Specifically, one pixel is extracted from the area corresponding to the sea surface display, and a predetermined number (for example, five) of pixels are extracted on both sides of the pixel in the X-axis direction. After that, weighting according to the distance from the center pixel is determined using a Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended (synthesized) with the determined weighting applied. Similarly, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of pixels are extracted on both sides of the same pixel in the Y-axis direction. After that, a weighting according to the distance from the center pixel is determined using a Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended with the determined weighting applied. Then, blurring processing using the Gaussian filter is performed on all the pixels forming the area corresponding to the sea surface display.

Next, the contents of the sea surface display will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display of the sea surface, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram for simply explaining how to set the color information of the area where the sea surface is displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 46(a), an image showing the underwater is displayed in the background where a plurality of patterns are displayed in a variable manner. A sea level display SP is provided above this background. In this case, the orientation of the surface data SD for displaying the sea surface is finely controlled, and the color information is set according to the finely controlled state. The transmission of light from the atmosphere to the sea is realistically expressed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a realistic sea surface display SP.

Further, since the orientation of each surface data SD is adjusted after setting the first-stage form of the sea surface object PC19, the large movements of the sea surface are assumed to be regular, but the Inside, it is possible to give irregularity to the direction of each surface data SD.

Further, when controlling the movement of each surface data SD individually, the use of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 eliminates the need to individually change the direction of each surface data SD by calculation. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load. In particular, by changing the positions of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 in the world coordinate system, the unit normal data UND associated with each surface data SD is changed as the sea surface display SP progresses. When the direction of the surface data SD is changed in a complicated manner as the sea surface display SP progresses, it is possible to use the same normal map data ND1 and ND2 and the same application processing. is reduced and the processing load is reduced.

In addition, since the display CPU 131 determines the rough movement using the sea surface animation data AD, and the VDP 135 determines the fine orientation of the surface using the normal map data ND1 and ND2. , the processing load is distributed.

Further, as already explained, by executing the sea surface blurring process, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the pixel PS (left pixel PS) and the pixel PS (right pixel PS) set with color information corresponding to the highest light transmission is interposed between the pixel PS (center side pixel PS) in which the color information of these two pixels PS are blended. of pixels PS) will exist. As a result, in a configuration in which color information is individually set in the area where the sea surface display SP is performed, it is possible to make the boundary between portions with different color information inconspicuous.

Further, since the blurring process is executed after converting the image into a two-dimensional image, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the blurring process is executed in the state of the three-dimensional image.

<Another form of color information setting processing for sea surface display>
FIG. 47 is a flow chart for explaining another form of the sea surface display color information setting process executed by the VDP 135 .

First, in step S2801, as in step S2701, the application counter is initialized. In the following step S2802, as in step S2702 above, orientation data is grasped from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the applied counter in the sea surface object PC 19, and in step S2803, as in step S2703 above, The angle of refraction is calculated from the grasped orientation data.

In subsequent step S2804, color information is derived from information on the refraction angle calculated in step S2803. In this case, when deriving the color information, the color table in which the refraction angle information and the color information are associated is read from the memory module 133, and the color information corresponding to the refraction angle information is read. In other words, in this alternative embodiment, color information is read directly from the information on the refraction angle.

Then, in step S2805, the Z-coordinate data of the surface data SD of interest this time is read out, and in step S2806, color information adjustment processing corresponding to the read-out Z-coordinate data is executed. In this case, processing is executed to increase the shift amount when the color information set in step S2804 is shifted toward the dark color side for the surface data SD existing at a distance farther from the viewpoint VD.

In the following step S2807, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter, the numerical information of the application counter is updated so that the target for which color information is to be set shifts to the next surface data SD. After that, in step S2808, it is determined whether or not the updated numerical information of the applied counter is information indicating that the setting of the color information for all the surface data SD has been completed. 0” is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the process returns to step S2802, and the processing of steps S2802 to S2807 is executed for the new surface data SD. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the main color information setting process ends.

<Other forms>
- The number of unit normal data UND included in one normal map data ND1, ND2 may be less than or equal to the number of surface data SD included in the sea surface object PC19. In this case, by arranging a plurality of identical normal map data ND1 and ND2, all of the surface data SD may be associated with the unit normal data UND.

- A plurality of types of normal map data ND1 and ND2 need not be set, and a single normal map data may be set. In this case, when displaying the sea surface, only the single normal map data may be applied to the sea surface object PC19. Even with this configuration, by changing the position of the normal map data applied to the sea surface object PC19, it is possible to change the orientation of each surface data SD as the sea surface display progresses. In addition, by simultaneously reading out a plurality of the single normal map data and by differentiating the position applied to the sea surface object PC19 in the plurality of normal map data, it is possible to control the direction of the complicated surface. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

・The target to which the unit normal data UND of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied is limited to a configuration in which multiple surface data SD sharing the same vertex data are not simultaneously applied. Instead, the unit normal data UND may be applied to the entire surface data SD. However, in this configuration, since different coordinates are set simultaneously for one vertex data, it is necessary to perform the adjustment separately. For example, the priority when setting the coordinates of the vertex data is determined in advance for the adjacent surface data SD, and the unit normal data UND is applied as is to the surface data SD with the higher priority, and the surface with the lower priority is applied. As for the data SD, while maintaining the coordinates of the vertex data determined by the surface data SD having the higher priority, the orientation determined by the unit normal data UND applied to itself is brought closer than the state of the form of the first stage. It is good also as composition adjusted so that.

・The setting of color information for each surface data SD is not limited to the setting method using the color table CT or the setting method shown in FIG. In the processing, a virtual light source may be set on the opposite side of the viewpoint VD across the sea surface object PC19, and the transmission amount of light from the virtual light source may be individually calculated for each surface data SD. In this case, a configuration is conceivable in which color information corresponding to the amount of light transmitted is derived using predetermined table information, and the derived color information is set in each surface data SD. Further, it is conceivable that initial color information is set in advance for each surface data SD, and the color information is adjusted in relation to the calculated amount of transmission.

The configuration in which the sea surface object PC19 is set above the viewpoint VD is not limited, and a configuration in which the sea surface object PC19 is set below the viewpoint VD may be employed. In this case, after the orientation of each surface data SD is determined by each of the methods described above, if the orientation of each surface data SD is a direction that easily reflects light, bright color information is set. Dark color information is set for a direction in which light is easily transmitted. For this setting, table information prepared in advance may be used, or a virtual light source may be used for actual calculation.

The brightest color information may be set for the surface data SD for which the derived refraction angle is equal to or less than a predetermined angle, regardless of the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD. Alternatively, for surface data SD for which the derived refraction angle is equal to or less than a predetermined angle, color information that is brighter than for other refraction angles is set, and based on that color information, from the viewpoint VD The color information may be adjusted so that the longer the distance in the Z-axis direction, the darker the image.

The processing configuration for controlling the direction of the surface and setting the color information as described above does not have to be the surface of the sea, but may be the surface of other water such as a river or a pond. Further, when expressing a transmissive film or a reflective film that changes the state of the surface with time, a processing configuration for setting color information by controlling the orientation of the surface as described above may be applied.

The target of parameters controlled using map data is not limited to the orientation and coordinates, and may be the color of the surface or the transparency value of the surface.

The number of unit normal data UND included in the normal map data ND1 and ND2 may be smaller than the number of surface data SD included in the sea surface object PC19. In this case, one normal map data ND1, ND2 is applied to a predetermined number of surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19, and the same normal map data ND1, ND2 are applied again to the remaining surface data SD. Apply it.

- In the normal parameter setting process (FIG. 43), the process of step S2606, that is, the process of adjusting adjacent surface data may not be executed. In this case, regarding the buffer surface data SD2, of the plurality of vertex data held by the surface data SD2, the vertex data shared with the surface data SD1 to be applied is Changed but non-shared vertex data maintains the coordinates set in the first stage configuration. Even in this case, the orientation and size of the buffer plane data SD2 are changed according to the change in the orientation and size of the plane data SD1 to be applied.

- Instead of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 that directly control the direction of the surface data SD, map data that directly controls the coordinates of each vertex data of the sea surface object PC19 may be used. In this case, by applying the map data to the sea surface object PC19, the coordinates of the vertex data are changed, and as a result of the change, the direction of the surface data SD is changed. With this configuration, the object to be controlled is not a surface but a vertex. you don't have to do it. The control amount of each vertex data set in the map data is preferably the amount of change from the coordinates in the form of the first stage.

The configuration in which the sea surface object PC19 is divided into a plurality of surface data groups is not essential, and a configuration in which such a distinction is not made is also possible. In this case, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 is individually controlled using the normal map data ND1 and ND2.

・At the same update timing, the setting of the form in the first stage based on performing control in units of surface data groups, and the individual control of the direction of the surface data SD using the normal map data ND1, ND2, etc. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which both are performed. For example, the configuration of the first stage is set at one update timing, the orientation of the surface data SD is individually controlled at the next and subsequent update timings, and furthermore, these are controlled. It is good also as a structure which repeats. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load at one update timing.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which color information is selected according to the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, and the color information is selected according to the distance from the viewpoint VD determined by the X, Y, and Z coordinates. may be configured. Alternatively, the color information may be selected according to the distance in the X-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, or the color information may be selected according to the distance in the Y-axis direction. Alternatively, the color information may be selected according to the rotational position or scale of the target object instead of the distance from the viewpoint VD.

<Configuration for Focus Display>
Next, a configuration for performing focus display will be described.

Focus display refers to the case where a plurality of types of individual images are simultaneously displayed on the display surface G as if they were at different positions in the depth direction of the display surface G, and the images are present at a predetermined position or range in the depth direction. Is the individual image in focus, and the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved portion, and the outer edge of the individual image are clearly displayed, and are they located on the front side and the back side? The individual images displayed in this way are out of focus, and the borders of the pattern, the borders of the curved portions, and the outer edge portions are unclear and displayed in a blurred state.

The focus display is performed during the game play and during the opening/closing execution mode, in which the processing load required for image display is relatively low. In other words, during the game round, it is necessary to perform the variable display of the symbols according to the predetermined animation data in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3. At least the process of step S905 is executed. On the other hand, during the open/close execution mode, since it is not necessary to perform the variable display of symbols in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, in the task processing of the display CPU 131 (FIG. 14), steps S903 and S904 are executed. S905 is not executed. Since the processing load of the display CPU 131 is reduced by this amount during the open/close execution mode, the reduced amount is used to execute control for focus display.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the effect arithmetic processing in the opening/closing execution mode executed by the display CPU 131. As shown in FIG. The effect calculation processing in the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the effect calculation processing in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14). Further, the operation processing for effect in the opening/closing execution mode is started when the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is set.

First, in step S2901, based on the currently set data table, the effect object to be updated this time is grasped. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2901, the setting process (step S901) for starting control of the effect object is completed. In the following step S2902, various parameters of the comprehended object for effect are calculated to update the information for control.

In the subsequent step S2903, the teaching object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. A teaching object is an object that is used to display an image that enables the player to learn the game situation. For example, if a round is in progress, what round is the current round? Such contents are taught using teaching objects (see FIG. 52). In addition, information on the type of combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed on the active line in the game round that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode is taught using a teaching object (see FIG. 52). Incidentally, at the execution timing of the processing in step S2903, the setting processing for starting control of the teaching object (step S901) has been completed. In subsequent step S2904, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update control information.

In subsequent step S2905, based on the data table currently set, it is determined whether or not it is the focus effect period in the opening/closing execution mode. The focus effect period is a period during which focus display can be performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player. In this pachinko machine 10, a focus effect period is set as a part of the period of the opening and closing execution mode. ), the focus effect period is set. However, it is not limited to this, and the focus effect period may be set for a plurality of rounds, the focus effect period may be set in the opening or ending, and the focus effect period may be set between rounds. A focus effect period may be set over a predetermined round and the next round, or the entire open/close execution mode may be set as a round effect period.

If it is not the focus effect period (step S2905: NO), the main effect calculation process is terminated. When the effect arithmetic processing in the open/close execution mode is executed in this way, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing contains the instructions for using the effect object ascertained in step S2901. Information is set along with information of texture usage instructions corresponding to those objects. In addition, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set, and the instruction object usage instruction information grasped in step S2903 is set. The calculated parameters are set.

If it is the focus effect period (step S2905: YES), it is determined in step S2906 whether or not it is the focus selection period. In the focus effect period, a focus selection period is set in which the player can select the focus over a predetermined number of frames such as 300 frames (predetermined multiple image update timings) from the start timing. The focus display execution period is set to be performed when the player issues a focus selection instruction based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 during the focus selection period. This ping and display execution period will continue until the end of the round in which it is being executed. Individual images that are subject to focus selection during the focus selection period continue to be displayed during the subsequent focus display execution period, so it is possible to execute focus display that reflects the results of focus selection during the focus selection period. becomes.

Note that the focus display execution period is executed over a predetermined number of frames (a plurality of predetermined image update timings) such as at least 500 frames. Alternatively, a predetermined round may be set as the focus selection period, and subsequent rounds may be set as the focus display execution period.

If it is the focus selection period (step S2906: YES), in step S2907, the parameter adjustment process for focus selection is executed. Terminate the calculation process for

When the effect arithmetic processing in the open/close execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes the instruction for using the effect object grasped in step S2901. is set together with the information of the texture use instruction corresponding to those objects. In addition, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set, and the instruction object usage instruction information grasped in step S2903 is set. The calculated parameters are set. Further, in the drawing list, a parameter for focus selection is set as a parameter of the object for effect grasped in step S2901, and execution designation information for focus selection is set.

Here, during the focus selection period, a display that allows the player to recognize that the individual images enabling focus selection are gradually switched on the display surface G is performed. For example, in a state in which a plurality of individual images are displayed at the same time as if they were displaced in the depth direction of the display surface G, the plurality of individual images are sequentially transitioned to a focus selectable state. The method of making this focus selectable state is arbitrary. may be enlarged and then displayed in reduced size, or a configuration in which another image pointing to the individual image is displayed. Such display of the focus selectable state is executed by referring to the parameters for focus selection in the VDP 135 in a situation in which a drawing list in which execution designation information for focus selection is set is output.

In the pachinko machine 10, the individual image that enables focus selection is the individual image for effect displayed in front of the background, but the background image may be included.

On the other hand, if it is not the focus selection period (step S2906: NO), the process proceeds to step S2909. In step S2909, it is determined whether focus display is being executed. If focus display is not being executed, it is determined in step S2910 whether or not a focus instruction command has been received from the sound emission control device 60. FIG. The focus instruction command is a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 at the end timing of the focus selection period when the player issues a focus selection instruction during the focus selection period. The information of the individual image for which focus selection has been instructed is included.

If a negative determination is made in step S2910, the process ends. In this way, when the operation processing for effect in the open/close execution mode is executed, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing makes a negative determination in step S2905, and ends the operation processing for effect. The same information as when

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, focus range calculation processing is executed in step S2911. In the focus range calculation process, the process of calculating the focus range from the information of the individual image for which the focus selection instruction is included in the focus instruction command is executed. In this case, since the type of individual image to be displayed in the focus effect period is already determined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the data of the focus range is made to correspond to the individual image to be the focus selection target on a one-to-one basis. is predetermined as a focus range table. Therefore, in step S2911, first, the focus range table is read out from the memory module 133, and data of the focus range corresponding to the individual image for which the focus selection instruction is made is read. After that, in step S2912, after storing the execution designation information of the focus effect, the arithmetic processing for the main effect ends.

When the effect arithmetic processing in the open/close execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes the instruction for using the effect object grasped in step S2901. is set together with the information of the texture use instruction corresponding to those objects. In addition, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set, and the instruction object usage instruction information grasped in step S2903 is set. The calculated parameters are set. Further, in the drawing list, the data of the focus range calculated in step S2911 is set, and the execution designation information of the focus effect is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, the focus display is executed. This setting to the execution state of the focus display is performed, for example, by setting "1" to a flag for distinguishing whether or not the focus display is in the execution state in the data table. If the focus display is to be executed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2909, and after storing the execution designation information of the focus effect in step S2912, the arithmetic processing for this effect ends.

When the effect arithmetic processing in the open/close execution mode is executed in this way, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing contains the instructions for using the effect object ascertained in step S2901. Information is set along with information of texture usage instructions corresponding to those objects. In addition, in the drawing list, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set, and the instruction object usage instruction information grasped in step S2903 is set. The calculated parameters are set. In addition, in the drawing list, data of the focus range corresponding to the current focus effect is set, and information specifying execution of the focus effect is set.

Based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, the VDP 135 performs image display for the focus selection period and image display for the focus display execution period. In this case, regarding the image display for the focus selection period, the individual images that are in the focus selectable state as described above are sequentially displayed based on the execution of the drawing process (FIG. 16) while referring to the parameters for focus selection. An image display that switches is performed. On the other hand, the image display for the focus display execution period is performed by executing the process for adjusting the focus after executing the process of shifting from the state of the three-dimensional image data to the state of the two-dimensional image data. .

A specific configuration for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 will be described below. FIG. 49(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the VRAM 134 used for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 49A, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 having a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b, and a Z buffer 143. As shown in FIG. These buffers 142 and 143 are as already explained, and in each frame area 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142, drawing data which is two-dimensional data to be referred to when executing drawing on the pattern display device 31 is stored. is created, and the Z-buffer 143 is used to temporarily store coordinate data in the Z-axis direction when performing hidden surface removal (FIG. 18).

The VRAM 134 is provided with a blurring buffer 181 as an area for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 in addition to the buffers 142 and 143 described above. The blurring buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas as the frame areas 142a and 142b. That is, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b has the same number of unit areas, and the blurring buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas. The blurring buffer 181 can temporarily store the drawing list created in one frame area as it is.

Note that the number of unit areas in the blurring buffer 181 may be larger than the number of unit areas in one frame area as long as the drawing list can be temporarily stored as it is.

The process for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 is executed in the drawing data synthesizing process of step S1012 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). FIG. 49(b) is a flow chart showing the drawing data synthesizing process.

In the drawing data synthesizing process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not execution designation information for focus effects is set in the current drawing list. If not set, the process advances to step S3002.

In step S3002, the background drawing data already created in the immediately preceding step S1010 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written to the current drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b. Thereafter, in step S3003, the effect and pattern drawing data already created in immediately preceding step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144 are transferred to the frame area 142a in which the background drawing data has been written as described above. , 142b, the synthesis process ends.

In this case, drawing data for effects and symbols are written while referring to the α value, as already described. In addition, in the open/close execution mode, there is no pattern in the drawing data for effects and patterns, and only data corresponding to individual images for effects exist. Furthermore, in the open/close execution mode, the drawing data for effects and patterns includes the data of individual teaching images created based on pasting teaching textures to teaching objects. For the data of the teaching individual image, the drawing data for effects and patterns is created so that the data of another individual image does not overlap from the front side.

On the other hand, if the execution designation information for the focus effect is set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, as in step S3002, the background drawing data already created in step S1010 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written to the current drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b. In the following step S3005, similarly to step S3003, the drawing data for effects and patterns that have already been created in step S1011 immediately before and stored in the screen buffer 144 are written as the drawing data for the background as described above. are written in the frame areas 142a and 142b. After that, in step S3006, after performing the adjustment processing for the focus effect, the synthesis processing ends.

FIG. 50(a) is a flow chart showing adjustment processing for focus effects.

In the focus effect adjustment process, first, in steps S3101 to S3107, a blur map creation process for creating blur map data to be referred to for executing the focus effect is executed. The blurring map data is a representation of how the color information set in each unit area of the frame regions 142a and 142b in which the drawing data is created in the drawing data, which is two-dimensional image data, in the situation of the three-dimensional image data. This is map data for specifying in the VDP 135 whether or not the Z-axis direction coordinates were present. In other words, it is data in which coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is set in one-to-one correspondence with each unit area of the frame regions 142a and 142b.

Here, as already explained, the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for effects and patterns are set for each object in the world coordinate system in the drawing process (FIG. 16) (steps S1002 to S1004). , conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (step S1005), conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (step S1006) is executed, and in that state, clipping processing (step S1007), lighting processing (step S1008), and color It is created after executing the information setting process (step S1009). In this case, since each drawing data is created for the frame regions 142a and 142b, color information setting processing was performed in the visual field coordinate system as described above when creating the drawing data. The state of the data is maintained, and even after the drawing data is created, it is maintained until new drawing processing is started. Blur map data is created using the data in the state where the color information setting process has been performed in this visual field coordinate system.

In the blur map creation process, the Z buffer 143 is used to create blur map data based on executing the same process as the hidden surface process (FIG. 18). However, in the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18), only the background image data is processed to create background drawing data, and only the effect and pattern drawing data is processed. However, in the blurring map creation processing, all image data clipped in the visual field coordinate system are collectively treated as processing targets without making such a distinction.

Specifically, in step S3101, an individual image included on the Z-axis based on the current projection target dot in the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) is generated in step S3101. The Z value set for the target pixel of the individual image to be tested is grasped. In the subsequent step S3102, the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the dot to be drawn on a one-to-one basis in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

In the following step S3103, it is determined whether the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S3101 corresponds to the front side in the Z axis direction than the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S3102. If it corresponds to the near side, the process advances to step S3104 to overwrite the dot area referred to in step S3102 in the Z buffer 143 with the Z value grasped in step S3101. After that, the process advances to step S3105.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that it does not correspond to the near side, the process advances to step S3105 without executing the process of step S3104. In other words, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot in the Z buffer 143 or on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is not updated. . On the other hand, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the Z-axis direction front side of the Z value already set for the target dot in the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not, return to step S3101 to perform the Z test on the new target pixel.

If completed, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the Z test has been completed for all dots in the screen area PC12. If not completed, in step S3107, after updating the projection target dot, the process returns to step S3101 to perform the Z test on the new projection target dot. If it has been completed, it means that the creation of the blur map data has been completed, so the process advances to step S3108.

By creating the blurring map data as described above, the VDP 135 can specify what kind of coordinates the color information corresponding to each unit area of the synthetic drawing data has in the Z-axis direction. becomes possible. Therefore, the VDP 135 can specify the relative positional relationship in the depth direction for the color information corresponding to each unit area.

In the focus effect adjustment process, after creating the blurring map data in steps S3101 to S3107, the process proceeds to step S3108.

In step S3108, the composite drawing data created in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b by the processing in steps S3004 and S3005 in the drawing data composition processing (FIG. 49B) is saved in the blurring buffer 181. FIG. In the subsequent step S3109, the focus range data set in the current rendering list is read.

After that, in steps S3110 to S3117, blurring processing is executed based on the read focus range data. In the blurring process, the unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time is subjected to a determination process as to whether or not the unit area is subject to the blurring process. , blurring processing is executed, and these processings are executed for all unit areas included in the frame regions 142a and 142b to be drawn this time.

Here, for a unit area whose coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponds to the focus range, blurring processing is not executed, but the focus range corresponds to single coordinate data in the Z-axis direction. Instead, as shown in FIG. 50(b), it corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous in the Z-axis direction. That is, the focus range is set so as to have a certain depth of field so that the image displayed on the display surface G is not blurred too much. Although the focus range is specifically arbitrary, it is set so as to be a range that can include the entire individual image for presentation having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction in the state of three-dimensional image data. preferably.

For unit areas whose coordinate data in the Z-axis direction are out of the focus range, the degree of blurring is set to increase as the distance from the focus range increases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50B, the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range are divided so that the degree of blurring increases stepwise as the distance from the focus range increases. is set.

The first blurring range is set so as to be continuous from the focus range, and corresponds to a plurality of continuous coordinate data on the side away from the focus range in the Z-axis direction. The first blurring range exists on both the far side and the near side of the focus range. The second blurring range is set so as to be continuous from the first blurring range, and corresponds to a plurality of continuous coordinate data on the side away from the focus range and the first blurring range in the Z-axis direction. The second blurring range exists both on the further back side of the first blurring range on the back side and on the further front side of the first blurring range on the front side. Also, the third blurring range is set so as to be continuous from the second blurring range, and corresponds to a plurality of continuous coordinate data on the side away from the focus range, the first blurring range, and the second blurring range in the Z-axis direction. are doing. The third blurring range exists both on the further back side of the second blurring range on the back side and on the further front side of the second blurring range on the front side.

Specifically, the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range are arbitrary, but in the state of three-dimensional image data, the entire individual image for one effect having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction It is preferable that each be set so as to be within a range that can include In this case, the number of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction included in the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range is the same as that of the focus range, but It may be different from the focus range and may be different from each other. For example, a blurring range farther from the focus range may include more coordinate data in the Z-axis direction.

As already explained, the focus range is changed based on the player's operation of the production operation device 48, so the focus range data stored in advance in the memory module 133 is included in the focus range. It is set as data of the number of consecutive coordinate data in the Z-axis direction. Then, based on the player's operation of the effect operating device 48, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction, which serve as the reference for setting the focus range, are determined. The focus range is set by converting the number of coordinate data in the axial direction as the range of the actual coordinate data. In this case, it is preferable to set the coordinate in the Z-axis direction, which is the reference for setting the focus range, as the coordinate on the frontmost side or the coordinate on the farthest back side of the focus range. By setting the coordinates of the frontmost side, the focus range can be set by simply adding the number of coordinate data set in the focus range data to the reference coordinates. becomes possible. In addition, even when the coordinates are set as the farthest side, the focus range can be changed by simply subtracting the number of coordinate data set in the data for the focus range from the reference coordinates. can be set.

Similarly, for the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range, the data for each blurring range pre-stored in the memory module 133 is set in the Z-axis direction to be included in the blurring range. It is set as data of the number of consecutive coordinate data. Then, based on the focus range determined as described above, the reference coordinates of each blurring range are determined, and by applying the data for each blurring range to the reference coordinates, each blurring range is can be set.

As described above, the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range can be set for each of the front side and the back side of the focus range. It is determined based on the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation. In this case, the focus range may be set so as to correspond to the individual image for effect that exists on the frontmost side. In this case, each blurring range is set only on the far side with respect to the focus range.

Returning to the description of FIG. 50A, in the blurring process, first, in step S3110, coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to the current unit area is read out from the blurring map data created in steps S3101 to S3107. In subsequent step S3111, it is determined whether or not the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read out in step S3110 is included in the focus range read out in step S3109. If it is included in the focus range, there is no need to execute blurring processing for that unit area, so the process advances to step S3116 without executing the processing of steps S3112 to S3115.

If it is not within the focus range, it is determined in step S3112 whether or not the current unit area corresponds to a teaching area for displaying a teaching individual image. The individual image for instruction is an image displayed using the already-described object for instruction. If it corresponds to the teaching area, the process proceeds to step S3116 without executing the processing of steps S3113 to S3115. In other words, blurring processing is not performed on the teaching individual image. As a result, even when performing a focus effect, it is possible to appropriately teach information using the individual image for teaching.

Incidentally, since the position at which the teaching individual image is displayed remains unchanged regardless of the mode of operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player, the address of the unit area included in the teaching area is determined in advance. , the data is pre-stored in the memory module 133 .

If a negative determination is made in step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3113. In step S3113, blurring range determination processing is executed. Specifically, it is determined in which of the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read in step S3110 is included, and blurring is generated. to determine the target blur range. Thereafter, in step S3114, blur generation processing is executed.

The blur generating process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51(a).

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the first blurring range has been determined in step S3113. If the first blurring range has been determined, then in step S3202 a first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the X-axis directions with the current unit area as a reference, and a color is obtained from each of these unit areas. Extract information. This extraction is performed not from the frame areas 142a and 142b that are drawing targets this time, but from the blurring buffer 181. FIG. In step S3202, the color information set in the current unit area is also extracted, and this extraction is also performed from the blurring buffer 181.

In the subsequent step S3203, blur generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. In the blur generating process, a Gaussian filter is used to generate blur. In other words, with the target unit area as the center, weighting according to the distance in the X-axis direction from the center unit area is determined using the Gaussian function for each unit area extracted above. Then, with the determined weighting applied, the color information of the center unit area and the color information of the extracted unit area are blended. The color information resulting from this blending is temporarily stored in the register 153 .

In subsequent step S3204, a first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the Y-axis directions using the current unit area as a reference, and color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181 . In step S3204, the color information set in the current unit area is also extracted, and this extraction is also performed from the blurring buffer 181. FIG.

In the subsequent step S3205, blur generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. In the blur generating process, a Gaussian filter is used to generate blur. In other words, with the target unit area as the center, weighting according to the distance in the Y-axis direction from the center unit area is determined using the Gaussian function for each unit area extracted above. Then, with the determined weighting applied, the color information of the center unit area and the color information of the extracted unit area are blended. The color information resulting from this blending is temporarily stored in the register 153 .

After that, in step S3206, a blending process is executed. Specifically, the blended color information calculated in step S3203 and the blended color information calculated in step S3205 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the blur generating process is terminated.

By executing the blur generation process as described above, as shown in FIG. 51(b-1), a first predetermined number Each color information set in the unit area of 1, and each color information set in the first predetermined number of unit areas on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the target unit area. Blended against information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not the second blurring range has been determined in step S3113. If the second blurring range has been determined, in step S3208, a second predetermined number of unit areas, which are larger than the first predetermined number, are specified in each of the X-axis directions, using the current unit area as a reference. , color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181 . Also, in step S3208, the color information set in the current unit area is extracted from the buffer 181 for blurring.

In the subsequent step S3209, blur generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this process are the same as those in step S3203 above.

In subsequent step S3210, using the current unit area as a reference, a second predetermined number of unit areas larger than the first predetermined number are specified in each of the Y-axis directions, and color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181 . Also, in step S3210, the color information set in the current unit area is extracted from the blurring buffer 181. FIG.

In the subsequent step S3211, blur generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this processing are the same as in step S3205 above.

After that, in step S3212, a blending process is executed. Specifically, the blended color information calculated in step S3209 and the blended color information calculated in step S3211 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the blur generating process is terminated.

By executing the blur generation process as described above, as shown in FIG. 51(b-2), a second predetermined number Each color information set in the unit area of 1, and each color information set in the second predetermined number of unit areas on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the target unit area. Blended against information. In this case, since the number of unit areas to be blended becomes larger than in the case of FIG. Become.

A negative determination in step S3207 means that the third blurring range has been determined in step S3113. If the third blurring range has been determined, in step S3213 a third predetermined number of unit areas larger than the second predetermined number are specified in each of the X-axis directions, using the current unit area as a reference. , color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181 . Also, in step S3213, the color information set in the current unit area is extracted from the blurring buffer 181. FIG.

In the subsequent step S3214, blur generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this process are the same as those in step S3203 above.

In the subsequent step S3215, with the current unit area as a reference, a third predetermined number of unit areas, which is larger than the second predetermined number, are specified in each of the Y-axis directions, and color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181 . Also, in step S3215, the color information set in the current unit area is extracted from the buffer 181 for blurring.

In the subsequent step S3216, blur generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this processing are the same as in step S3205 above.

After that, in step S3217, a blending process is executed. Specifically, the blended color information calculated in step S3214 and the blended color information calculated in step S3216 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the blur generating process is terminated. By executing the blurring generation process as described above, the degree of blurring can be made larger than in the case of the second blurring range.

Returning to the description of the focus effect adjustment process (FIG. 50(a)), after executing the blur generation process in step S3114, in step S3115, the color information calculated by the blur generation process is obtained. , the current unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn is overwritten, and then the flow advances to step S3116. As a result, color information corresponding to each blurring range is set in the unit area.

Here, in the configuration in which the color information as a result of blurring is sequentially set in the frame regions 142a and 142b to be drawn, the blur generation processing includes the frame regions 142a and 142b as described above. The color information is read from the buffer 181 for blurring instead of reading the color information from the . As a result, when blurring is generated in a predetermined unit area, it is possible not to use the color information as a result of already blurring. Therefore, blurring can be generated in a manner that does not depend on the order in which the blurring generation processing is executed.

In step S3116, it is determined whether or not all unit areas of the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time have been subjected to the processing of steps S3110 to S3115. If not completed, in step S3117, after updating the target unit area, the process returns to step S3110, and the above steps S3110 to S3115 are executed for the new target unit area. If completed, the adjustment process is terminated.

Next, the content of the focus display will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which focus display is not performed, and FIG. 52(b) shows a state in which focus display is performed.

When the focus display is not performed, individual images CH11, CH12, and CH13 for each effect, background images (sea surface image, sandy beach image, and sky image) CH14 and Both of the teaching individual images CH15 and CH16 are in focus. Therefore, in each of these images CH11 to CH16, the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved portion, and the outer edge portion are clearly displayed.

On the other hand, when the focus display is performed, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the individual image CH11 for effect and the background image CH14 of the sandy beach where the individual image CH11 is present are displayed in the focus range. However, since the individual images CH12 and CH13 for other effects and the background image CH14 of other parts are out of the focus range, the borders and curves of the pattern are displayed. The boundaries of the parts and even the outer edge parts appear blurred and unsharp. In particular, the degree of the blurred state increases as the image is displayed farther in the depth direction of the display surface G from the effect individual image CH11 included in the focus range. ing. This allows the player to recognize that the individual image CH11 for effect is in focus.

However, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the teaching individual images CH15 and CH16 are clearly displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 52(a) even when the focus display is performed. Accordingly, even when the focus display is performed, it is possible to excellently teach information using the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching. In addition, since the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching are displayed as if they are arranged on the nearer side than the other images, even if they are excluded from blur generation targets, they are excluded from focus display targets. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the focus, and it is possible to perform the focus display well.

Further, when the focus is displayed, the blurring map data is not stored in advance in the memory module 133, but created by the VDP 135 each time. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity. In particular, in a configuration in which the player can actively participate in the game by setting the focus range based on the player's operation of the performance operating device 48, the blurring map data is set in advance. If you try to store it, the amount of data will be enormous. Moreover, if an attempt is made to suppress the increase in data volume, the number of focus range patterns that can be selected based on the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation will be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, the VDP 135 creates the blur map data each time, so that the data volume can be reduced and the player's active participation in the game can be favorably encouraged. becomes.

On the other hand, if blur map data is created as described above, the processing load on the VDP 135 increases accordingly. On the other hand, when blurring is generated, it is performed in the state of a two-dimensional image instead of in the state of a three-dimensional image. is eliminated, and the processing load for generating blurring is reduced.

<Another form of focus display>
The configuration is not limited to the one where the blurring map data is created when creating the drawing data, and the configuration may be such that the blurring map data is stored in advance in the memory module 133 . In this case, if the focus range is selected based on the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation, it is necessary to create blur map data in advance so as to correspond to all variations related to the selection. In addition, if the focus range is not selected based on the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation, and the blurred display is performed in a certain manner, blurring map data suitable for that manner should be created in advance.

In the configuration in which the blur map data is created in advance as described above, the data set corresponding to each unit area in the blur map data need not be coordinate data in the Z-axis direction. and data indicating which of the blurring ranges corresponds to.

Averaging processing of color information for blurring need not be performed after converting 3D image data into 2D image data, but may be performed in the state of 3D image data. In this case, when blending surrounding pixels with respect to a reference pixel, the distances from the reference pixel to the surrounding pixels are calculated in a three-dimensional state, and weighting is performed according to the calculation result. is applied to the color information of the surrounding pixels, and the blending process is performed.

The color information averaging process for generating blurring may be configured to evenly blend the extracted color information instead of weighting according to the distance from the center using a Gaussian function. In this case, the processing load can be reduced, although the realism of the blurred display is reduced.

The color information averaging process for blurring is not limited to the configuration performed in each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, and may be configured to perform only one of them. In this case, the processing load can be reduced, although the realism of the blurred display is reduced.

- When averaging color information to generate blurring, the drawing data set in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn is limited to being separately stored in the blurring buffer 181. Instead, the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn may be used as they are. In this case, when the color information of a predetermined unit area is blurred, the color information of the unit area that has already been blurred is used, and the order of blurring does not affect the degree of blurring. However, since there is no need to provide a separate blurring buffer 181, the storage capacity can be reduced, and since there is no need to store separately in the blurring buffer 181, the processing load can be reduced. be done.

- A buffer other than the Z-buffer 143 may be used when creating blur map data. In this case, the VRAM 134 may be provided with a dedicated buffer for creating blur map data.

- Instead of creating drawing data for the background and drawing data for effects and patterns separately and synthesizing them to create drawing data for one frame, color information setting processing is performed in step S1009. After execution, drawing data for one frame may be collectively created. In this configuration, when drawing data for one frame is created using hidden surface processing, coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to each unit area is set in the Z-buffer 143 . Therefore, the data created in the Z buffer 143 by this hidden surface processing can be used as it is as blur map data.

- A focus display may be performed as an effect for game rounds. In this case, the symbols that are variably displayed in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 may be excluded from the blurring target, in the same manner as the teaching individual image is excluded from the blurring target as described above. Further, if focus display is to be performed as an effect during reach, the patterns forming the reach line on the pattern rows SA1 and SA3 that are stopped and displayed first may be excluded from the blurring target. Additionally or alternatively, the symbols in the final stop symbol row SA2 may be excluded from being blurred. By excluding the patterns forming the ready-to-win line, it becomes possible to use the focus display as a ready-to-win performance without lowering the distinguishability of the types of the ready-to-win patterns, and the patterns in the final stop pattern row SA2 are excluded. Thus, it is possible to use the focus display as a ready-to-win effect without deteriorating the identifiability of the symbols existing near the ready-to-win line in the final stop symbol row SA2.

In addition, in a configuration in which a ready-to-win effect using a focus display is performed by hiding the pattern rows SA1 to SA3 while displaying an image that teaches the patterns forming the reach-line or the type thereof, the reach-to-reach line is formed. An image that teaches the pattern or the type of pattern that is being blurred may be excluded from the blurring target. As a result, it is possible to use the focus display as a ready-to-win effect without lowering the recognizability of the types of ready-to-win symbols.

In addition, when the focus display is performed as an effect for the game round, the object to be excluded from the blurring object may be other than the pattern. , the image for teaching the number of pending information may be excluded from the blurring target.

Focus display may be performed in a configuration in which image display is performed using two-dimensional image data such as sprite data instead of image display using three-dimensional image data. In this case, when setting the sprite data in the frame areas 142a and 142b, coordinate data corresponding to the depth direction of the display surface G is set in each sprite data, and the coordinate data correspond to the focus range and each blur range. Depending on which one of them is included, a configuration is conceivable in which a blurred display is performed.

The configuration for executing the process of creating map data including a group of parameters after image data is set in the world coordinate system may be performed for purposes other than focus display.

For example, in a configuration in which either lighting or lighting is set according to the orientation of the surface of an object to display whether a predetermined area is blinking in an image for one frame, the world coordinate system or the visual field coordinate system is set, the orientation of each surface is read as a parameter, and map data is created as data that aggregates them. Blinking display may be performed by processing the color information of the drawing data after projection based on the created map data.

Further, for example, when displaying a surface such as the surface of the sea whose shape changes over time in an image for one frame, in a configuration in which color information to be set in each surface data is selected according to the direction of the surface of the object, the world The direction of each surface is read as a parameter in the state set in the coordinate system or the visual field coordinate system, and map data is created as data that aggregates them. Surface display may be performed by processing the color information of the projected drawing data based on the created map data.

<Structure for performing pattern change display>
Next, a configuration for performing pattern change display will be described.

Pattern change display means that when a special character is displayed continuously over a plurality of frames (a plurality of image update timings), the pattern is changed as the frames progress while the outer edge shape of the special character remains the same. It is a display performance. However, instead of simply changing the pattern, the partial pattern of the special character is changed by switching the type of the first partial texture to be pasted on the special object corresponding to the special character. As for changing other patterns of the special character, while the type of the second partial texture to be pasted on the special object is the same, by changing the relative pasting position of the second partial texture to the special object, change the pattern.

These special objects, the first partial texture and the second partial texture will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53(a) to (c). FIG. 53(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special object PC20, and FIGS. 53(b-1) to (b-3) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. FIGS. 53(c-1) to (c-4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the special object PC20 includes a large number of polygons, is created as data corresponding to a three-dimensional shape, and has a plurality of parts parts BP, AP1 to AP4. As the plurality of parts parts BP, AP1 to AP4, there is a main body part part BP and a plurality of attached parts parts AP1 to AP4 attached to the main body part part BP. The special character is a character in which a whale is applied to a humanoid form, and the main body part BP corresponds to its face and body, and the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 correspond to its hands and feet continuing from the body. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 53(b-1) to 53(b-3), the main body parts section BP displays the pattern of the face (the pattern of the eyes and mouth) and the body as if it were reflecting light. The first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are pasted for displaying an image including both of the patterns for . These first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are set so as to be able to cover the entire body parts portion BP. Further, the data for displaying the pattern of the face has the same position (coordinates) of the body part portion BP to which the data is pasted among the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. On the other hand, regarding the data for displaying as if the torso is reflecting light, the positions (coordinates) of the main body parts portion BP to which these data are pasted are the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. are different between

In other words, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are data for displaying an invariant pattern in which the position of pasting in the main body part portion BP does not change, and display a changing pattern in which the position of pasting in the main body part portion BP changes. The first partial textures PC21 to PC23 have the same data configuration for displaying the unchanged pattern, but differ in the data configuration for displaying the changing pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 53(c-1) to 53(c-4), the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 have patterns for displaying the hands and feet as if they are reflecting light. are pasted on the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 for displaying an image containing These second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the attached parts AP1 to AP4, and one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 is provided for one attached parts AP1 to AP4. is provided. Each of the second partial textures PC24-PC27 is set so as to be able to cover the corresponding attached parts AP1-AP4. In this case, in each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, the pattern that produces the boundary portion is set so as to have continuity with the pattern that produces the opposite boundary portion.

The first partial textures PC21-PC23 and the second partial textures PC24-PC27 are attached to the special object PC20 based on predetermined UV coordinate values. As already explained, the UV coordinate values are stored in the memory module 133 in a state attached to the combination of the object image data and the texture image data, and each pixel of the texture image data can be made to correspond to each pixel of the object image data on a one-to-one basis.

When the special character is displayed, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to be pasted on the main body part BP of the special object PC20 are changed in a predetermined order. This order is set so that the manner in which the pattern changes has continuity. On the other hand, for the attached parts AP1 to AP4 of the special object PC20, the corresponding second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are pasted. The value is changed in a predetermined manner from the initial set state. The change of the UV coordinate values is set so that each pattern corresponding to each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 changes continuously.

A specific processing configuration for executing pattern change display using the special object PC20, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 will be described below. Note that the special object PC20, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing calculation processing for a special character executed by the display CPU 131. As shown in FIG. The arithmetic processing for the special character is executed in the effect arithmetic processing in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14). Further, the arithmetic processing for the special character is started when the data table corresponding to the game round in which the special character is displayed is set.

First, in step S3301, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not a special character is being displayed. If the special character is not being displayed, the process advances to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether or not it is time to start displaying a special character. If it is not the start timing, this operation processing ends as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process advances to step S3303.

In step S3303, the special object PC20 is grasped as a controlled object based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the processing of step S3303, the processing for starting control of the special object PC20 has been completed in the previous setting processing for starting control (step S901). Information for controlling the special object PC 20 whose control is started is stored in the work RAM 132 until the display of the special character is completed.

In subsequent step S3304, initial setting processing of the first partial texture is executed. Specifically, the first partial texture PC21 for which the order of use is set first among the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is specified, and the usage instruction information for the first partial texture PC21 is stored. Data on the order of use of the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as table information.

In the following step S3305, initialization processing for each second partial texture is executed. Here, when the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are to be changed, the display CPU 131 derives the amounts of change from the initial coordinate values in one-to-one correspondence with the respective second partial textures PC24 to PC27. and provides the VDP 135 with each derived change amount. The VDP 135 applies the supplied change amount data to each corresponding initial coordinate value. In this case, when viewed from one of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 include a large number of pixels. there is Therefore, the change amount data corresponding to one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 is uniformly applied to each initial coordinate value of the one second partial texture PC24 to PC27.

For example, in a situation where the initial coordinate values of a predetermined pixel forming one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 are (U1, V1) and the initial coordinate values of other pixels are (U2, V2), the amount of change is (w1, w2), the UV coordinate values of the predetermined pixel are set to (U1+w1, V1+w2), and the UV coordinate values of other pixels are set to (U2+w1, V2+w2). be. Therefore, the relative positions of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 with respect to the attached parts AP1 to AP4 are changed with the same directionality and by the same amount of change. Since step S3305 is initialization processing, data corresponding to the fact that there is no variation is stored.

The amount of change data for changing the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 from the initial coordinate values is set as table information in a one-to-one correspondence with information on the order of use. Table information is pre-stored in the memory module 133 . Further, the table information is individually set for each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

After that, in step S3306, the special character start designation information is stored, and in step S3307, various parameters are calculated for the special object PC20, and after updating the control information related to the special object PC20, This calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the special character is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the information of the instruction to use the special object PC 20, and the processing proceeds to step S3304. The usage instruction information of the first partial texture PC21 stored in step S3305 and the data of each amount of change derived in step S3305 are set. Furthermore, in the drawing list, the parameters calculated in step S3307 are set, and the special character start designation information is set.

If it is determined in step S3301 that the special character is being displayed, then in step S3308 the special object PC20 is grasped as a controlled object based on the currently set data table.

In the subsequent step S3309, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. The update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is set once in a first specific number of frames, which is a predetermined plurality, that is, once in a first specific number of image update timings, which is a predetermined plurality. Furthermore, this update timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing. The number of frames until the update timing of the textures PC21 to PC23 (number of image update timings), and the number of frames from the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to the update timing of the next first partial textures PC21 to PC23 ( image update timing number) may be different.

If it is not the time to update the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, in step S3310, the usage instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in the previous processing is stored as it is. On the other hand, when it is time to update the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, in step S3311, use instruction information corresponding to the next first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is stored.

After executing the process of step S3310 or step S3311, it is determined in step S3312 whether or not it is time to update the UV coordinate values applied to the second partial textures PC24 to PC27. The update timing of the UV coordinate values is set once in a second specific number of frames, which is a predetermined plurality, that is, once in a second specific number of image update timings, which is a predetermined plurality. Timing is constant. However, it is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing. The number of frames (number of image update timings) until the next UV coordinate value may be different from the number of frames (number of image update timings) from the current UV coordinate value to the update timing of the next UV coordinate value.

Also, the update timing of the UV coordinate values is synchronized with the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but may be asynchronous. In order to make them asynchronous, it is conceivable to configure each update period to be different. In this case, the update timing of the UV coordinate values may be shorter or longer than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. Considering that there is almost no effect on the data capacity even if this is done, it is preferable to set the update timing of the UV coordinate values to a period shorter than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23.

If it is not the time to update the UV coordinate values, in step S3313, the data of each amount of change stored in the previous processing is stored as it is. On the other hand, if it is time to update the UV coordinate values, in step S3314, data of each amount of change in the next order is stored.

After executing the process of step S3313 or step S3314, in step S3315, the special character continuation designation information is stored, and in step S3307, various parameters are calculated for the special object PC20, and the special object PC20 After updating the control information related to , this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the special character is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the information of the use instruction of the special object PC 20, and the above steps S3310 and The use instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in any one of step S3311 and the data of each amount of change stored in either step S3313 or S3314 are set. Furthermore, in the drawing list, the parameters calculated in step S3307 are set, and the special character continuation designation information is set.

When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list for displaying the special character, it executes the processing for setting the special object PC 20 in the world coordinate system in the effect setting processing (step S1003) in the drawing processing (FIG. 16). do. In this case, since the coordinates, scale, rotation angle, etc. for setting to the world coordinate system are also specified in the drawing list, the special object PC20 is set in a state in which these are applied. In addition, since the special character is displayed as if it were displaced in a predetermined direction over a plurality of frames, a drawing list corresponding to that is applied to the VDP 135, and a special character to the world coordinate system is drawn in a state corresponding to that. Setting of the object PC 20 is performed.

Further, when the VDP 135 receives the drawing list for displaying the special character, it performs the color information setting processing (step S1009) in the drawing processing (FIG. 16) to display the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 for the special object PC20. and second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are pasted. Processing related to pasting the texture will be described below.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing texture mapping processing for special characters. The special character texture mapping process is started when either the special character start designation information or the special character continuation designation information is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S3401, use designation information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 set in the current rendering list is grasped. In the subsequent step S3402, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 corresponding to the usage designation information ascertained in step S3401 are read out from the memory module 133. FIG. After that, in step S3403, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 read out in step S3402 are pasted onto the main body parts portion BP of the special object PC20. This completes the pasting of the texture to the main body part portion BP.

In the subsequent step S3404, the attached parts counter provided in the register 153 is set to "4", which is information corresponding to the number of attached parts AP1 to AP4, and the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, the second partial textures PC24-PC27 corresponding to the accessory parts AP1-AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the current accessory parts counter are read out from the memory module 133. FIG.

In the subsequent step S3406, data of initial coordinate values corresponding to the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the current accessory parts counter is read. In step S3407, among the change amount data set in the current drawing list, the change amount data corresponding to the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the current numerical information of the accessory part counter is grasped. Then, in step S3408, the current UV coordinate value is derived by applying the amount of change determined in step S3407 to the initial coordinate value read out in step S3406. After that, in step S3409, according to the UV coordinate values derived in step S3408, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 read out in step S3405 are pasted on the corresponding attached parts AP1 to AP4.

In subsequent step S3410, 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the attached parts counter, and in step S3411, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the attached parts counter after subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the process returns to step S3405, and the process of pasting the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 in steps S3405 to S3409 is executed for the next attached parts AP1 to AP4. If it is determined in step S3411 that the numerical value information of the attached parts counter is "0", this texture mapping process ends.

Next, the contents of the pattern change display will be described with reference to FIG.

56(a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the pattern change display.

As shown in FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b), the pattern change display using the special character CH17 is such that a reach line is formed on a predetermined effective line during a game turn, and a final stop symbol row SA2 is displayed. It is executed in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed. In the pachinko machine 10, pattern change display is performed as an effect for informing the player that the game round is highly expected to trigger the shift to the open/close execution mode. It should be noted that the pattern change display using the special character CH17 may be configured to occur with a predetermined probability only in the game cycle that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the pattern change display, the special character CH17 is displaced and displayed in a predetermined direction. In this case, the pattern attached to the special character CH17 is changed as the special character CH17 is displaced. Specifically, the pattern is changed such that the surface of the special character CH17 is illuminated with light and reflected, and the brightened portion of the reflected light is displaced. This pattern change occurs in each of the main body part BP and the accessory parts AP1 to AP4. On the other hand, the positions of the eyes and mouth displayed on the special character CH17 are fixed.

As described above, a plurality of types of textures PC21 to PC23 are stored in advance for a part of the special object PC20, and the textures PC21 to PC23 to be pasted are sequentially changed. As for the other parts of CH17, single textures PC24 to PC27 are used, and the UV coordinate values of the textures PC24 to PC27 are sequentially changed, so that pattern change display is achieved while balancing data capacity and processing load. It is possible to do

Also, for special characters such as the eyes and mouth, where there is a pattern that does not change relative to the outer edge, the pattern is not changed by switching the UV coordinate values of a single texture, but it is pasted. Since the pattern is changed by sequentially changing the textures PC21 to PC23, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the pattern of the relevant portion.

On the other hand, for the accessory parts AP1 to AP4, which are relatively small in size, the patterns are changed by switching the UV coordinate values of the single textures PC24 to PC27. Even if the shape of the pattern is slightly deformed, it can be made inconspicuous.

<Another form of pattern change display>
・Instead of setting the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 in one-to-one correspondence with the attached parts AP1 to AP4, predetermined second partial textures are provided for the attached parts AP1 to AP4. Alternatively, one second partial texture may be commonly used for all attached parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, in order to make the patterns of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 different, it is preferable to make the initial setting values of the UV coordinate values different.

・The speed at which the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 to be pasted in each of the attached parts AP1 to AP4 are not limited to the same configuration, and are partially different. It is good also as a structure with which all are different.

- A pattern may be applied across the main body part BP and at least one of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, when the appearance of the special character is changed, the straddling pattern changes when the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are changed so as to ensure the continuity of the pattern in the straddling portion. It is preferable to associate the mode with the change mode of the straddling pattern when the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are changed.

<About the configuration related to the round production>
Next, the configuration related to the round effect will be described.

The round effect is a effect that can be executed when a round game is performed in the opening/closing execution mode. In the opening and closing execution mode, the round game is set to be performed multiple times, and the round production is performed when the round production lottery executed when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode is won. , is executed each time a round game is played. In addition, when the lottery for the round effect is not won, the arithmetic processing and the like in the open/close execution mode will be executed.

As already explained, the round game means that (1) the opening time of the variable winning device 22 has passed a predetermined time, and (2) the total winning number of game balls to the variable winning device 22 has reached a predetermined number. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions is satisfied.

Moving image data is used in the round effect. Moving image data is image data that is interframe-compressed so as to have a plurality of differential data based on one frame of still image data, and is encoded, for example, by the MPEG2 system. When the moving image data is decoded by a moving image decoder (not shown) provided in the VDP 135, it is developed into still image data for a plurality of frames. A series of movies is reproduced by sequentially drawing these still image data.

Moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 57, round moving image data RMD0 is set as the moving image data used in the round effect. In round moving image data RMD0, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame.

The compressed data includes one frame of I-picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P-picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B-picture data corresponding to the second difference data. and have

The I-picture data is data capable of creating one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before when decoding. . B-picture data can be bidirectionally predicted by referring to I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames after when decoding. , is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data of the round moving image data RMD0, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the data of the 2nd frame, . . . , m−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. In addition, B picture data is set as data of the m+1th frame, . . . , n−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of picture data is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary.

The size of the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is set to correspond to the display surface G, and specifically is set to a size that can be displayed on the entire display surface G. .

Further, in the round effect, insert image data IPD0, which is still image data, is used in addition to the round moving image data RMD0. The contents of the round moving image data RMD0 and the insertion image data IPD0 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58(a) shows the content of part of the image set in the round moving image data RMD0, and FIG. 58(b) shows the image set in the insertion image data IPD0.

In the round moving image data RMD0, as shown in FIG. 58(a-1), a first background image BP1 showing waves is superimposed on a first background image BP1 showing waves, showing a state of surfing. Reference data (I picture data) RMD1 to which a moving character image MP1 and a second moving character image MP2, which is an image of an octopus, are added are set.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 58(a-2) and (a-3), although the first background image BP1 is not included, the difference data (P picture) corresponding to the movement of the moving character images MP1 and MP2 data or B picture data) RMD2 is set. One frame of still image data is created from the reference data RMD1, and the difference data RMD2 is applied to the reference data RMD1. One frame of still image data is created to which the moving character images MP1 and MP2 set in RMD2 are added.

Incidentally, the round moving image data RMD0 is set so that the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are framed out of the display surface G. FIG. Specifically, the difference data is set so that the moving character images MP1 and MP2 move to the frame-out position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(a-3), reference data RMD3 in which a second background image BP2 showing clouds is drawn is set in the round moving image data RMD0.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(a-4), the round moving image data RMD0 is set with reference data RMD4 in which the boy's third moving character image MP3 is enlarged and drawn. Although not shown, difference data corresponding to the third moving character image MP3 performing a predetermined action is set in the round moving image data RMD0.

A series of moving image display is performed by sequentially pasting the still image data created from the data RMD1 to RMD4 on the moving image object.

The insert image data IPD0 corresponds to an image displayed on a part of the display surface G, as shown in FIG. This is data whose size and amount of data (data capacity) are set to be small.

A plurality of types of image data with different display modes are set in the insertion image data IPD0. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b-1), the insertion image data IPD0 includes first insertion image data IPD1 in which a first insertion character image IP1 showing two girls is drawn, As shown in FIG. 58(b-2), second insertion image data IPD2 in which a second insertion character image IP2 showing three girls is drawn is set.

In the round effect, a series of round moving images set in the round moving image data RMD0 are reproduced. Then, at a predetermined timing during reproduction of the moving image, an insertion character image is inserted and displayed using the insertion image data IPD0. In this case, the insertion image data IPD0 to be used is set differently depending on the round.

A specific processing configuration for performing a round effect using the round moving image data RMD0 and the insertion image data IPD0 will be described below.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for round effects executed by the display CPU 131 . Calculation processing for round effects is started in the calculation processing for effects in step S904 in the task processing (FIG. 14) when the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is set.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the round effect is being executed based on the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. The data table corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is set so that the round animation is played multiple times as a round effect. Specifically, it is set so that the round animation is played the same number of times as the number of rounds. .

If the round effect is not being executed, the process advances to step S3502 to determine whether or not it is time to start playing the round animation based on the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the open/close execution mode, a plurality of reproduction start timings of the round moving image are set so as to correspond to the reproduction of the round moving image a plurality of times. The reproduction start timing is synchronized with the start timing of the round game, and more specifically, is configured to be the timing before the start timing of the round game by one process (20 msec).

If a period longer than the period for one process is required to decode the round moving image data RMD0, the playback start timing of the round moving image is set to the round moving image data RMD0 before the start timing of the round game. It is preferable to set the period further forward by the period required for decoding. As a result, it is possible to appropriately cope with the time lag that may occur due to the period required for decoding. In short, if the playback start timing of the round video is set in consideration of the period required to decode the round video image data RMD0 so that the playback of the round video and the start of the round game are at the same timing. good.

If it is not the timing to start playing the round animation, the arithmetic processing for this round effect is terminated as it is. update processing of the round counter RC stored in . The round counter RC is for the display control device 130 to grasp the number of rounds. The round counter RC is set to "0" as an initial value when the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is set.

In step S3503, processing for adding 1 to the round counter RC is executed. Accordingly, by grasping the round counter RC, it is possible to grasp the number of times the round animation has been reproduced in one opening/closing execution mode. That is, by grasping the round counter RC, it is possible to specify the number of rounds of the round game currently being played.

After that, in step S3504, various addresses are grasped based on the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, when the still image data for a plurality of frames is generated by decoding the address at which the round moving image data RMD0 is stored in the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the round moving image data RMD0, the static image data is generated. The address of the area in which the image data is stored is grasped.

In the subsequent step S3505, the VDP 135 stores the decoding designation information designating that the round moving image data RMD0 is decoded, and the arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, a drawing list in which the decoding designation information of the round moving image data RMD0 is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806).

If the round effect is being executed, the process advances to step S3506 to grasp the moving image object. A moving image object is an object for mapping still image data. The moving image object is composed of rectangular plate-like plate polygons. A plate polygon can also be said to be an object with a small number of polygons, and is low-definition data configured in a planar shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction.

The size of the moving image object is set to a size that allows the image of the entire display surface G to be displayed. Specifically, the size of the board surface of the moving image object is set to the same size as the still image data.

After grasping the moving image object, in step S3507, processing for specifying still image data to be mapped to the moving image object is executed. Specifically, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the current frame number among the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is stored is grasped. This address is grasped based on the data table corresponding to the currently set open/close execution mode.

In the following step S3508, arithmetic processing is executed to determine parameters to be applied to the moving image object. Then, in step S3509, moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is to be used is stored.

After execution of the processing of step S3509, arithmetic processing relating to the insertion image data IPD0 is executed in steps S3510 to S3518.

First, in step S3510, it is determined whether or not an insertion character image is being displayed based on the currently set data table. If the inserting character image is not being displayed, the flow advances to step S3511 to determine whether or not it is time to start displaying the inserting character image.

Specifically, the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode predetermines the display start timing (insertion timing) of the character image to be inserted into the round moving image. More specifically, the insertion timing of the insertion character image is set corresponding to the contents of the round moving image. It is set to the display timing of the reference data RMD3. Based on the data table, it is determined whether or not it is time to insert the character image to be inserted.

If it is time to insert the character image to be inserted, processing relating to the insertion of the character image to be inserted is executed in steps S3512 to S3516.

Specifically, first, in step S3512, an insertion object for rendering the insertion image data IPD0 is grasped. The insertion object is composed of rectangular plate-like plate polygons. As already explained, the plate polygon can be said to be an object with a small number of polygons, and is low-definition data configured in a planar shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction.

The inserting object is set to correspond to the inserting image data IPD0. Specifically, the size of the insertion object is set so that the size of the board surface of the insertion object and the size of the insertion image data IPD0 are the same. As a result, the insertion image data IPD0 can be mapped to the insertion object without special processing such as compression, and the insertion character image can be displayed by the mapping.

Here, the insertion image data IPD0 is image data relating to an image partially displayed on the display surface G. FIG. Therefore, the insertion object set corresponding to the insertion image data IPD0 is set smaller than the moving image object used to display the image of the entire display surface G. FIG.

After grasping the object for insertion, in steps S3513 to S3515, processing for grasping image data (texture) to be mapped to the object for insertion is executed. In this case, the image data to be mapped is changed according to the number of rounds of the current round moving image.

Specifically, first, in step S3513, it is determined which round the current round effect corresponds to. Specifically, it grasps the round counter RC.

Then, in step S3514, one image data corresponding to the round counter RC ascertained in step S3513 is selected from the insertion image data IPD1 and IPD2. Specifically, when the round counter RC grasped in step S3513 is an odd number, the first insertion image data IPD1 corresponding to the first insertion character image IP1 is selected, and the round counter grasped in step S3513 is selected. If RC is an even number, the second insert image data IPD2 corresponding to the second insert character image IP2 is selected. Then, the address of the selected insertion image data is set.

After that, in step S3515, various parameters of the insertion object are calculated. In this case, the coordinates of the inserting object are set so that the inserting character image is displayed in the center of the display surface G when converted to the world coordinate system, and is set so as to be ahead of the moving image object. ing.

After that, in step S3516, image insertion specification information indicating that an insertion character image is to be displayed is set, and this arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, moving image designation information is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806). Also, in the drawing list, moving image objects are set, and various parameters applied to the moving image objects are set. In this case, the parameter includes the address of the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 as the image data (texture) mapped to the moving image object.

Furthermore, when the current arithmetic processing is the insertion timing of the insertion character image, information for displaying the insertion character image corresponding to the current round effect, specifically the insertion object, and the insertion object The parameters to be applied are set, and the image insertion designation information is set. In this case, the parameter includes the address of the insertion image data corresponding to the current round as the image data (texture) mapped to the insertion object.

If the inserting character image is being displayed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, and in steps S3517 and S3518, processing for maintaining the currently displayed inserting character image is executed. Specifically, in step S3517, the insertion object is grasped, and in step S3518, an operation is performed to maintain the currently set parameters of the insertion object. In this case, it also maintains the address of the insert image data mapped to the insert object. Then, in step S3516, the image insertion specification information is set, and this arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, moving image designation information is set in the drawing list created in subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), and still image data corresponding to the frame number of this time is set. Information for displaying an image is set.

Further, when the inserting character image is being displayed, information for displaying an image corresponding to the inserting character image corresponding to the current round is set in the drawing list.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing for the round effect, it may be configured to execute the arithmetic processing of the individual image for recognizing what round the current round game is. In this case, the player can easily confirm what round the current round game is.

Further, during the open/close execution mode, the design calculation process (step S905) is skipped. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is not displayed during the opening/closing execution mode, so that the player's attention can be attracted to the round moving image based on the round moving image data RMD0, and the processing load during the opening/closing execution mode can be reduced. be able to. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner during the open/close execution mode.

Furthermore, the background setting process (step S903) is skipped during playback of the round moving image. Even in this case, by pasting the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 to the moving image object, the image related to the still image data is displayed over the entire display surface G. . That is, the image related to the moving image display functions as a background image. As a result, the processing load can be reduced by the processing load associated with the background setting process.

Next, decoding processing executed by the video decoder of the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The decoding process is started when any of the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 . Also, the decoding process is started asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 16) executed by the VDP 135 .

First, in step S3601, the address of round moving image data RMD0 is grasped from the address information specified in the drawing list. In the following step S3602, the development destination area of the round moving image data RMD0 is grasped from the information of the development destination address specified in the rendering list.

In subsequent step S3603, the round moving image data RMD0 is read from the address grasped in step S3601, and the round moving image data RMD0 is decoded. Each piece of still image data resulting from the decoding is written in each area of the address grasped in step S3602. After that, the decoding process is terminated.

Incidentally, the period required from when the VDP 135 receives the drawing list in which the decoding designation information is set until the still image data of the first frame of the round video is created is set to be shorter than the drawing list reception cycle (20 msec). It is As a result, after receiving the drawing list in which the decode designation information is set, until receiving the drawing list in which the address corresponding to the still image data of the first frame is set, the still image data of the first frame is created. Therefore, the situation that the still image data corresponding to the address does not exist does not occur.

Note that the decoding process is configured to be activated asynchronously with the drawing process, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, upon completion of drawing using the still image data written in a predetermined area in the drawing process, still image data relating to a new frame may be expanded. In this case, since the still image data is sequentially developed each time the decoded still image data is used, the area for writing the still image data is reduced compared to the structure in which all the data is developed and saved at once. can be reduced. Furthermore, since the round video is reproduced while decoding, the time lag due to decoding can be reduced.

Next, the setting processing for the round effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The round effect setting process is executed as part of the effect setting process executed in step S1003 of the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, when moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for the round effect is executed.

First, in step S3701, the animation object set in the drawing list is grasped, and in step S3702, various parameters to be applied to the animation object are grasped based on the drawing list.

After that, in step S3703, the moving image object is set to the world coordinate system, and the process proceeds to step S3704.

In the subsequent step S3704, it is determined whether or not image insertion designation information is stored in the drawing list. If the image insertion designation information is not stored, this setting process is terminated as it is. The object is grasped, and in step S3706 the parameters to be applied to the insertion object are grasped based on the drawing list. Then, in step S3707, setting processing for the insertion object to the world coordinate system is executed, and this setting processing ends.

By executing the setting process as described above, the placement of the moving image object and the insertion object is started simultaneously in the world coordinate system. In this case, the insertion object is arranged so as to overlap the front side of the moving image object.

Next, the round effect mapping process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The round effect mapping process is started when a drawing list related to the round effect (a drawing list in which moving image designation information is set) is created in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16). be done.

First, in step S3801, the information of the address where the still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In the following step S3802, still image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3801. In subsequent step S3803, the still image data ascertained in step S3802 is mapped to the moving image object. In this case, the coordinate values of the still image data are the UV coordinate values preset for the moving image object, and the pasting position of the still image data on the moving image object is uniquely determined.

After that, in step S3804, it is determined whether or not image insertion designation information is set in the current rendering list. If the image insertion designation information has not been set, this processing is terminated as it is. Grasping the address information of the data.

In step S3806, the insertion image data to be rendered this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3805. Thereafter, in step S3807, the insertion character image data grasped in step S3806 is mapped to the insertion object, and this processing ends.

By executing the above processing, the round moving image related to the round moving image data RMD0 is reproduced on the display surface G. FIG. Further, when image insertion designation information is set, an insertion character image is displayed so as to overlap the round moving image.

Here, only the second background image BP2 is drawn in the round moving image, and each insertion character image is not set. Since the insertion character image corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed so as to overlap the second background image BP2, the insertion image data IPD0 is prepared as image data to be displayed on the entire display surface G. No need. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the insertion image data IPD0.

That is, when changing a part of the display surface G, the data related to the common part (second background image BP2) is set in the moving image data, and the data related to the individual parts (insertion character images IP1, IP2) By preparing the data separately, it is possible to reduce the amount of data as a whole.

Also, due to the characteristics of moving image data, it is necessary to set still image data for each continuous frame. By drawing the second background image BP2 using this essential still image data, the essential still image data can be preferably used, and the amount of data related to the round effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, for example, if an image in which the second inserted character image IP2 is drawn superimposed on the second background image BP2 is overwritten with the first inserted character image IP1, the girl displayed in the middle is deleted. Due to the need to draw the second background image BP2 in the area corresponding to the girl, the area to be overwritten becomes large, or different α values are set for the area to be erased and other areas. It may be necessary to separately provide the alpha data that has been used. Therefore, the processing load may increase, or the amount of data may increase. On the other hand, by setting the still image data related to the second background image BP2 to the moving image data and preparing the image data related to the insertion character image to be changed separately from the moving image data, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided. can do.

In addition, since the board surface of the moving image object is flat, the image related to the still image data is not curved. As a result, the image related to the still image data is displayed as it is.

Further, moving image objects and insertion objects are configured to be parallel projected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image on the edge side of the display surface G from being curved due to the perspective.

Next, the state of the round effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a time chart showing how round effects are produced.

At timing t1, which is the start timing of the round effect, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the first background image BP1 and the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are displayed.

As time passes (the frame number is updated), the moving character images MP1 and MP2 move in a predetermined direction. For example, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are displayed as they move in waves. Then, the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are framed out.

After that, at the timing of t3, which is the image insertion timing, the insertion character image is displayed with the second background image BP2 as the background. In this case, if the current round effect is for the odd-numbered round, the first insert character image IP1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63(c-1). On the other hand, if the current round effect is for the even-numbered round, the second insert character image IP2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63(c-2).

After that, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the third moving character image MP3 is displayed. After the third moving character image MP3 performs a predetermined action, the round effect ends.

As described above, a round video is played every time a round game is started, and furthermore, during the playback of the round video, an inserted character image corresponding to the current round is inserted so as to overlap the image related to the round video. It is configured to execute the round production to be displayed. As a result, moving images in a plurality of display modes can be viewed using one piece of round moving image data RMD0. The amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

In particular, in the open/close execution mode, the same game, that is, the round game is repeated. In this case, if the configuration is such that the same round effect is repeatedly executed in correspondence with the repetition of the round game, the degree of attention to the round effect may decrease. On the other hand, if a different moving image is displayed for each round game, there is a concern that the amount of moving image data related to the moving image display will increase.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10, during the reproduction of the round moving image, by displaying the inserted character image corresponding to the current round, the same round moving image can be used to create variations in the round effect. diversification can be achieved.

Although two types of the first insertion image data IPD1 and the second insertion image data IPD2 are prepared as the insertion image data IPD0, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, each insertion image data may be set in association with each round. As a result, it is possible to diversify the round effects and to grasp what round the current round game is based on the image displayed based on the inserted image data.

Furthermore, it is also possible to prepare more insertion image data than the number of rounds, and select one insertion image data from a plurality of insertion image data at the insertion timing of the insertion character image in each round. As a result, it is possible to increase the randomness of the inserting character image to be inserted, and to increase the degree of attention to the inserting character image.

Also, while the insertion character image is being displayed, the parameters applied to the insertion image data IPD0 are not changed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the parameters to be applied may be sequentially updated. In this case, if the α value is uniformly updated, the inserted character image can be faded in or faded out, and if the magnification information is updated, the inserted character image can be enlarged or reduced. It becomes possible.

When the inserted character image is to be faded in or faded out, the inserted character image may be blended with the moving image drawn behind the inserted character image. As a result, it is possible to increase the affinity between the inserted character image and the moving image, and to reduce discomfort that may be caused by displaying the inserted character image and the moving image at the same time.

Moreover, the present invention may be applied not only to round moving images, but also to super reach display or normal reach display, for example. In this case, ready-to-reach moving image data relating to the ready-to-reach moving image to be reproduced during super-reach display is prepared, and a plurality of types of insertion image data of inserting images to be inserted during reproduction of the ready-to-reach moving image are prepared. Then, when performing super reach display, the display CPU 131 executes a process of drawing one image data out of a plurality of types of insertion image data, and sets the address of the selected insertion image data in the data table. Then, when it is time to insert an insert image, the current insert image data is grasped based on the address of the insert image data set in the data table, and drawing is performed based on the insert image data. This makes it possible to perform a plurality of types of super reach display using one set of reach moving image data.

Also, in the above configuration, a round movie is played back for each round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a series of movies played over a plurality of rounds may be played. In this case, the series of movies may be reproduced repeatedly until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Even in this case, by inserting a different insert character image in the middle of a series of movies, the movie can be recognized as a different movie.

When a series of movies are reproduced over a plurality of rounds, the inserted character image may be displayed during the interval period between the rounds. As a result, the player can be made to preferably recognize that it is during the interval period in the movie reproduced over a plurality of rounds.

Also, although only the second background image BP2 is drawn in the reference data RMD3, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, both the first insertion character image IP1 and the second background image BP2 may be drawn. In this case, the coordinates of the second inserting image data IPD2 should be set so that the second inserting character image IP2 overlaps the first inserting character image IP1. As a result, different round effects can be displayed depending on whether the image is inserted or not. However, in view of the fact that moving image data can be effectively used, and the fact that it is necessary to secure a large image data size in order to overwrite the image displayed on the far side, the reference data RMD3 includes the second A configuration in which only the background image BP2 is drawn is better.

Also, although the configuration is such that the insertion character image is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which another insertion moving image is played back over the period from timing t3 to timing t4. In this case, the insertion moving image should be decoded at a timing prior to the timing t3 so that the insertion moving image can be reproduced at the timing t3. Also, the insertion moving image may be a moving image corresponding to a predetermined area on the display surface G, or may be a moving image of the entire display surface G. FIG.

In the above configuration, during the reproduction of a series of round animations, the inserted character image related to the round animation is displayed. It is good also as a structure displayed separately. In this case, the specific image may be displayed during a part of the period during which the round motion picture is played, or may be displayed throughout the period during which the round motion picture is played.

As the specific image, for example, a teaching image that can teach the player what round the current round is, or a teaching image that can teach the number of times a round video has been played, or a teaching image that can be displayed when a jackpot is won. The symbol image may be a combination of the jackpot symbols displayed on the surface G or an image corresponding to the symbol image.

In this case, for example, as the processing related to the display of the teaching image, various teaching image data (teaching objects and teaching textures) are prepared separately from the round video, and the image related to the round video is displayed as described above. A configuration in which a teaching image created using a teaching object and a teaching texture is inserted and displayed, or a configuration in which a round moving image including a predetermined teaching image is prepared can be considered.

In the configuration in which a round video including the predetermined teaching image is prepared, when changing the content of the teaching image, the change destination is superimposed on the predetermined teaching image included in the round video. Draw the teaching image. Specifically, the teaching object to be changed is arranged so as to overlap the area where the predetermined teaching image is displayed. As a result, the predetermined teaching image included in the round moving image is overwritten with the teaching image after the change, and the teaching image after the change is displayed.

In such a configuration, when inserting and displaying an inserting character image, the positional relationship between the inserting object and the teaching object is set so that the teaching image is not overwritten by the inserting character image. Specifically, in the world coordinate system, the coordinates of both are set so that the teaching object is arranged closer to the viewpoint than the insertion object. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the instruction image is hidden by the inserted character image.

Further, the image insertion invention may be applied to a configuration for two-dimensional display. Specifically, for example, image data corresponding to an image to be inserted is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as sprite data, and various parameter information to be applied to the sprite data is stored. Then, still image data created by decoding the moving image data is written into the frame buffer 142, and sprite data relating to the image to be inserted into the frame buffer 142 is written.

<Another form when performing a round production>
Another form of the round effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68. FIG.

In this another form, the configuration of the round moving image data RMD0 is different. The different point will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the structure of the round moving image data RMD0 in this another form.

In this alternative form, the round moving image data RMD0 is divided at the timing when the insertion character image is displayed. and second round moving image data RMD0b corresponding to the second round moving image from the display of the third moving character image MP3 to the end timing of the round moving image. , is divided into

A compression mode of the first round moving image data RMD0a and the second round moving image data RMD0b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode of each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b. FIG. 65(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode for the first round moving image data RMD0a. 65(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode of the second round moving image data RMD0b, and FIG. 65(c) is a graph for explaining the bit rates of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b.

As already explained, the first round moving image data RMD0a and the second round moving image data RMD0b are encoded compressed data and have reference data and difference data. In this case, even if the playback time of each round moving image is the same and the reference data included in each of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b is the same, the first round moving image data RMD0a and the first round moving image data RMD0a and The data amount of the second round moving image data RMD0b may differ.

Specifically, when comparing the first-round video and the second-round video, the first-round video has more characters to move than the second-round video, so the first-round video has more The movement is more intense than the second round animation, and it is complicated (high-definition). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 65(a-1) and 65(b-1), the difference data of the first round moving image data RMD0a is larger than the difference data of the second round moving image data RMD0b.

Here, the amount of data that can be allocated to the whole round moving image data RMD0 is predetermined, and it is necessary to adjust each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b so as to match the data amount. In this case, by adjusting the bit rate of each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, it is possible to set a desired amount of data while maintaining the overall image quality of the round moving image.

Specifically, the image quality does not easily deteriorate even if the bit rate is lowered for an image with little motion or a relatively uncomplicated image (low-definition image). On the other hand, if the bit rate is lowered for an image with large movements or a relatively complicated image, a large amount of block noise and mosquito noise will occur, resulting in a significant drop in image quality. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(a-2), by allocating a relatively large bit rate to the first round moving image data RMD0a, a relatively large amount of data (FS1) is secured and the first round moving image data RMD0a is allocated. To suppress deterioration of image quality of a round moving image. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(b-2), by allocating a relatively small bit rate to the second round moving image data RMD0b, a relatively small amount of data (FS2) is secured and the second round moving image data RMD0b is processed. It is possible to reduce the data amount of the moving image data RMD0b. As a result, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the image quality of a series of round animations used in the round effect.

That is, as shown in FIG. 65(c), by increasing the bit rate of the first round moving image data RMD0a and decreasing the bit rate of the second round moving image data RMD0b, each of the round moving image data RMD0a, Compared to the case where RMD0b is set at the same bit rate (see the dotted line in FIG. 65(c)), deterioration in image quality of the round moving image is suppressed despite the same total data amount. As a result, it is possible to set the round moving image data RMD0 to a desired data amount while suppressing deterioration in image quality of the round moving image.

By the way, to explain in detail the compression processing at the stage of creating each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b is subjected to compression processing a plurality of times (specifically, twice). Created by Specifically, in the first compression process, first, the data amount of the entire round moving image data RMD0 set in advance is grasped, and each of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b is allocated so as to have the data amount. The data amounts FS1 and FS2 are grasped, and the bit rates corresponding to the respective data amounts FS1 and FS2 are grasped. Then, in the second compression process, the actual compression process is executed using the bit rate obtained in the first compression process. As a result, the round moving image data RMD0 has a preset data amount.

Here, in the compression of each of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, the difference data is compressed by simplifying the difference data so that the amount of data is based on the bit rate set individually, and the reference data is It is not abbreviated. Since the reference data serves as a reference for each difference data (P-picture data and B-picture data), if the image quality of the reference data deteriorates, the image quality of the whole round moving image due to the error due to inter-frame compression will significantly deteriorate. is.

Moreover, in this another form, the insertion image data IPD0 is different. Specifically, the size of the insertion image data IPD0 in this alternative form is set so that the image related to the insertion image data IPD0 can be displayed on the entire display surface G. FIG. Insertion image data in which the first insertion character image IP1 is drawn superimposed on the second background image BP2 and the second insertion character image IP2 in superimposition on the second background image BP2 are drawn in the insertion image data IPD0. Insert image data and are provided. In other words, the insert image data IPD0 of this alternative form indicates a single image displayed on the entire display surface G itself. In the following description, an image displayed using the insertion image data IPD0, that is, an image in which either of the insertion character images IP1 and IP2 is drawn superimposed on the second background image BP2 is simply referred to as an insertion image.

In this embodiment, the divided round moving image data RMD0a and RMDb are sequentially decoded at predetermined intervals, the first round moving image and the second round moving image are sequentially reproduced at predetermined intervals, and the During the interval, the inserted image data IPD0 is used to display an inserted image in which the second background image BP2 and one of the inserted character images IP1 and IP2 are integrated, thereby reproducing a series of round animations. Let

Next, the arithmetic processing for the round effect in this another form will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66 .

First, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not an inserting character image is being displayed based on the currently set data table, more specifically, the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. If the inserting character image is not being displayed, the flow advances to step S3902 to determine whether it is time to start displaying the inserting character image based on the currently set data table. The display start timing of the insertion character image is predetermined in the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, and more specifically, is set to be the same as the end timing of the first round animation.

If it is not the display start timing of the inserted character image, the process advances to step S3903 to determine whether or not an effect related to the round animation is being executed based on the currently set data table. In this case, it is determined whether the effect related to the first round video or the second round video is being executed,
If the effect related to the round moving image is not being executed, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not it is time to start playing the first round moving image. If it is not the timing to start playing the first round video, this arithmetic processing ends as it is.If it is the timing to start playing the first round video, the round counter RC is incremented by 1 in step S3905. Then, in steps S3906 and S3907, processing related to decoding of the first round moving image data RMD0a is executed.

Specifically, in step S3906, the address where the first round moving image data RMD0a is stored in the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the first round moving image data RMD0a are decoded to generate still image data for a plurality of frames. is created, the address of the area in which the still image data is stored is grasped.

Then, in step S3907, the decoding designation information of the first round moving image data RMD0a is set, and this arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, a drawing list in which the decoding designation information of the first round moving image data RMD0a is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806). The moving image recorder of the VDP 135 executes decoding processing of the first round moving image data RMD0a based on receiving the drawing list in which the decoding designation information is set. Since the decoding process has already been described, the description thereof will be omitted.

When an effect related to the round moving image is being executed, a process of setting still image data corresponding to the round moving image as a drawing object is executed in steps S3908 to S3910. In this case, when the decoded round moving image data RMD0 is the first round moving image data RMD0a, the still image data related to the first round moving image is set as a drawing target, while the decoded round moving image data When the image data RMD0 is the second round moving image data RMD0b, the still image data related to the second round moving image is set as the drawing target. It should be noted that the specific configuration of this process has already been described, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Thereafter, in step S3911, round effect specifying information for specifying execution of the round effect by the VDP 135 is set, and this arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), the moving image object is set as a drawing target, and various parameters applied to the moving image object are set. The various parameters include addresses of still image data as image data mapped to moving image objects.

On the other hand, if it is time to start displaying the inserting character image (step S3902: YES), processing for setting the inserting character image as a drawing target is executed in steps S3912 to S3915.

Here, the size of the insertion object of this alternative form is set in correspondence with the size of the insertion image data IPD0. Specifically, the size of the insertion object is set to be the same as the size of the insertion image data IPD0. In other words, in this alternative form, the insertion object and the moving image object are the same.

Since the specific processing configuration of steps S3912 to S3915 has already been described, the description will be omitted.

After execution of the processing of steps S3912 to S3915, the round effect designation information is set in step S3911, and this calculation processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, in the drawing list output processing (step S806) that follows, the insertion object is set as a drawing target, and various parameters to be applied to the insertion object are set. The various parameters include addresses of insertion image data corresponding to the current round game as image data mapped to the insertion object.

Here, the size of the insertion object corresponds to the entire display surface G, and the size of the insertion image data IPD0 mapped to the insertion object is set to correspond to the entire display surface G. there is A second background image BP2 is drawn in advance in the insertion image data IPD0 in this alternative form. Thereby, in this another form, an insertion image functions as a background image. That is, it can be said that the inserting image in this another form is one image including the background image and the character image. As a result, the predetermined image is displayed on the entire display surface G even in a situation where the round moving image is not reproduced.

If the insert character image is being displayed (step S3901: YES), the process advances to step S3916 to determine whether or not it is time to start playing the second round moving image based on the currently set data table. The reproduction start timing of the second round moving image is set to the timing when a predetermined period has passed from the display start timing of the insertion image (end timing of the first round moving image).

If it is not the playback start timing of the second round moving image, then in steps S3917 and S3918, processing for maintaining the display of the insertion image is executed, and in step S3911, the round effect designation information is set, and this arithmetic processing is performed. exit. Since these processes have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is time to start playing the second round video, the process for playing the second round video is executed in steps S3919 and S3920. Specifically, in step S3919, the address where the second round moving image data RMD0b is stored in the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the second round moving image data RMD0b are decoded to generate still images for a plurality of frames. When the data is created, the address of the area in which the still image data is stored is grasped.

Then, in step S3920, the decoding designation information for the second round moving image data RMD0b is set, and this arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, a drawing list in which the decoding designation information of the second round moving image data RMD0b is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806). The moving image recorder of the VDP 135 executes decoding processing of the second round moving image data RMD0b based on receiving the drawing list in which the decoding designation information is set.

According to this process, when the first-round moving image or the second-round moving image is being reproduced, a drawing list in which the moving-image object is set as a drawing target is created. During the period between the start timing of the second round moving image, a drawing list is created in which the insertion object is set as a drawing target. In this case, both moving-image objects and insertion objects are not set in one drawing list.

By the way, the processing of steps S3908 to S3911 is executed after the next processing cycle after the processing of steps S3919 and S3920. As a result, the still image data related to the second round moving image is set as the image data mapped to the moving image object.

As described above, in the arithmetic processing for the round effect, the current drawing target is set for each processing. As a result, the drawing list is set for each processing, and the VDP 135 executes the drawing processing so that the image is updated for each processing. That is, the image is updated for each frame, and the frame rate is set to be the same throughout the period during which the round moving image is reproduced.

Next, the setting processing for the round effect in this another form will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 67(a). The setting process for the round effect in this another form is configured to be started when the round effect specifying information is set in the received drawing list.

First, in step S4001, an object to be rendered is grasped. Specifically, when the first round animation or the second round animation is being played, the animation object is grasped. On the other hand, during the period between the end timing of the first round moving image and the start timing of the second round moving image, the insertion object is grasped.

After that, in step S4002, parameters to be applied to the drawing target object are grasped based on the drawing list. After that, in step S4003, the moving image object recognized in step S4001 is set to the world coordinate system, and this setting process ends.

Next, the mapping process for round effect of this another form is demonstrated using the flowchart of FIG.67(b).

First, in step S4101, the address of the image data (texture) to be mapped is grasped among the parameters applied to the object to be rendered. In this case, if the object for animation is set in the drawing list, the address of the still image data corresponding to the frame number is grasped, and if the object for insertion is set in the drawing list, this The address of the insertion image data IPD0 corresponding to the round game is grasped.

In subsequent step S4102, image data (texture) to be mapped is grasped based on the address grasped in step S4101. Then, in step S4103, the image data obtained in step S4102 is mapped onto the object to be rendered, and this mapping process ends.

Next, the execution mode of the round effect in this another form will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 68 . FIG. 68(a) is a time chart showing the playback period of the first round movie, FIG. 68(b) is a time chart showing the display period of the inserted image, and FIG. 68(c) is a time chart showing the playback period of the second round movie. Chart.

First, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the reproduction of the first round animation is started on the display screen G at the timing t11, which is the start timing of the round game. Then, when the first round moving image ends at the timing of t12, as shown in FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b), the display screen G displays the insertion image data IPD0 instead of the first round moving image. An inset image is displayed. Specifically, the first inserted character image IP1 or the second inserted character image IP2 is displayed so as to overlap the second background image BP2.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 68(b) and 68(c), the second round moving image is started instead of the insert image at timing t13, and the second round moving image ends at timing t14. As a result, on the display surface G, a series of round effects is performed in which the images are displayed in the order of the first round moving image, the inserted image, and the second round moving image.

Then, at the timing of t15, which is the start timing of the next round game, the first round animation is again sequentially reproduced.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the round moving image data RMD0 related to a series of round moving images is divided into a plurality of unit data (first round moving image data RMD0a and Second round moving image data RMD0b). By adjusting the bit rate for each of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, efficient image quality adjustment can be performed while setting the round moving image data RMD0 to a predetermined data amount.

Specifically, a relatively high bit rate is applied to the first round moving image data RMD0a, for which it is assumed that the difference data tends to be relatively large due to relatively rapid motion in the first round moving image. By performing the encoding process in , the image quality of the first round moving image can be maintained. On the other hand, for the second round moving image data RMD0b, for which it is assumed that the difference data tends to be relatively small due to relatively gentle motion in the second round moving image, a relatively low bit rate By performing the encoding process in , it is possible to reduce the data amount of the second round moving image data RMD0b while maintaining the image quality.

In particular, focusing on reducing the data amount of the round moving image data RMD0, it is conceivable to reduce the frame rate of the round moving image, specifically, the update timing of the image. However, if the frame rate is changed, processing for changing the frame rate such as processing for grasping the current frame rate is required separately, increasing the processing load and increasing the program capacity related to the above processing. There is concern that the

On the other hand, according to this another embodiment, it is possible to suppress the data amount of the round moving image data RMD0 without executing the processing related to the change of the frame rate. In other words, the reduction of the data amount is realized by the compression mode instead of the configuration for compensating by processing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the round moving image data RMD0 while suppressing an increase in the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 .

Also, the amount of moving image data that has undergone encoding processing depends on the bit rate regardless of the amount of difference data. In other words, the encoder secures a data amount corresponding to the bit rate as moving image data regardless of the data amount of difference data. In this case, if a moving image whose difference data is expected to be easily reduced is encoded at a relatively high bit rate, a useless amount of data in which no data is actually stored is secured. As a result, the amount of data is wasted. On the other hand, according to this another form, since generation|occurrence|production of the said useless data can be suppressed, reduction of data amount can be aimed at.

Also, an insert image is displayed between the first round animation and the second round animation, and the insert image is changed according to the round related to the current round effect. As a result, using one piece of round moving image data RMD0, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of round effects. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data while favorably performing a round effect in a plurality of modes.

Furthermore, since the timing for decoding the first round moving image data RMD0a and the timing for decoding the second round moving image data RMD0b are different, the processing load related to the decoding for reproducing the round moving image is distributed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing dropouts due to a local increase in processing load.

In addition, in this another form, the scene changes in the round animation, and the intensity and complexity of the movement are different, but it is not limited to this. , may not be synchronized. In this case, the moving image data may be divided at each scene change. Thus, by preparing a plurality of unit moving image data for each scene and combining these unit moving image data, it is possible to diversify a series of round moving images. Also, compared to a configuration in which a series of moving image data is prepared for each combination, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to moving image data. However, from the viewpoint of being able to appropriately allocate bit rates, it is preferable to divide the round moving image data RMD0 based on the degree of movement or the like.

Moreover, although one round moving image is divided into two pieces of moving image data, it is not limited to this, and may be divided into three or more pieces of moving image data. However, due to the characteristics of moving image data, reference data that serves as a reference for difference data must be provided in one piece of moving image data. The reference data is not subject to compression, or even if it is compressed, the compression rate is smaller than that of the difference data. Therefore, there is a possibility that the data amount of the entire round moving image data RMD0 may rather increase. Therefore, the relationship between the increase in reference data resulting from dividing one piece of round moving image data RMD0 into a plurality of pieces of moving image data and the reduction in the data amount of the entire round moving image data RMD0 by adjusting the bit rate is Considering this, it is preferable to determine the division mode of the moving image data. Specifically, if the increase in the amount of data due to the increase in the reference data that can be caused by division is smaller than the amount of reduction in the amount of data that can be secured by adjusting the bit rate of the divided moving image data, the moving image When the data is divided and the amount of increase is larger than the amount of reduction, it is preferable to treat the data as one piece of moving image data without dividing.

In addition, although it is assumed that the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b have the same amount of reference data, the present invention is not limited to this and may have different configurations. Also, it is assumed that the round moving image data reproduced by the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b have the same reproduction time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different configurations may be used. Even in these cases, by adjusting the bit rate of each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, the data amount of the whole round moving image data RMD0 can be preferably adjusted.

In addition, although a predetermined period is provided between the first round video and the second round video, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first round video and the second round video may be displayed continuously. good. In this case, the insert image may not be displayed, or the insert image may be displayed during the first round moving image, during the second round moving image, or across each round moving image.

<Configuration for Displaying Sandy Beach Background Image and Configuration for Performing Sandy Beach Running Production>
Next, the configuration for displaying the sandy beach background and the configuration for performing the sandy beach sprint effect will be described.

The sand beach background image is an image when the sea is viewed from the sand beach, and is an image showing waves crashing against the sand beach at a predetermined cycle. The sandy beach background image is used as a background image when symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

The sandy beach sprinting effect is a effect that can be executed when a round game is being performed in the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the sandy beach run effect is an effect executed when the sandy beach run effect is won in the effect lottery process executed when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

The sandy beach sprinting production is a production in which a plurality of pattern images sprints on the sandy beach. In this production, the scenery depicted in the sandy beach background image is used as the background image when viewed from another angle, more specifically, from a low angle.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, perspective projection and parallel projection are set as projection patterns, and these projection patterns are selectively used according to the content of the image to be displayed. Perspective projection refers to projecting each object placed in the world coordinate system as viewed from a predetermined viewpoint. It means to project as if moving. As a result, the image of each object is displayed so as to change according to the distance from the viewpoint.

In parallel projection, each object is projected as it is viewed from the screen area PC12. Specifically, the vertices of each polygon of each object move perpendicularly to the screen area PC12. It means to project as As a result, each image of each object is always displayed in a fixed size regardless of the distance from the predetermined viewpoint. Proper use of these projection patterns will be described later.

When displaying the sandy beach background image, a plurality of objects and a plurality of textures set corresponding to each of the objects are used.

A plurality of objects used for displaying the beach background image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each of the objects OB1 to OB4.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the world coordinate system will be used as a reference, and the viewpoint will be in the +Z direction.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), as objects related to the display of the sandy beach background image, a sandy beach object OB1 used to display the sandy beach, a wave object OB2 used to display waves, and an object to display the sea. A sea object OB3 used to display the sky and a sky object OB4 used to display the sky are set. Each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is composed of a rectangular plate polygon, and its longitudinal size is set larger than the longitudinal size of the screen area PC12.

Each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is arranged so as to form an image of the sea seen from the sandy beach when perspectively projected from the specific viewpoint PV1. Specifically, the objects are arranged in the order of the beach object OB1, the wave object OB2, the sea object OB3, and the sky object OB4 in the depth direction (+Z direction) when viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1 in the world coordinate system. Coordinates of OB1 to OB4 are set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the beach object OB1, the wave object OB2 and the sea object OB3 are arranged to be inclined with respect to the screen area PC12 (projection plane). This makes it possible to give a sense of perspective (a sense of depth) to each individual image displayed by each of the objects OB1 to OB3 when perspectively projected from the specific viewpoint PV1.

In addition, adjacent objects are partially overlapped and arranged so that the objects OB1 to OB3 are continuous. Specifically, the front end of the wave object OB2 overlaps the rear end of the beach object OB1, and the front end of the sea object OB3 is the rear end of the wave object OB2. is overlaid on the In this case, since the wave object OB2 overlaps the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3, the continuity among the objects OB1 to OB3 is ensured even if the wave object OB2 moves in the direction of inclination. .

Note that the sky object OB4 is arranged so as to be continuous from the far side end of the sea object OB3. The sky object OB4 is arranged standing up in the +Y direction.

A plurality of textures TD1 to TD4 are provided corresponding to the respective objects OB1 to OB4. Each of these textures TD1 to TD4 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each texture TD1 to TD4. Note that only a portion of each of the textures TD1 to TD4 is shown for reasons of drawing. A two-dot chain line indicates a projection area.

As shown in FIG. 70, textures TD1 to TD4 are set as rectangular image data corresponding to objects OB1 to OB4. Each of the textures TD1 to TD4 has an image corresponding to the object to be pasted. Specifically, a sandy beach texture TD1 depicting a sandy beach is provided as a texture corresponding to the sandy beach object OB1. A wave texture TD2 depicting waves is provided as a texture corresponding to the wave object OB2, a sea texture TD3 depicting the sea is provided as a texture corresponding to the sea object OB3, and a texture corresponding to the sky object OB4. A sky texture TD4 in which the sky is drawn is provided as a texture.

Here, each of the textures TD1 to TD4 is set so that when each of the objects OB1 to OB3 is viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1, the sandy beach background image has a sense of depth. Specifically, image data corresponding to the video when actually viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1 and having a predetermined perspective as a whole (producing a sense of perspective) are set as the respective textures TD1 to TD4. there is In this case, the textures TD1 to TD4 are made to correspond to the distances between the specific viewpoint PV1 and the objects OB1 to OB4 so that the individual images displayed by the objects OB1 to OB4 match in perspective. is set. As a result, when the objects OB1 to OB4 are perspectively projected from the specific viewpoint PV1 in a situation where the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged in succession, a sandy beach background image with a sense of depth and consistent perspective is generated. It will be done.

As described above, the objects OB1 to OB4 are continuously arranged while being inclined with respect to the screen area PC12 (YZ plane), and the textures TD1 to TD4 to be pasted on the objects OB1 to OB4 are the specific viewpoint PV1. It corresponds to the image viewed from above, and by using image data that takes perspective consistency between each individual image so that a predetermined perspective is applied as a whole, a sandy beach with a sense of depth is created using plate polygons. Background images can be created. As a result, a realistic image can be visually recognized by the player with a relatively small processing load and data amount.

Incidentally, in the perspective of each individual image, the distance between the specific viewpoint PV1 and each object OB1 to OB4 is more dominant than the image data of each texture TD1 to TD4. In other words, the perspective of each individual image changes greatly with the change in distance.

Next, the sandy beach sprinting effect will be described.

The sandy beach sprinting effect is an effect in which a plurality of pattern images are displayed over a plurality of consecutive frames as if they are running on the sandy beach in a predetermined direction. In this rendering, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 and each of the textures TD1 to TD4 used to display the sandy beach background image are used.

Here, the background image used in the sandy beach sprinting effect (hereinafter referred to as the background image for effect in order to distinguish from the sandy beach background image) has a different viewpoint from the sandy beach background image. Therefore, if the textures TD1 to TD4 determined based on the specific viewpoint PV1 are used, the consistency of the perspective cannot be obtained, resulting in an image with a sense of incompatibility.

This phenomenon will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining changes in perspective. For convenience of explanation, the wave object OB2 and the sky object OB4 are omitted, and the sandy beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are continued.

As already explained, since the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are inclined with respect to the screen area PC12, the distances between the specific viewpoint PV1 and the objects OB1 and OB3 differ depending on the parts of the objects OB1 and OB3. ing. Specifically, the distance R1 from the specific viewpoint PV1 to the front end of the beach object OB1, the distance R2 from the specific viewpoint PV1 to the front end of the sea object OB3, and the depth of the sea object OB3 from the specific viewpoint PV1. The distance R3 to the end of the side is increased in order (R1<R2<R3). In such a situation, by performing perspective projection using the specific viewpoint PV1 as a viewpoint, an image with a perspective corresponding to each of the distances R1 to R3 can be obtained.

In this case, the depth of perspective depends on the ratio of the distances R1 to R3. Specifically, the higher the ratio of the distance R2 to the distance R1, the greater the perspective of the beach object OB1. Then, the higher the ratio of the distance R3 to the distance R2, the more the perspective of the sea object OB3.

Further, the textures TD1 and TD3 pasted on the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 provide perspective between individual images displayed by the objects OB1 and OB3 (actually including the wave object OB2). ) are set in consideration of the above ratio. This makes it possible to display an image with consistent perspective.

Here, when the viewpoint is moved from the specific viewpoint PV1 in the -Y direction and set to another viewpoint PV2, the distances R1 to R3 change to the distances R1' to R3', respectively, and the above ratio changes. As a result, the degree to which the perspective is applied differs when perspective projection is performed. Then, if the textures TD1 and TD3 set according to the distances R1 to R3 are used, the perspective consistency between the objects OB1 and OB3 cannot be obtained. As a result, an image with a sense of incompatibility as a whole is obtained.

In particular, when the images are updated by moving the objects OB1 and OB3 in a predetermined direction, a sense of incongruity due to the different perspectives of the images of the objects OB1 and OB3 is easily noticeable. Specifically, the sea displayed on the far side moves faster than the beach displayed on the near side.

In addition, when the angle of view is changed from the viewpoint, the perspective becomes different, so the deviation of the perspective becomes more noticeable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, parallel projection is used instead of perspective projection when creating a background image for effect, and the size of each of the objects OB1 and OB3 is adjusted according to the distance in the depth direction. It is configured to be adjusted. These configurations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the objects OB1 and OB3 are set when creating a background image for effect.

Parallel projection, as already explained, is a method of projecting so that the vertices of each polygon of each object move linearly and perpendicularly to the screen area PC12. When performing the parallel projection, an image that does not depend on the distance from the viewpoint is displayed, that is, an image without perspective.

Specifically, when the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are projected in parallel, both of them correspond to the distance from the viewpoint on the screen area PC12, even though the sea object OB3 is on the far side of the beach object OB1. displayed without any resizing. This reduces the perspective shift that may occur between the two.

In particular, the perspective of each individual image is more dominant than the perspective of each texture TD1, TD3, and the perspective based on the viewpoint and the distance between the objects OB1 and OB3 is dominant. Based perspective deviations are noticeable.

On the other hand, by performing parallel projection, the perspective itself based on the above distance is not added, so it is possible to reduce the deviation of the perspective.

In this case, the perspectives based on the textures TD1 and TD3 are reflected, but the deviation of the perspective is less conspicuous than the deviation of the perspective based on the distance. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of incongruity.

It should be noted that a process of eliminating the perspective of each texture TD1, TD3 may be executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize an image with a more perspective and without contradiction.

Specifically, for example, in each of the textures TD1 and TD3, a correction process may be performed in which regions mapped closer to the front side are shrunk in the horizontal direction (X direction), and regions mapped toward the back side are expanded in the horizontal direction. Alternatively, for example, each of the objects OB1 and OB3 may be a trapezoidal object having long sides on the front side and short sides on the back side, and a texture may be mapped onto the trapezoidal object.

In the case of parallel projection, the sea, which should appear smaller than the sandy beach because it is farther than the sandy beach, is displayed without size adjustment, resulting in an image with no sense of depth. In other words, since the size ratio between the beach and the sea does not correspond to the distance from the viewpoint, the image lacks a sense of depth.

On the other hand, the magnification of each object OB1, OB3 is set so that the ratio corresponds to the distance from the viewpoint. Specifically, the sizes of the objects OB1 and OB3 are set so that the sizes of the objects OB1 and OB3 gradually decrease as the distance from the viewpoint increases.

More specifically, when the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are perspectively projected from the changed viewpoint, the beach image, which is the image related to the beach object OB1, is displayed in the area A shown in FIG. Then, a sea image, which is an image related to the sea object OB3, is displayed in an area B shown in FIG. The size ratio of the regions A and B depends on the distance from the viewpoint.

The size and coordinates (specifically, the Y coordinate) of each of the objects OB1 and OB3 are set so that the areas in which the images of the objects OB1 and OB3 are displayed are the same as the areas A and B when parallel projected. is set to As a result, the effect background image with a pseudo-perspective effect is displayed.

For convenience of explanation, the wave object OB2 has been omitted, but the situation where the wave object OB2 is set is the same.

A specific processing configuration for each image display will be described below.

First, the sandy beach background calculation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The sand beach background calculation process is executed in the background calculation process (step S903) in the task processing (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131 when the currently set data table corresponds to the display of the sand beach background image. executed.

In step S4201, objects OB1 to OB4 required to display the beach background image are grasped.

After that, in step S4202, the coordinates and angles of the objects OB1 to OB4 are updated. Specifically, when arranged in the world coordinate system, the objects OB1 to OB4 are aligned continuously in the depth direction (the direction away from the specific viewpoint PV1), and the objects OB1 to OB4 excluding the sky object OB4 are aligned. Each coordinate is set so as to be inclined by a predetermined angle with respect to the screen area PC12.

In the following step S4203, address setting processing for each texture is executed. Specifically, the addresses of the textures TD1 to TD4 to be pasted on the objects OB1 to OB4 are set. After that, in step S4204, arithmetic processing for updating other parameters is performed.

In subsequent step S4205, perspective projection designation information, which is information for specifying that each of the objects OB1 to OB4 should be perspectively projected, is set. Then, in step S4206, other background objects are grasped, and in step S4207, arithmetic processing for updating the parameters of the other background objects is performed, and the sandy beach background arithmetic processing ends.

When such processing is performed, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), each object OB1 to OB4 is set as a drawing target, and various parameters to be applied to each object OB1 to OB4 are set. A draw list is created with Further, perspective projection designation information is set in the drawing list. When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list, the VDP 135 arranges the objects OB1 to OB4 so that the objects OB1 to OB4 have the positional relationship as described above, and performs perspective projection. This creates an image with perspective.

Next, a description will be given of the background arithmetic processing for the sand beach running effect using the flowchart of FIG. 74(a). The background arithmetic processing for the sand beach run effect is executed in the background arithmetic processing of step S903 in the task processing (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131 when the currently set data table corresponds to the sand beach run effect. be done.

First, in step S4301, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not a sandy beach sprinting presentation is being performed.

If the sand beach sprinting effect is not being performed, the process advances to step S4302 to determine whether or not it is time to start the sandy beach sprinting effect.

If it is not the start timing of the sandy beach run effect, this operation processing ends as it is. Execute the process.

Specifically, first, in step S4303, a process of grasping each object OB1 to OB4 is executed.

Then, in step S4304, processing for adjusting the coordinates of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is executed, and in step S4305, processing for adjusting the magnification applied to each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is executed. Specifically, the coordinates and magnification corresponding to the effect background image are set for each of the objects OB1 to OB4. Specifically, when each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is parallel projected, perspective projection is performed from another viewpoint PV2 in the coordinate system of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 in the case where the parallel projected area displays the sandy beach background image. The coordinates and magnification of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 are set so as to overlap the projection area of the case.

After that, in step S4306, another viewpoint PV2 is set as the viewpoint, and in step S4307, arithmetic processing related to initial setting of other parameters is executed. Then, in step S4308, parallel projection designation information is set. The parallel projection designation information is information for instructing the VDP 135 to parallel-project each of the objects OB1 to OB4.

Thereafter, in step S4309, other background objects are grasped, and in step S4310, arithmetic processing for updating various parameters applied to the other background objects is executed, and this arithmetic processing ends. .

When such processing is performed, objects OB1 to OB4 are set as objects to be drawn in the drawing list created in subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806). various parameters that apply to The various parameters correspond to parallel projection of each of the objects OB1 to OB4.

Parallel projection designation information is set in the drawing list. When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list, the VDP 135 grasps each of the objects OB1 to OB4, applies parameters corresponding to parallel projection to each of the objects OB1 to OB4, and performs parallel projection based on another viewpoint PV2. make a projection. As a result, an effect background image viewed from a viewpoint (another viewpoint PV2) different from the viewpoint (specific viewpoint PV1) of the sandy beach background image is created.

When the sand beach running effect is being executed, the process for scrolling the background image for effect is executed in steps S4311 to S4314. Specifically, first, in step S4311, each object OB1 to OB4 is grasped.

In the following step S4312, processing for updating the viewpoint position is executed. Specifically, a process of displacing the currently set viewpoint in the -X direction by a first displacement amount is executed.

After that, in step S4313, arithmetic processing is executed to update the parameters applied to each of the objects OB1 to OB4. Specifically, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is moved in the -X direction from the current coordinates by a predetermined amount of displacement. The predetermined amount of displacement is set according to the distance between each of the objects OB1 to OB4 and the viewpoint within a range smaller than the amount of displacement of the viewpoint in the -X direction.

Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 74(b), as the distance in the Z direction between the viewpoint and each of the objects OB1 to OB4 increases, the relative velocity of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 with respect to the viewpoint decreases. , the amount of displacement of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is set. Specifically, each object OB1 to OB4 is shifted so that the difference between the displacement amount of each object OB1 to OB4 and the first displacement amount decreases as the distance between the viewpoint and the distance in the Z direction of each object OB1 to OB4 increases. Displacement amount is set. As a result, the closer the object is to the viewpoint, the faster the object moves in the +X direction, and the farther the object is from the viewpoint, the slower the object moves in the +X direction. Therefore, a pseudo perspective can be expressed.

Also, for the wave object OB2, not only the displacement in the -X direction but also the Y and Z coordinates are updated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the Y and Z coordinates are set so that the wave object OB2 advances forward while maintaining the tilt angle. This makes it possible to express the appearance of waves crashing toward the front.

That is, the wave object OB2 is arranged so as to overlap with the sandy beach object OB1 (more specifically, shifted in the Z direction), and the wave object OB2 is displaced relative to the sandy beach object OB1. As a result, the waves are displayed so as to overlap the sandy beach.

Then, when the amount of displacement from the initial position of the wave object OB2 reaches a predetermined amount in advance, the coordinates are maintained, and processing is executed to uniformly update the α value so that the wave object OB2 gradually disappears. . Then, when the uniform α value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the α value of complete transmission), the wave object OB2 is placed at the initial position again and a series of processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly show the waves crashing and disappearing, and realistic waves can be realized.

After that, in step S4314, the parallel projection designation information is set, the processing in steps S4309 and S4310 is executed, and this calculation processing ends.

When such processing is executed, each object OB1 to OB4 necessary for displaying the background image is set as a drawing target in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing. Parameter information applied to objects OB1 to OB4 is set. The various parameters are set so that the viewpoint moves in the -X direction, and each of the objects OB1 to OB4 moves so that the relative speed to the viewpoint decreases as the distance between the viewpoint and the objects OB1 to OB4 increases. is set. As a result, the effect background image is displayed so as to scroll in the +X direction.

Note that when the viewpoint moves and the area to be projected becomes the area on the end side of each of the objects OB1 to OB4, the viewpoint of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 currently being projected is changed. It is configured such that the same objects OB1 to OB4 are successively set on the forward side in the traveling direction. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect background image is interrupted due to the viewpoint moving at a speed faster than that of the objects OB1 to OB4.

In addition, both ends corresponding to the movement direction of the viewpoint in each of the textures TD1 to TD4, specifically both ends in the X direction, are preferably set so that the drawn patterns are continuous. As a result, since it is difficult for the player to grasp the gap between the objects, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Next, a description will be given of the arithmetic processing for effecting the sandy beach sprinting effect with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Arithmetic operation processing for sand beach run effect is executed in effect operation processing (step S904) in task processing (FIG. 14) when the currently set data table corresponds to the sand beach run effect. processing.

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the sand beach sprinting presentation is being performed based on the currently set data table.

If the sand beach sprinting effect is not being performed, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether or not it is time to start the sandy beach sprinting effect based on the currently set data table.

If it is not the start timing of the sandy beach sprinting effect, this arithmetic processing is terminated as it is. Then, in step S4404, arithmetic processing relating to initial setting of various parameter information applied to the design object is executed. In this case, the coordinates of the design object are set so that the image of the design object overlaps the sandy beach image when the design object is parallel projected. Specifically, the pattern object is arranged between the beach object OB1 and the screen area PC12.

After that, in step S4405, a teaching object to be drawn this time is grasped. As already explained, the teaching object is an object used when displaying an image that enables teaching of the game situation to the player. More specifically, it teaches the current round number. and an object for indicating the number of times the open/close execution mode has been performed consecutively. In step S4405, these teaching objects are grasped.

Then, in step S4406, arithmetic processing relating to initial setting of various parameter information applied to the teaching object is executed. In this case, the coordinates of the teaching object are set so that the teaching object is positioned closer to the viewpoint than the objects OB1 to OB4 used to generate the effect background image. Then, this arithmetic processing ends.

When such processing is executed, the symbol object and the teaching object are set as the objects to be drawn in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806). Applied parameters are set. These objects are arranged closer to the viewpoint than the objects OB1 to OB4 used to generate the production background image. As a result, the pattern image and the teaching image are displayed so as to be superimposed on the effect background image by performing parallel projection on each of the objects.

If the sandy beach sprinting effect is being performed, then in step S4407 a process of grasping the design object to be sprinted is executed. Then, in step S4408, arithmetic processing is executed to update the parameters applied to the pattern object. Specifically, the coordinates of the design object are updated so that the design object moves as the viewpoint moves in the -X direction. In this case, the amount of displacement of the viewpoint and the amount of displacement of the design object are set to be the same. As a result, the movement of the viewpoint and the movement of the pattern object can be synchronized, and it can be shown that the viewpoint follows the movement of the pattern image.

In subsequent steps S4409 and S4410, updating processing of the teaching object accompanying movement of the viewpoint is executed. Specifically, first, in step S4409, a teaching object is grasped. Then, in step S4410, arithmetic processing is executed to update the parameters applied to the teaching object. Specifically, the coordinates of the teaching object are updated so that the teaching object moves as the viewpoint moves in the -X direction. In this case, the displacement amount of the viewpoint and the displacement amount of the teaching object are set to be the same. As a result, the movement of the viewpoint and the movement of the teaching object can be synchronized, and the teaching image can be displayed at all times.

In the above processing, the processing of steps S4403 to S4406 and the processing of steps S4407 to S4410 are separately displayed for convenience, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these processing may be made common. In this case, the image data to be set at each update timing is set in advance on the data table, and each time the update timing comes, the various image data corresponding to the update timing are read as appropriate, and the setting processing related to drawing is performed. It should be configured to perform.

Next, the sand beach background image and the appearance of the sand beach sprinting effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface G on which a sandy beach background image is displayed, and FIG. 76(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the sandy beach sprinting effect.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), on the beach background image BP10, a first sand image BP11, a first wave image BP12, a first sea image BP13, and a first sky image BP14 are displayed in order from the front side. . The sandy beach background image BP10 is an image with a sense of perspective. Specifically, for example, in the first sea image BP13, the distance between waves and the width of waves decrease as the depth side (horizontal line) approaches.

In the sandy beach run effect, as shown in FIG. 76(b), a second sand image BP21, a second wave image BP22, a second sea image BP23, and a second sky image BP24 are displayed in order from the front side. A production background image BP20 having a viewpoint different from that of the beach background image BP10 is displayed. In this case, since the second sand image BP21→second wave image BP22→second sea image BP23→second sky image BP24 are displayed in order of decreasing size, the image has a sense of perspective.

Then, the pattern images CP1 to CP3 and the teaching images CP4 and CP5 are displayed so as to overlap the effect background image BP20. When the effect background image BP20 moves rightward, which is the direction corresponding to the +X direction, the pattern images CP1 to CP3 appear to move leftward, which is the direction corresponding to the -X direction. . In this case, the movement speed decreases in the order of second sand image BP21→second wave image BP22→second sea image BP23→second sky image BP24. As a result, objects on the far side (farther from the viewpoint) appear to move more slowly, creating a sense of perspective.

As described above, the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged side by side in the depth direction, and textures corresponding to images viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1 are prepared as textures to be pasted on the objects OB1 to OB4. In the configuration for displaying the sandy beach background image BP10 by perspective projection, each object OB1 to OB4 is parallel-projected when displaying the effect background image BP20 based on another viewpoint PV2 different from the specific viewpoint PV1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the consistency of the perspective due to the change of the viewpoint, while the texture to be used is shared. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced in that the texture can be shared.

In particular, by arranging the objects OB1 to OB4 composed of plate polygons, which are relatively simple objects, obliquely with respect to the projection plane and perspectively projecting these objects OB1 to OB4, the processing load is relatively small. can generate a perspective beach background image BP10. On the other hand, if the viewpoints are different, the deviation of the perspective based on the perspective projection becomes more noticeable.

On the other hand, when generating a background image for effect BP20 from a different viewpoint, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above shift by performing parallel projection that does not produce a perspective.

In this case, as the distance between the viewpoint and each of the objects OB1 to OB4 increases, the magnification of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 decreases and the relative movement speed of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 with respect to the viewpoint decreases. This makes it possible to make the image obtained by parallel projection look like an image with perspective.

In the above configuration, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is a plate-like polygon, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured as a specific object of In this case, a texture is provided corresponding to the specific object, and the texture is attached to the specific object. As a result, while the image of the specific object can be adapted to the change in viewpoint, the other objects cannot be adapted to the change in viewpoint, and a situation can arise in which the consistency of the perspective cannot be obtained. On the other hand, when the viewpoint changes, the shift between the two can be reduced by performing parallel projection.

Also, in the above configuration, the different viewpoint PV2 is a position shifted in the -Y direction from the specific viewpoint PV1.

Also, the consistency of the perspective between the images of the respective objects OB1 to OB4 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The same is true for gender. That is, even when displaying one image by combining one object and two-dimensional image data, it is possible to apply switching between perspective projection and parallel projection according to a change in viewpoint.

In the above configuration, the texture used to display the sandy beach background image BP10 is used to display the effect background image BP20. is used to display an image from a viewpoint different from that of the predetermined image, and specific display contents are arbitrary.

Also, in the above configuration, the viewpoint is moved in the -X direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the viewpoint is not moved may be adopted. In this case, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 may be moved in the +X direction, and the amount of movement may be varied according to the distance from the viewpoint. Also, although the moving direction of the viewpoint is the -X direction, it is not limited to this and may be arbitrary.

In the above configuration, the coordinates and magnification of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 are set so that the parallel projected area of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 overlaps the perspective projected area of each of the objects OB1 to OB4. is not limited to The point is that the coordinates and magnification of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 should be adjusted so that the image corresponds to the different viewpoint PV2 and a sense of perspective is produced.

Furthermore, when the effect background image BP20 is displayed, the tilt angles of the objects OB1 to OB3 may be changed from the tilt angles when the sandy beach background image BP10 is displayed. can be changed individually.

Moreover, as a projection pattern for the teaching object and pattern object to be drawn in the sandy beach running effect, either parallel projection or perspective projection may be used. When performing parallel projection, the pattern images CP1 to CP3 and teaching images CP4 and CP5 can be displayed in an easy-to-view manner, while when performing perspective projection, the images CP1 to CP5 can be displayed stereoscopically. .

Alternatively, the projection pattern of the teaching object may be set to parallel projection, and the projection pattern of the design object may be perspective projection. In this case, it is possible to stereoscopically display the pattern images CP1 to CP3 related to the sandy beach running effect while displaying the teaching images CP4 and CP5 in an easy-to-view manner.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a configuration for performing a distortion effect and a blink effect as display effects is provided. Rendering processing is different from that of the first embodiment in accordance with the distortion effect. Below, the structure for performing each production|presentation is demonstrated. In addition, description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment.

<Regarding the configuration for performing distortion effects>
A configuration for performing a distortion effect will be described.

The distortion rendering is rendering in which a part of the background image is distorted when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, when an image depicting an underwater scene is displayed as a background image and a variable display of patterns scrolling in a specific direction is started, a part of the background image, more specifically, The pattern is displayed so as to be distorted in the area on the side opposite to the advancing direction of the pattern. As a result, it is assumed that the player perceives the distortion as refraction of light caused by the flow formed by the pattern starting to scroll. Therefore, it is possible to realistically recognize the scrolling of patterns in water.

A configuration used in the distortion rendering will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the object for refraction OB10, FIGS. 77(b) and 77(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the object for refraction OB10 is deformed, and FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining α data for refraction SKD1 applied to an object for refraction OB10;

As shown in FIG. 77(a), the refraction object OB10 is composed of a rectangular plate polygon. A plate polygon can also be called an object with a small number of polygons, and is low-resolution image data configured in a planar shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction (specifically, the Z direction in the local coordinate system).

The shape (size) of the refraction object OB10 is set so as to correspond to the distortion area PE1 in which distortion is to be generated. It is set up so that you can Specifically, the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set so that the display area when the refraction object OB10 is parallel-projected is larger than the distortion area PE1. Therefore, when parallel projection is performed with the refraction object OB10 placed so as to overlap the distortion area PE1, an image of the refraction object OB10 is displayed in the distortion area PE1. becomes.

Vertex coordinates are set in a grid pattern in the refraction object OB10. A local three-dimensional coordinate is set for the vertex coordinate, and the Z coordinate (coordinate in the depth direction) of each vertex coordinate is set to be the same.

The vertex coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set corresponding to the distortion area PE1. Specifically, the area formed by the vertex coordinates other than the vertex coordinates forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 is the distortion area PE1. They are set to be approximately the same.

The refraction object OB10 is configured to be deformable. Specifically, the Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate of the refraction object OB10 can be individually displaced, and the refraction object OB10 is distorted by displacing the Z coordinate.

A modified form of the refraction object OB10 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, a plurality of deformation modes are set for the refraction object OB10. The object for refraction OB10 of the first modification and the object for refraction OB10 of the second modification among the plurality of types of modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 77(b) and 77(c). FIG. 77(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the object for refraction OB10 of the first modification, and FIG. 77(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the object for refraction OB10 of the second modification. For convenience of explanation, in the following description, the refraction object OB10 in the first deformation mode is simply referred to as the first deformation mode OB10a, and the refraction object OB10 in the second deformation mode is simply referred to as the second deformation mode OB10b.

As shown in FIGS. 77(b) and 77(c), each of the deformation forms OB10a and OB10b is deformed such that unevenness is formed on the plate surface to which the texture is applied. Specifically, in each deformation form OB10a, OB10b, the Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate corresponding to the distortion area PE1 is displaced by a predetermined amount with respect to the Z coordinate of the vertex coordinate forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10. It is transformed by doing. Specifically, a sine wave of one cycle having a Z component having fixed ends at the vertex coordinates of both ends in the X direction is formed, and a circular arc having a starting point and an end point at the vertex coordinates of both ends in the Y direction is formed. The Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate included in the area PE1 is displaced. In each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b, the phases of the sine waves are shifted by π.

A distorted image is represented by mapping the texture of the portion of the background image corresponding to the area where each of the deformations OB10a and OB10b is arranged to each of these deformations OB10a and OB10b. In this case, the refraction object OB10 is alternately transformed into a first deformation form OB10a and a second deformation form OB10b having different phases in the X direction at each predetermined update timing, thereby advancing in the X direction. A distorted image corresponding to the flow of water can be expressed. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize as if a flow of water is formed in the X direction as the pattern is scrolled in the X direction, and the scrolling of the pattern and the distorted image can be appropriately associated.

Further, in the distortion effect, α data SKD1 for refraction is used in order to blend the distortion image displayed in the area where the object for refraction OB10 is arranged with the image of the periphery of that area. As already described, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of the image data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as image data.

As shown in FIG. 77(d), the size of the refraction α data SKD1 is set so that its outer shape matches the refraction object OB10 to which it is applied. The α data SKD1 for refraction is divided into a plurality of regions set with different α values.

The regions for dividing the refraction α data SKD1 are formed so that the transparency on the edge side is higher than the transparency on the center side. Specifically, the alpha data for refraction SKD1 is provided in the central region of the alpha data for refraction SKD1, and includes an opaque area SKA0 set with opacity information "1" and an area surrounding the opaque area SKA0. A first partial transmission area SKA1 in which partial transmission information (0<α1<1) is set, and a first partial transmission area SKA1 are provided so as to surround the first partial transmission area SKA1, and the transmittance is higher than that of the first partial transmission area SKA1. and a second partial transmission area SKA2 in which high partial transmission information (0<α2<α1) is set.

By applying the refraction α data SKD1 to the refraction object OB10 (including the first deformation OB10a and the second deformation OB10b), the refraction α data SKD1 is applied to each pixel included in the refraction object OB10. The α value contained in SKD1 is applied.

When the distorted image is superimposed on the image that overlaps on the far side of the display surface G, each dot involved in the superimposition has an α value determined by the refraction α data SKD1 and the refraction object OB10. Numerical information is fused (that is, blended) based on the set uniform α value. Specifically, if the α value set in the refraction α data SKD1 is the individual α value,
R: "R value of back side image" x ("1" - "individual α value" x "uniform α value") + "R value of distorted image" x "individual α value" x "uniform α value"
G: "G value of back side image" x ("1" - "individual α value" x "uniform α value") + "G value of distorted image" x "individual α value" x "uniform α value"
B: "B value of back side image" x ("1" - "individual α value" x "uniform α value") + "B value of distorted image" x "individual α value" x "uniform α value"
is calculated.

By applying the refraction α data SKD1, the distorted image gradually becomes transparent from the central region toward the edge side. As a result, the edge of the distorted image blends in with the background image, making the edge of the distorted image less noticeable.

Also, the distorted image is displayed in a state in which the α value is uniformly reflected. Specifically, when the uniform α value is small, the image on the far side of the distorted image is reflected. On the other hand, when the uniform α value is large, the distorted image is reflected more than the depth image.

A specific processing configuration of the distortion rendering will be described.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing a distortion rendering calculation process executed by the display CPU 131. FIG. The distortion effect calculation process is executed when the data table currently set in the effect calculation process of step S904 in the task process (FIG. 14) is a data table corresponding to the distortion effect.

First, in step S4501, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the distortion effect is being executed.

If the distortion effect is not being executed, the process advances to step S4502 to determine whether or not it is time to start the distortion effect based on the currently set data table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not information specifying the start timing of the distortion effect is set in the currently set data table. The start timing of the distortion effect is set to be the same as the symbol variation start timing. As a result, the distortion effect is executed when the symbol variation is started.

If it is not the start timing, this arithmetic processing is terminated as it is. Specifically, first, in step S4503, the refraction object OB10 is grasped. Then, in step S4504, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are initialized.

The coordinates are set in advance on the data table. Specifically, an area opposite to the scroll direction of the pattern image is set as the distortion area PE1, and the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set so as to overlap the distortion area PE1. ing. More specifically, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set so that the distortion area PE1 includes vertex coordinates other than the vertex coordinates forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 when the refraction object OB10 is projected. there is

Thereafter, in step S4505, "1", which is opaque information, is uniformly set as the α value. In subsequent step S4506, calculation processing of other parameters applied to the refraction object OB10 is performed.

Then, in step S4507, initial setting of the coordinate mapping data is performed. The coordinate mapping data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining coordinate mapping data. Specifically, FIG. 79(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first coordinate mapping data MD1, and FIG. 79(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second coordinate mapping data MD2.

Each of the coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2 is data used to determine the amount of displacement in the Z direction of each vertex coordinate forming the object for refraction OB10. In each of the coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2, the amount of displacement in the Z direction is set in one-to-one correspondence with each vertex of the refraction object OB10. Specifically, in accordance with the fact that 10 vertices in the X direction and 7 vertices in the Y direction of the object for refraction OB10 are set in a matrix, the upper left vertex of the vertices constituting the object for refraction OB10 Z(a, b) (a: 1 to 10, b: 1 to 7) is set in a matrix, where Z(1, 1) is the displacement amount in the Z direction applied to . For convenience of explanation, Z(a, b) set in the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is referred to as Z1(a, b), and Z2(a, b) set in the second coordinate mapping data MD2. Okay, let Z(a,b) denote both Z1(a,b) and Z2(a,b).

Z(a, b) is the amount of displacement in the Z direction based on the Z coordinate of each vertex forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10. Specifically, Z(1, b), Z(10, b), Z(a, 1), and Z(a, 7) corresponding to the vertices forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 are "0". are set, and displacement amounts corresponding to the deformation forms OB10a and OB10b are set to the other Z(x, y) (x: 2 to 9, y: 2 to 6).

Specifically, Z1(x, y) is set so that the refraction object OB10 transforms into the first deformation form OB10a. On the other hand, Z2(x, y) is set so that the refraction object OB10 transforms into the second deformation form OB10b.

In step S4507, a process of setting the address information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 in the drawing list is executed as initial setting. As a result, a drawing list is created in which the address information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set. Then, the VDP 135 acquires the first coordinate mapping data MD1 based on the address information, and displaces each vertex of the refraction object OB10 by the displacement amount of the Z coordinate corresponding to each vertex. , to transform the refraction object OB10 into the first deformation form OB10a.

In step S4507, the display CPU 131 executes processing for specifying which coordinate mapping data is currently set. Specifically, the work RAM 132 is provided with a specific storage area for storing information for specifying currently set coordinate mapping data. In step S4507, information corresponding to the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set in the specific storage area.

After executing the process of step S4507, the α data for refraction SKD1 is set in steps S4508 to S4510. Specifically, the refraction α data SKD1 is obtained in step S4508, and the coordinates of the refraction α data SKD1 are set to the same coordinates as the refraction object OB10 in step S4509. Then, in step S4510, other parameters applied to the refraction α data SKD1 are calculated.

After that, in step S4511, another effect object is grasped, and in step S4512, the parameters applied to the effect object are calculated.

In the following step S4513, distortion effect specifying information for specifying that the distortion effect is to be performed in the VDP 135 is set, and this calculation processing ends.

When such processing is executed, at least the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806). In this case, the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set to the same coordinates.

In addition, address information and distortion rendering designation information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 are set in the drawing list.

On the other hand, if the distortion effect is being executed (step S4501: YES), it is determined in step S4514 whether or not it is during the transparency period based on the currently set data table. Specifically, information for identifying the transparency period is set in the data table corresponding to the distortion effect. The transparency period is set to a period from the timing a plurality of frames (for example, 10 frames) before the end timing of the distortion effect to the end timing of the distortion effect. In step S4514, it is determined whether or not the information is set in the currently set data table.

If it is not during the transparency period, the refraction object OB10 is grasped in step S4515, and parameter calculation processing is executed in step S4516. In this case, the initialized parameters are maintained.

After that, in step S4517, a process of updating the deformation of the refraction object OB10, that is, a process of updating the coordinate mapping data is executed. Specifically, based on the information stored in the specific storage area, the coordinate mapping data set in the previous processing is grasped. Then, an address of coordinate mapping data different from the coordinate mapping data grasped in the previous processing is set, and information corresponding to the coordinate mapping data set this time is stored in the specific storage area. For example, when the first coordinate mapping data MD1 was set in the previous processing, the second coordinate mapping data MD2 is set, and when the second coordinate mapping data MD2 was set in the previous processing, Set the first coordinate mapping data MD1.

Then, the processing of steps S4508 to S4513 is executed, and this calculation processing ends.

When the above processing is executed, a drawing list is created in which at least the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set. In this case, the parameters applied to the refraction object OB10 and refraction α data SKD1 are maintained.

Further, in the drawing list created this time, the address of the coordinate mapping data different from the coordinate mapping data set in the drawing list created last time is set, and the distortion rendering designation information is set.

If it is during the transparency period (step S4514: YES), the refraction object OB10 is grasped in step S4518. Then, in step S4519, the α value is uniformly updated. Specifically, a process of uniformly subtracting a predetermined value (for example, 0.1) from the α value is executed.

Then, in step S4520, calculation processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S4521, update processing of coordinate mapping data is executed. Then, the processing of steps S4508 to S4513 is executed, and this calculation processing ends. Since these processes have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the above processing is executed, a drawing list is created in which the uniform α value applied to the refraction object OB10 is different. The uniform α value gradually decreases for each frame.

Here, the transparent period and the subtraction value of the uniform α value are set in association with each other. Specifically, the subtraction value and the transparency period are set so that the α value is uniformly “0” at the end timing of the distortion effect. Specifically, both are set so that the number of frames for the transparency period=1/subtraction value. As a result, the image pasted on the refraction object OB10 gradually disappears, and completely disappears at the end timing of the distortion rendering.

In the symbol calculation process (step S905) of the task process (FIG. 14), in synchronism with the start of the distortion effect, the process relating to the start of the variable display of the symbol is executed. Specifically, a process for scrolling each pattern image in a predetermined direction (leftward direction) is executed.

Next, drawing processing performed by the VDP 135 in this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG. The drawing process is a loop process that is periodically performed at a predetermined cycle, and more specifically, it is performed at a cycle shorter than the cycle (20 msec) at which the drawing list is created. In this case, the time required to execute the drawing process is set shorter than the receiving interval of the drawing list. As a result, a new drawing list is not received while the drawing process is being performed.

Further, the sum of the time required to execute the drawing process and the time from the creation of the drawing list to the reception of the drawing list is set to be shorter than the image update interval. This prevents a situation in which the drawing time is longer than the image update interval.

First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list has been received. If a new drawing list has not been received, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a new drawing list has been received, background drawing data (background image ).

Specifically, first, background setting processing is executed in step S4602. Then, the processes of steps S4603 to S4608 are executed for the backmost image and the background object grasped in step S4602. As a result, the drawing data for the background is created first and written to the buffer for the background.

After that, by executing the processing of steps S4609 to S4616, drawing data for effects and symbols are created. Then, in step S4617, drawing data synthesizing processing is executed, and the present drawing processing ends.

According to such a configuration, the background image is completed before the process for creating drawing data for effects and symbols is executed. As a result, the background image can be used when executing processing related to creation of rendering data for effects and symbols.

Next, setting processing for distortion effect will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 81 . The distortion effect setting process is executed in the effect setting process in step S4609 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

First, in step S4701, the refraction object OB10 set in the drawing list is grasped.

After that, in step S4702, based on the address information of the coordinate mapping data set in the drawing list, the coordinate mapping data to be applied this time is grasped. In the following step S4703, the refraction object OB10 is deformed using the coordinate mapping data grasped in step S4702.

Specifically, by referring to the coordinate mapping data, the amount of displacement in the Z direction corresponding to each vertex forming the object for refraction OB10 is grasped. Then, the Z coordinate of each vertex in the local coordinate system is displaced by the grasped displacement amount in the Z direction. As a result, the refraction object OB10 is transformed into the first deformation form OB10a or the second deformation form OB10b.

After that, in step S4704, various parameters to be applied to the second modified form OB10b are grasped. Then, in step S4705, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed for the first deformation form OB10a or the second deformation form OB10b, and the process advances to step S4706.

In step S4706, other objects for effect are grasped, and in step S4707, parameters to be applied to the object for effect are grasped. Then, in step S4708, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed for other effect objects, and this setting processing ends.

By executing the setting process as described above, the first deformation form OB10a or the second deformation form OB10b formed by deforming the refraction object OB10 is arranged in the world coordinate system.

Next, the distortion rendering texture mapping process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The distortion effect texture mapping process is executed in the color information setting process in step S4615 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

In the distortion effect texture mapping process, a part of the background image is used as a texture to be applied to the refraction object OB10 (specifically, one of the deformed forms OB10a and OB10b).

In step S4801, the background image set as the current rendering target is grasped. Specifically, the background drawing data written in the background buffer in step S4608 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) is grasped.

In subsequent step S4802, the background image grasped in step S4801 is used to create a texture to be pasted on the refraction object OB10. Specifically, by trimming the grasped background image, the image data of the area related to the refraction object OB10 in the background image, specifically the area corresponding to the area where the refraction object OB10 is projected, is obtained. Pull out. In this case, the size of the image data is extracted so as to be the same as the size of the refraction object OB10.

When trimming, the background drawing data itself written in the background buffer is not changed, and a separate buffer is used.

After that, in step S4803, the image data of the portion extracted in step S4802 is pasted as a texture to the object for refraction OB10 (first modified form OB10a or second modified form OB10b). In this case, the wrap mapping technique or the UV lapping technique is used.

After that, in step S4804, textures to be pasted to other objects are grasped based on the drawing list, and in step S4805 the textures are pasted to each object, and this processing ends.

According to such a configuration, a background image corresponding to the projection area of the refraction object OB10 is attached to the refraction object OB10. In this case, the background image of the distortion area PE1 corresponding to the projection area of the refraction object OB10 is distorted by projecting the refraction object OB10 in a state of being deformed into the first deformation form OB10a or the second deformation form OB10b. As a result, it is possible to express how the background image is partially distorted without providing a separate texture corresponding to the distortion.

Here, as already explained, the size of the texture pasted on the object for refraction OB10 and the size of the object for refraction OB10 are set to be the same. As a result, deterioration in the image quality of the distorted image that may occur due to the deformation of the refraction object OB10 is less noticeable than in the image quality of the image displayed in other areas.

It should be noted that drawing data is created by parallel projection in the drawing data creating process for drawing and design in step S4616 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) in the case of executing a distortion effect. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to set the size of the refraction object OB10 in consideration of the distance from the viewpoint, the size of the refraction object OB10 can be easily set.

However, the configuration is not limited to parallel projection and perspective projection may be used. In this case, the size of the object for refraction OB10 and the size of the object for refraction OB10 are determined in consideration of the distance from the viewpoint so that the projection area of the object for refraction OB10 corresponds to the distortion area PE1 when the object for refraction OB10 is projected. coordinates should be set.

Next, the fusion processing for distortion effect will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 83 . The distortion effect fusion process is executed in the drawing data synthesizing process (step S4617) of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect specifying information is set in the drawing list. For convenience of explanation, the unit area corresponding to the dots included in the area onto which the deformed refraction object OB10 is projected will be described in the frame buffer 142, and the unit area corresponding to the dots included in other areas will be described. The description of is omitted. Furthermore, it is assumed that the first target dot is predetermined.

First, in step S4901, numerical information of the target pixel corresponding to the current target dot among the dots included in the area where the object for refraction OB10 is projected is grasped based on the drawing data for rendering. The numerical information corresponds to the numerical information (assumed to be "m") of the distorted image.

Then, in step S4902, the individual α value corresponding to the current target dot is grasped based on the refraction α data SKD1, and in step S4903, it is applied to the refraction object OB10 based on the drawing list. Grasp the uniform α value.

In the following step S4904, numerical information of the target pixel corresponding to the current target dot in the background image is grasped based on the drawing data for the background. The numerical information corresponds to the numerical information (assumed to be "n") of the image on the far side.

Then, in step S4905, fusion processing (blending processing) is executed based on the grasped results grasped by the processing of steps S4901 to S4904, and the fusion result is transferred from each unit area in the frame buffer 142 to the current unit area. Write to the unit area corresponding to the target dot.

The above-described arithmetic expression is used in the fusion process. That is, n×(1−“individual α value”דuniform α value”)+mדindividual α value”דuniform α value” is calculated.

In the subsequent step S4906, it is determined whether or not the fusion processing has been completed for all dots included in the projection area of the refraction object OB10. If not completed, the process of updating the target dot is executed in step S4907, and the process returns to step S4901. As a result, the fusion process is executed for the new target dot. If completed, the fusion process is terminated.

By executing the above processing, the distortion image and the background image are fused. That is, when the uniform α value is “1”, a distorted image that becomes more transparent toward the outer edge is displayed. On the other hand, when the uniform α value is "0", the background image is displayed as it is.

Next, the state of the distortion rendering will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distortion effect, FIG. 84(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image before the distortion effect is started, and FIG. 84(b) is the first modified form OB10a. FIG. 84(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distorted image based on the second modified form OB10b. Due to the drawing, only a part of the display surface G is shown, and only the pattern image CP11 to be distorted and the two coral images CP12 as part of the background image showing the state of the sea are displayed. , a plurality of individual images and the backmost image are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), the symbol image CP11 is stopped and displayed before the distortion effect is started. In this case, coral is drawn in the distorted area PE1 on the display surface G, specifically, in the area (right side area) opposite to the scroll direction (leftward direction) of the pattern image CP11 with respect to the pattern image CP11. Two coral images CP12 are displayed side by side.

When the distortion effect is started, the pattern image CP11 is scrolled leftward. In this case, as shown in FIG. 84(b), a first distorted image CP15 in which an expanded coral image CP13 and a contracted coral image CP14 are drawn is displayed in the distorted area PE1. In this case, the expanded coral image CP13 is displayed on the pattern image CP11 side, and the contracted coral image CP14 is displayed on the opposite side.

In the next frame with respect to the start timing of the distortion effect, as shown in FIG. 8C, a second distorted image in which the positional relationship of the expanded coral image CP13 and the contracted coral image CP14 is reversed is displayed in the distorted area PE1. CP16 is displayed.

After that, the distorted images CP15 and CP16 are alternately displayed for each frame. As a result, the pattern image CP11 appears to sway due to the formation of the underwater flow in the area opposite to the direction in which the pattern image CP11 advances.

Then, based on the update of a predetermined number of frames after the start of scrolling (distortion effect) of the pattern image CP11, the distorted area PE1 is gradually replaced with the expanded coral image CP13 and the contracted coral image CP14. , the coral image CP12 is displayed.

As described above, when the symbol image CP11 is displayed in a variable manner, by alternately displaying the distorted images CP15 and CP16 in the distorted area PE1, a flow is formed in the water due to the scrolling of the symbol image CP11. You can make the background look like it's shaking. This makes it possible to more realistically express the scrolling of patterns in water.

In this case, the distorted images CP15 and CP16 were created by deforming the refraction object OB10 into the first deformed form OB10a or the second deformed form OB10b, and pasting a part of the background image as a texture to these forms. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a texture for expressing distortion, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to distort an image.

Also, the drawing data of the background image is created before executing the process for drawing the refraction object OB10, and the drawing data is used to create the texture to be applied to the refraction object OB10. As a result, since it is not necessary to prepare the texture to be pasted on the refraction object OB10 in advance, it is possible to further reduce the amount of texture data.

Specifically, various background objects are placed in the world coordinate system and drawn data to be distorted, that is, two-dimensional image data for the background are acquired by projecting them. After that, in a state where the refraction object OB10 is arranged and deformed, drawing data to be distorted is pasted as a texture onto the refraction object OB10 and projected. As a result, processing related to texture creation can be used as a part of drawing processing, so that the processing load can be reduced. In other words, an image created in the middle of drawing processing can be used as a texture.

Here, each unit area (pixel) of the texture stores numerical information for three colors as color information. Therefore, compared to coordinate mapping data in which only the amount of displacement in the Z direction is set, the amount of information tends to be large. In this regard, according to the above configuration, each of the distorted images CP15 and CP16 can be displayed using only coordinate mapping data with a relatively small amount of information. By comparison, the amount of data related to the distortion rendering can be reduced.

Further, when the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set so that the display area of the refraction object OB10 when projected in parallel is larger than the distortion area PE1, and when the refraction object OB10 is deformed, the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 is set. The configuration was such that the Z coordinate of the part was not changed. This makes it possible to avoid conspicuous boundaries between the image related to the refraction object OB10 and other images.

Furthermore, α data SKD1 for refraction is provided so that each of the strain images CP15 and CP16 becomes transparent toward the outer edge of each of the strain images CP15 and CP16. As a result, the boundary between the image related to the refraction object OB10 and other images can be made less conspicuous.

Then, when the distortion effect ends, the distortion images CP15 and CP16 are gradually made transparent. Thereby, when the distorted images CP15 and CP16 are changed to the coral image CP12, the change can be made inconspicuous.

In the above configuration, the scene in which the pattern image CP11 starts the variable display is set as the scene for expressing the distortion, but it is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, it may be used to express a shock wave generated by an object moving at high speed, or may be used to switch scenes or switch the pattern image CP11 to another pattern image. In this case, the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set according to the region (distortion region PE1) to be distorted.

In addition, the present invention can be applied not only to effects that express distortion, but also to display effects that change part or all of an image. For example, by changing the parameters applied to the refraction object OB10, the image may be partially enlarged or reduced, or may be rotated. Furthermore, part of the image displayed on the display surface G may be made transparent compared to other areas.

Furthermore, for example, a specific object that can display the entire display surface G when projected is provided, and the drawing data of the background image stored in the background buffer is pasted as it is to the specific object. Then, each time a predetermined update timing comes, the specific object is divided into a plurality of part objects, and the part objects are moved independently, thereby breaking the background image displayed on the display surface G. It is possible to produce a visual effect like this. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform scene switching and the like.

Further, according to the above configuration, the background image is trimmed so that the texture applied to the refraction object OB10 has the same size as the refraction object OB10. It is good also as a structure trimmed so that it may become. In this case, the enlargement or reduction process should be executed according to the size of the refraction object OB10. As a result, the image pasted on the refraction object OB10 is distorted by the enlargement or reduction processing, so that the distorted image can be further distorted. However, in the case of the above configuration, the boundary between the distorted image and the other image is likely to stand out.

Further, the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set so that the display area when the object for refraction OB10 is parallel-projected is larger than the distortion area PE1. The shape of the refraction object OB10 may be set to match. In this case, when the object for refraction OB10 is deformed, it is preferable that the vertex coordinates forming the outer edge of the object for refraction OB10 are also displaced.

Further, in the above configuration, the first coordinate mapping data MD1 and the second coordinate mapping data MD2 are alternately used to make the background image look like it fluctuates. It is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation which becomes or becomes small, and the production|presentation which combined these production|presentations.

In the above configuration, the target of distortion is a part of the background image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the entire background image may be distorted. In this case, a refraction object capable of covering the entire display surface G is provided, and the drawing data of the background image stored in the background buffer is pasted to the refraction object as it is.

Moreover, not only the background image, but also a pattern image, a predetermined character image, or an image itself displayed on the display surface G may be distorted in whole or in part. In this case, drawing data for an image including an object to be distorted is created in advance before executing the processing for drawing the refraction object, and the processing for drawing the refraction object is performed based on the drawing data. A texture to be pasted on the refraction object may be created and pasted.

In the above configuration, the deformation of the object for refraction OB10 is realized by using the coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2. The refraction object OB10 may be deformed by deriving the Z-direction displacement amount of each vertex based on the four-dimensional function. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the amount of data related to the distortion effect. However, in view of the increased processing load of the VDP 135 and the complexity of the function due to high-definition distortion, the configuration using each of the coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2 is preferable.

In the above configuration, the object for refraction OB10 is deformed by displacing the Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate so that unevenness is formed on the plate surface of the object for refraction OB10. At least one of the coordinate and the Y coordinate may be displaced. In this case, it is preferable to set the XY coordinates of each vertex such that each vertex arranged in a grid pattern forms a vortex. This makes it possible to express a distorted image by pasting textures corresponding to each vertex. However, from the viewpoint of the processing load, it is better to use only displacement in the Z direction.

In the above configuration, drawing data for the background (two-dimensional image data) is created first, and then drawing data for effects and patterns is created. As in the form of , each drawing data may be created by arranging each object for background, effect and design in the world coordinate system and projecting each object. In this case, it is preferable that the drawing process is executed twice. Specifically, each drawing data is created by arranging and projecting each object except the refraction object OB10 in the first time, and each drawing data is created by arranging and projecting each object including the refraction object OB10 in the second time. to create In this case, in the second drawing process, the background drawing data created in the first drawing process is used to create a texture to be pasted on the refraction object OB10. Thereby, part of the background image can be used as a texture. However, in the case of the above configuration, since it is necessary to perform the same processing redundantly, there is concern that wasteful processing will increase and the processing load will increase. Focusing on this point, it is better to create the drawing data for the effect and the design after creating the drawing data for the background first.

Further, the configuration may be such that the image to be deformed is updated. For example, the distorted area PE1 may be sequentially scrolled as the pattern image CP11 is scrolled. In this case, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are updated at predetermined update timings (for example, each frame), and the area to be trimmed in the trimming process (step S4802) in the distortion rendering mapping process (FIG. 82) is changed to the refraction object OB10. It is preferable to change them according to the coordinates of OB10. As a result, it is possible to appropriately cope with the displacement of the distorted region PE1 without causing an increase in the amount of data.

Alternatively, the background image may be displaced while the distorted region PE1 is fixed. Even in this case, the background drawing data related to the background image is generated for each frame, and the texture to be pasted on the refraction object OB10 is generated using the background drawing data for each frame. Therefore, the displaced background image can be distorted.

Note that scrolling of the background image in a predetermined direction can be considered as the displacement of the background image. The scrolling can be realized by moving an object forming the background image or moving the viewpoint.

Also, the configuration of processing a part of an image to produce a display effect may be applied to a configuration related to two-dimensional display. Specifically, a plurality of types of sprite data are stored in the memory module 133, and drawing data for a predetermined image is generated using the sprite data. Then, the drawing data may be stored in a temporary buffer provided in the frame buffer 142, a part of the drawing data may be extracted, and the extracted data may be treated as sprite data. As a result, it is possible to perform a display effect such as enlarging or reducing a part of the image related to the drawing data or moving it in a predetermined direction.

Furthermore, by superimposing the extracted data on another sprite data, it is possible to overwrite the image related to the extracted data.

Also, the texture to be pasted onto the refraction object OB10 was created by projection, but is not limited to this, and may be stored in the memory module 133 in advance, for example. However, if attention is paid to an increase in the amount of texture data, it is better to create a structure by projection.

Further, although the refraction object OB10 is a plate-like polygon, it is not limited to this, and polygons of any shape may be used. However, from the viewpoint of the processing load, it is better to use a plate-shaped polygon.

In the above configuration, the deformation of the refraction object OB10 is expressed by alternately switching between the first deformation OB10a and the second deformation OB10b. may be provided, and each refraction object OB10 may be transformed into a first deformation mode OB10a and a second deformation mode OB10b, and the two may be connected at the short side. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the linked items are scrolled in a predetermined direction. Even in this case, it is possible to preferably display a wavering image.

<About the configuration for blinking>
Next, a configuration for performing a blink effect will be described.

The blink effect is a effect in which a predetermined character image blinks.

The blink effect uses a base object OB21 and base texture TD11 used to display a predetermined character image, and a partial object OB22 and partial texture TD12 used to change the eye portion. Each of these configurations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22, FIG. 85(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base texture TD11, and FIG. 85(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the partial texture TD12. It is an explanatory diagram for. In order to explain the relationship between the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22, FIG. 85(a) shows the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22 superimposed, and the partial object OB22 is indicated by a dotted line. Furthermore, in order to explain the relationship between the base texture TD11 and the partial texture TD12, the outline of the partial texture TD12 is indicated by dotted lines in FIG. 85(b).

As shown in FIG. 85(a), the base object OB21 is a unit object composed of a plurality of part objects, and by updating the parameters applied to each part object, the character in the 3D image can be moved or changed. can give.

Also, in the base object OB21, a base texture TD11 is set as a texture to be pasted on the head object OB31 corresponding to the head of the character. The base texture TD11 is image data in which a face is drawn, as shown in FIG. 85(b). The base texture TD11 is set as rectangular image data corresponding to the head object OB31. Specifically, the base texture TD11 is set so as to correspond to the image data when the three-dimensional head object OB31 is developed two-dimensionally. number is set. A face is expressed by pasting the base texture TD11 on the head object OB31.

As for the hairstyle, a hairstyle object OB32 is provided separately from the head object OB31, and a hairstyle texture to be attached to the hairstyle object OB32 is provided. The hairstyle is expressed using these, and the character's head is expressed by overlapping the hairstyle object OB32 and the head object OB31.

Also, although the base texture TD11 is set as rectangular image data, it is not limited to this, and may be set as image data having a different shape according to the shape of the head object OB31.

The shape and size of the partial object OB22 are set so that the partial object OB22 can cover the eye display area of the base object OB21 when projected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the partial object OB22 is composed of a rectangular plate-shaped polygon having the same shape as the area where the eye is displayed in the base object OB21. As a result, the base object OB21 is placed in the world coordinate system, and the partial object OB22 is placed between the viewpoint and the base object OB21 and overlapping the area where the eye is displayed in the base object OB21. , the image of the partial object OB22 is displayed instead of the eyes of the base texture TD11. In this case, a character image with eyes different in appearance is displayed by pasting a texture different in appearance from the eyes of the base texture TD11 to the partial object OB22.

A plurality of types (specifically, three types) of partial textures TD12 are provided as textures to be pasted onto the partial object OB22.

Regarding the partial texture TD12, the size of the partial texture TD12 is set to be the same as that of the partial object OB22. is set. Therefore, the partial texture TD12 is attached to the partial object OB22 without being deformed.

In this case, the number of pixels of the base texture TD11 is set corresponding to the size of the entire head object OB31, and the number of pixels of the partial texture TD12 is set corresponding to the eye portion of the head object OB31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the partial texture TD12 is smaller in size than the base texture TD11, and has image data with a smaller amount of data.

The partial texture TD12 includes a first partial texture TD21 (see FIG. 85(c-1)), which is image data with the eyes open, and image data in an intermediate state between the open and closed eyes. (see FIG. 85(c-2)) and a third partial texture TD23 (see FIG. 85(c-3)) in which the eyes are closed. The first partial texture TD21 is a texture in which the same image as the eye portion of the base texture TD11 is drawn.

By sequentially switching the texture to be applied to the partial object OB22 in the order of the first partial texture TD21→second partial texture TD22→third partial texture TD23→second partial texture TD22→first partial texture TD21, blinking is achieved. can be expressed.

A specific processing configuration of the blink effect will be described.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the blink effect arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 . The blink effect calculation process is started when the currently set data table corresponds to the blink effect in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14).

First, in step S5001, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not blinking effect is being performed.

If the blinking effect is not being executed, the process advances to step S5002 to determine whether it is time to start the blinking effect based on the currently set data table.

If it is not the blinking effect start timing, this arithmetic processing is terminated as it is. Then, in step S5004, address information of various textures to be pasted on the base object OB21 including the base texture TD11 is set.

After that, in step S5005, arithmetic processing related to initial setting of other parameters applied to the base object OB21 is performed.

In the subsequent step S5006, the partial object OB22 is grasped. Then, in step S5007, the initial coordinates of the partial object OB22 are set. The initial coordinates are set in the data table in advance. It is set to be placed so that it overlaps the area where the eyes are displayed.

After that, in step S5008, initial setting of the address information of the partial texture TD12 is performed. Specifically, the address information of the first partial texture TD21 is set. Then, in step S5009, arithmetic processing related to initial setting of other parameters is executed.

After that, in step S5010, blinking effect specifying information is set in the drawing list, and this arithmetic processing ends. The blink effect specifying information is information used to specify that the VDP 135 executes drawing processing related to the blink effect.

When this process is executed, the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22 are set as drawing targets in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process, and the parameters corresponding to the respective objects OB21 and OB22 are set. set. In this case, the respective objects OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21, OB21 The coordinates of OB22 are set. In addition, blinking effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

On the other hand, if the blinking effect is being performed, the processing related to the setting of the base object OB21 is executed in steps S5011 to S5013. Specifically, in step S5011, the base object OB21 is grasped, and in step S5012, addresses of various textures are set. Then, in step S5013, other parameters are calculated. In this case, a process of maintaining various parameters that have been initialized is executed.

After that, in steps S5014 to S5018, processing for setting the partial object OB22 is executed. Specifically, first, the partial object OB22 is grasped in step S5014. Then, in step S5015, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the partial texture TD12. Specifically, information for specifying the update timing of the partial texture TD12 for each predetermined number of frames is set in the data table corresponding to the blink effect. In step S5015, it is determined whether or not the above information is set.

If it is not the update timing of the partial texture TD12, the process advances to step S5016 to set the address information of the previous partial texture TD12. Then, in step S5017, calculation processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S5010, blink effect specifying information is set, and this calculation processing ends.

When such processing is executed, the same drawing list as the previous drawing list is created in the subsequent drawing list output processing.

On the other hand, if it is time to update the partial texture TD12, the process advances to step S5018 to execute processing for setting the address information of the next partial texture for the previous partial texture. Specifically, the order of the partial textures TD21 to TD23 to be applied to the partial object OB22 is set in advance in the data table corresponding to the blink effect. Specifically, one period is set as the first partial texture TD21→the second partial texture TD22→the third partial texture→the second partial texture TD22. In step S5018, based on the cycle, the next partial texture is grasped for the partial texture set in the previous drawing list, and the process of setting the address corresponding to the next partial texture is executed.

Then, the processing of steps S5017 and S5010 is executed, and this arithmetic processing ends.

When such processing is executed, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing has a different partial texture TD12 pasted to the partial object OB22 compared to the previously created drawing list. .

When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list in which the blink effect designation information is set, the VDP 135 sets the world coordinate system based on the coordinates set in each of the objects OB21 and OB22. Various textures including the base texture TD11 are mapped to the base object OB21, and the partial texture TD12 currently set in the drawing list is mapped to the partial object OB22 to create drawing data for effects and patterns. , the respective objects OB21 and OB22 are parallel-projected to create drawing data. As a result, a character image is created in which the eye portion is replaced with the image of the partial texture TD12.

In this case, the partial texture TD12 different from the previous drawing list is set in the drawing list related to the update timing of the partial texture TD12. As a result, character images with different eye patterns are displayed.

Next, the state of the blink effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87A and 87B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the blinking effect. Specifically, FIG. 87A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image displayed on the display surface G at the start timing of the blinking effect. 87(b) and 87(c) are explanatory diagrams showing changes in the display mode of the character image CP22 in chronological order. For convenience of explanation, images other than the character image CP22 are omitted, but in reality, a background image, a pattern image, and the like are displayed.

When the blink effect is started, as shown in FIG. 87(a), a character image CP22 having a base image CP21 created using various textures including the base object OB21 and the base texture TD11 is displayed. In this case, the first partial image CP23 created using the partial object OB22 and the first partial texture TD21 is displayed in the overlapping area PE2 (specifically, the eye area) in the base image CP21.

As already described, the image of the eye drawn on the first partial texture TD21 is the same as the image of the eye in the base image CP21, so the same image as the base image CP21 is actually displayed. becomes.

After that, based on the update timing of the partial texture TD12, as shown in FIG. Image CP24 is displayed.

Then, based on the next update timing, a third partial image CP25 created using the partial object OB22 and the third partial texture TD23 is displayed in the overlapping area PE2 as shown in FIG. is displayed.

As described above, by updating in the order of the first partial image CP23, the second partial image CP24, and the third partial image CP25, a state in which the eyes gradually close is expressed.

Thereafter, the second partial image CP24→the first partial image CP23 is displayed in the superimposition area PE2 each time the update timing comes.

That is, the character image CP22 is updated repeatedly in the order of the first partial image CP23→second partial image CP24→third partial image CP25→second partial image CP24→first partial image CP23→ . It looks like he's blinking.

As described above, by locally arranging the partial object OB22 with respect to the eye portion of the character image CP22 and updating the partial texture TD12 pasted on the partial object OB22 each time a predetermined update timing is reached, The blink of the character image CP22 can be expressed. In this case, since the partial texture TD12 is a texture of a partial area of the base texture TD11, the data amount is smaller than that of the base texture TD11. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to perform the blink effect, compared to a configuration in which a plurality of base textures TD11 are prepared.

That is, the base image CP21 is divided into portions to be changed and portions not to be changed, textures corresponding to only the portions to be changed are provided, and the textures and the base image CP21 are used to perform the motion of the character image. It was configured to express This eliminates the need to prepare a plurality of textures for the entire base image CP21, that is, the base textures TD11. Therefore, it is possible to partially change the specific character image while reducing the amount of data.

In this case, for example, the head object OB31 is divided into an eye object corresponding to the eye portion, a first object corresponding to the portion below the eye, and a second object corresponding to the portion above the eye. Alternatively, a configuration is also conceivable in which blinking is expressed by changing the texture applied to the eye object. However, in such a configuration, the number of objects to be drawn increases due to the division of the head object OB31, and the number of vertices to be grasped increases. Therefore, there is concern about an increase in processing load.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, blinking can be achieved with one head object OB31 and one partial object OB22, which is a plate-like polygon with a relatively low processing load for rendering. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load required for performing the blink effect.

Note that blinking has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a case where a part of an individual image of one unit is changed. Specifically, a partial object may be arranged so as to overlap the area to be changed, and a partial texture corresponding to the partial image after the change to be displayed in the area may be pasted on the partial object. For example, the present invention can be applied to change the mouth or partially change the pattern of clothes.

Further, when performing the blink effect, the first partial texture TD21 that is the same as the eye image of the base image CP21 is prepared, and the first partial image CP23 is displayed using the first partial texture TD21. , the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the first partial texture TD21 is not prepared may be employed. As a result, it is possible to suitably reduce the amount of data required for the blink effect. In this case, information for identifying the period in which the base image CP21 is displayed as it is is set in the data table corresponding to the blink effect, and whether or not it is during the period is determined after the processing of step S5013 is executed. Execute the judgment process. If it is determined in the determination process that it is time to display the base image CP21 as it is, this calculation process is terminated without executing the process related to the setting of the partial object OB22 (steps S5014 to S5017). . On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period for displaying the base image CP21 as it is, the configuration may be such that the processing related to the setting of the partial object OB22 is executed. This makes it possible to use part of the base image CP21 to perform a blink effect. However, if attention is paid to the fact that the processing load of the calculation processing for blink effect increases by the processing load related to the determination processing, it is better to prepare the first partial texture TD21 in advance.

In particular, in general, periodic processing must be designed so that processing does not drop even when the maximum load is applied. For this reason, in the case of the above configuration, it is necessary to design so that even if the determination process and the process related to the setting of the partial object OB22 are executed, the process will not fail. On the other hand, in the case of the configuration in which the first partial texture TD21 is prepared, the determination process described above is not necessary, and a margin can be provided accordingly. As a result, it is possible to strike a balance between reducing the amount of texture data required for the blink effect and suppressing an increase in the processing load due to the blink effect.

Although the second partial texture TD22 indicating the state of the blinking halfway state is provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a partial texture of the intermediate state is created based on the first partial texture TD21 and the third partial texture TD23. may be configured. In this case, since it is not necessary to prepare image data for the partial texture of the intermediate mode, it is possible to reduce the amount of data. However, considering the processing load associated with the creation of the partial texture of the intermediate mode, it is preferable to prepare the partial texture of the intermediate mode in advance.

In the above configuration, the partial object OB22 is provided, and the positional relationship between the partial object OB22 and the base object OB21 is set so that the partial object OB22 overlaps with the base object OB21, thereby realizing the blink effect. A configuration without the OB 22 may be employed. In this case, the partial texture TD12 may be directly overwritten on the eye area of the head object OB31. Specifically, the UV coordinates of the partial texture TD12 are set in association with the vertices corresponding to the eye area of the head object OB31 to which the base texture TD11 is pasted, and the partial texture TD12 is pasted to the eye area. Execute the attaching process. However, since the partial object OB22 is a plate polygon, the number of vertices forming the partial object OB22 is likely to be smaller than the number of vertices forming the eye region of the head object OB31. For this reason, the configuration in which the partial object OB22 is used to create the blink effect tends to reduce the processing load associated with mapping.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of textures are provided for the hairstyle object OB32, and the texture to be attached to the hairstyle object OB32 is switched according to the scene.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above embodiments.

(1) A configuration in which the image data necessary for creating the drawing data is not read out from the memory module 133 at the timing when it is needed, but is read out to the VRAM 134 in advance before the timing at which it is needed. may be By performing such pre-reading, it is possible to suitably create drawing data. In particular, when a NAND flash memory is used as the memory module 133, the time required for reading tends to be longer than that of a NOR flash memory. Therefore, the pre-reading configuration is applied to such a configuration. Then it is effective. In addition to or in place of the image data used in the VDP 135, the configuration may be such that programs and data used in the display CPU 131 are read in advance.

(2) A performance buffer into which rendering data is written and a design buffer into which design drawing data is written are separately provided. The drawing data written in the buffer, the drawing data written in the rendering buffer, and the drawing data written in the design drawing data may be synthesized. In place of this, there are a buffer for creating drawing data for the first effect and a buffer for creating drawing data for the second effect, and the drawing data for the first effect is for the background. The drawing data may be synthesized such that the drawing data for the second effect exists between the drawing data for the second effect and the drawing data for the pattern, and the drawing data for the second effect exists in the foreground.

(3) The camera (viewpoint) is configured to be set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system. A configuration in which cameras are set in common may be adopted.

(4) The image data arranged in the world coordinate system was configured to be projected in units of the background image, effect image, and pattern image, but may be configured to be collectively projected in units of the background image and effect image. , the effect image and the symbol image may be collectively projected, or all may be collectively projected.

(5) Reserved information relating to winning to the upper working port 23 and reserved information relating to winning to the lower working port 24 are stored separately, and the reserved information relating to winning to the lower working port 24 is preferentially stored. You may apply the structure which is digested, and conversely, the structure which preferentially digests the pending|holding information which concerns on the prize-winning to the upper operation|movement opening 23 may be applied.

In the above configuration, the first working port corresponding to the upper working port 23 and the second working port corresponding to the lower working port 24 are arranged side by side instead of vertically arranging the plurality of working ports. A configuration in which they are arranged side by side may be employed, or a configuration in which both of these operating ports are arranged side by side obliquely may be employed. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the shooting handle 41, both working openings may be spaced apart so that only winning in the first working opening or only winning in the second working opening can be aimed.

Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 33 has a first display area for displaying the result of the validity determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 23, and the acquisition based on the winning to the lower operating port 24 A second display area may be provided for displaying the result of the validity determination of the reserved information. In this case, prior to the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the upper operation port 23 becoming the target of the winning judgment, or based on the winning judgment being made, the pattern is displayed in the first display area. is started, the stop result corresponding to the win/loss determination is displayed, and the variation display for one game round is terminated. In addition, prior to the pending information acquired based on the winning of the lower opening 24 becoming the target of the winning judgment, or based on the winning judgment, the pattern fluctuation display is displayed in the second display area. As soon as it is started, the stop result corresponding to the win/loss determination is displayed, and the variation display for one game round is terminated.

(6) When the pending information related to the winning to the upper operating port 23 is the target of the winning judgment and the case of the pending information related to the winning to the lower operating port 24 becomes the target of the winning judgment, the player It is good also as a structure from which the profit obtained differs. Moreover, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in each of the above embodiments, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, a configuration in which only one operating port is provided may be employed.

(7) Based on a command output from the main controller 50, instead of controlling the display control devices 70 and 130 by the sound emission control device 60, based on the command output from the main controller 50, The display control devices 70 and 130 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 60 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be employed. may be integrated in the main controller 50, or both functions of both controllers may be integrated in the main controller 50. Also, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 is arbitrary.

(8) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, has a plurality of reels as a plurality of revolving bodies on which a plurality of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, and the rotation of the reel is started and stopped by inserting medals and operating the start lever. After the reels are stopped by operating a switch, a slot that gives a player a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window. The invention can also be applied to machines. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine. can be applied.

Also, a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which are provided with a take-in device and start rotating the reels by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) and a predetermined update timing comes, display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of an image;
with
In the gaming machine, wherein the data generating means generates the generated data based on using image data and applying parameter data that determines a display mode of an image based on the image data,
The data generation means is
Derivation means for deriving the parameter data applied when an image group including a plurality of individual images is displayed on the display unit (the function of executing the processing of steps S2204, S2208 and S2212 in the VDP 135, or step S2305 in the VDP 135 , step S2310, step S2317), and
The parameter data derived by the deriving means is applied to the specific image data (the particle dispersion object PC17), and the specific image data is used to generate data for displaying the image group on the display unit. Image group means (function for executing the processing of steps S2206, S2210 and S2214 in the VDP 135, or function for executing the processing of steps S2307, S2313 and S2319 in the VDP 135) that enables generation;
with
The derivation means provides first parameter data (e.g., first key data KD1) to be applied when the image group is displayed at a first update timing, and a second update timing after the first update timing. using second parameter data (e.g., second key data KD2) applied when the image group is displayed by using A gaming machine characterized by comprising specific derivation means for deriving specific parameter data to be applied when displaying (a function of executing the processing of step S2208 in the VDP 135 or a function of executing the processing of step S2310 in the VDP 135). .

According to the feature A1, by displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images, it is possible to complicate the display content and increase the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit. Become.

In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data is not required to be stored in advance, the data capacity can be reduced, and furthermore, it is possible to ensure continuity with respect to each of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying the plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing are the first parameter data and the second parameter data as the specific parameter data. It is derived collectively using data. As a result, parameter data to be referred to in deriving parameter data among a plurality of individual images included in the image group correspond to the same update timing. Therefore, the processing load for deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A2. The group of images includes a first individual image (for example, a single particle image PT1) and a second individual image (for example, a single particle image PT2),
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The specific derivation means uses the first parameter data and the second parameter data to apply parameter data when displaying the first individual image and when displaying the second individual image. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the specific parameter data including the parameter data to be obtained is derived.

According to feature A2, each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data includes parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group. Become. Accordingly, in a configuration in which parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in an image group at update timings between the first update timing and the second update timing are collectively derived as specific parameter data, the time When changing the display mode of the first individual image and the second individual image with the progress of , it is possible to make the changing mode correspond to each individual image.

Feature A3. The game according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the specific derivation means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at a predetermined ratio. machine.

According to feature A3, it is possible to derive the specific parameter data while using the first parameter data and the second parameter data as they are.

Feature A4. The group of images includes a first individual image and a second individual image,
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The specific derivation means is
Using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, first specific parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and second specific parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image 2 specific parameter data and deriving the specific parameter data,
Further, in the case of deriving the specific parameter data at a specific update timing, the predetermined ratio in deriving the first specific parameter data and the predetermined ratio in deriving the second specific parameter data. is the same as the gaming machine according to feature A3.

According to feature A4, the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data each include parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and second individual image included in the image group. Become. Accordingly, in a configuration in which parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in an image group at update timings between the first update timing and the second update timing are collectively derived as specific parameter data, the time When the display modes of the first individual image and the second individual image are changed with the progress of , the changing mode can be made to correspond to each individual image.

Further, in the configuration for deriving the specific parameter data so as to include each parameter data corresponding to each individual image, a predetermined ratio used when deriving the first specific parameter data corresponding to the first individual image; The predetermined ratio used when deriving the second specific parameter data corresponding to the second individual image is the same. This makes it possible to use the information of the predetermined ratio in common, thereby reducing the processing load compared to a configuration in which the predetermined ratios are different.

Feature A5. Between the first update timing and the second update timing, there are a plurality of update timings at which the display mode of the group of images is changed,
The specific derivation means performs the first parameter data and the second parameter data at each of a plurality of update timings at which the display mode of the image group is changed between the first update timing and the second update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the specific parameter data is derived using data.

According to the feature A5, the specific parameter data are individually generated at each update timing instead of using the same specific parameter data at each of the plurality of update timings included between the first update timing and the second update timing. is derived, it is possible to derive the parameter data so as to gradually approach the second parameter data from the first parameter data. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the image group as a series.

In addition, since the parameter data used at each of the plurality of update timings is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the data capacity is larger than that of a configuration in which the parameter data are stored in advance. will be reduced. Furthermore, since each of the plurality of parameter data is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the type of parameter data to be referred to when deriving the plurality of parameter data is changed. no need arises. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature A6. The specific derivation means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at a predetermined ratio,
The data generation means is configured to determine the ratio determination means for determining the predetermined ratio when blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at each of the plurality of update timings (the processing of step S2109 in the display CPU 131). or a function to execute the processing of step S2309 in the VDP 135),
The ratio determination means determines the amount of change in the predetermined ratio when one update timing becomes the next update timing among the plurality of update timings, and the amount of change in the predetermined ratio when the next update timing occurs after the next update timing. The game machine according to feature A5, wherein the determination is made so that the amount of change of the predetermined ratio of is the same.

According to feature A6, at each of the plurality of update timings between the first update timing and the second update timing, it is only necessary to change the predetermined ratio by a constant amount of change, so the predetermined ratio is changed. The simplification of the above configuration is achieved.

Feature A7. Rendering instruction means (display CPU 131) for outputting rendering instruction information (drawing list) including at least information designating image data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing and parameter data to be applied to the image data. ,
The display control means causes the image to be displayed according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction means,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the display control means has the specific derivation means.

According to feature A7, since there is no need to derive the specific parameter data on the drawing instruction means side, the processing load on the drawing instruction means can be reduced.

Feature A8. Any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data include coordinate information for determining a position where the group of images is displayed. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A8, it is possible to display an image in which the position of each individual image included in the image group changes while exhibiting the excellent effects already described.

Feature A9. The coordinate information corresponding to the specific parameter data is such that the position of each individual image included in the image group is on a virtual straight line connecting the position determined by the first parameter data and the position determined by the second parameter data. The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized in that the information is coordinate information for

According to feature A9, when displaying an image group as if it were moving from a position determined by the first parameter data to a position determined by the second parameter data, the image group is displayed so as to move on a straight line connecting those positions. Since it is only necessary to derive the specific parameter data by using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the processing load for deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A10. The game according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the derivation means derives the first parameter data and the second parameter data by reading them from storage means (memory module 133). machine.

According to feature A10, it is only necessary to read and use the first parameter data at the first update timing, and to read and use the second parameter data at the second update timing. be done. On the other hand, at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing, the specific parameter data may be derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, so the parameter data is stored accordingly. The amount of data to store can be reduced. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to perform display using a group of images while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature A11. The data generation means includes placement means (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135) for placing image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. A viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and based on the data projected onto the projection plane drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data by
The specific image data corresponds to image data of an object, and each of the plurality of individual images included in the image group corresponds to each vertex data of the image data of the object. The game machine according to any one of A1 to A10.

According to feature A11, in a configuration that enables realistic image display using three-dimensional information, when displaying a group of images, it is sufficient to arrange one object in a virtual three-dimensional space, thereby reducing the processing load. It is possible to display a group of images while

Feature A12. The arrangement means sends drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information designating image data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing and parameter data to be applied to the image data to the drawing instruction means (display CPU 131). ), it is possible to generate generated data corresponding to the drawing instruction information by arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the information indicated by the drawing instruction information. and
When the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction means includes use instruction information of the specific image data in the drawing instruction information,
The arranging means arranges the specific image data in the virtual three-dimensional space when the drawing instruction information includes use instruction information for the specific image data, thereby generating data for displaying the image group. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that it enables generation.

According to the feature A12, when the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction means only needs to include the use instruction information for one object in the drawing instruction information. Therefore, the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. In addition, the data capacity of the drawing instruction information can be reduced.

Feature A13. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is 3D information, in a virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual 3D space (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135); and projecting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. ), and data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151 and rendering section 152) having a drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) to generate data generated by a storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on display means (symbol display device 31);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means is a derivation means for deriving parameter data applied when an image group including a plurality of individual images is displayed on the display unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S2204, S2208 and S2212 in the VDP 135, or step S2305, step S2310, step S2317) in VDP 135,
The arranging means displays the group of images on the display unit based on using the specific image data (particle dispersion object PC17) in a state in which the parameter data derived by the deriving means is applied to the specific image data. Image group means (function for executing the processing of steps S2206, S2210 and S2214 in the VDP 135, or function of executing the processing of steps S2307, S2313 and S2319 in the VDP 135) that enables generation of generation data to be displayed and,
with
The derivation means provides first parameter data (e.g., first key data KD1) to be applied when the image group is displayed at a first update timing, and a second update timing after the first update timing. using second parameter data (e.g., second key data KD2) applied when the image group is displayed by using A gaming machine characterized by comprising specific derivation means for deriving specific parameter data to be applied when displaying (a function of executing the processing of step S2208 in the VDP 135 or a function of executing the processing of step S2310 in the VDP 135). .

According to the feature A13, it is possible to display a realistic image using three-dimensional information, and furthermore, it is possible to complicate the display content by displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit.

In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data is not required to be stored in advance, the data capacity can be reduced, and furthermore, it is possible to ensure continuity with respect to each of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying the plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing are the first parameter data and the second parameter data as the specific parameter data. It is derived collectively using data. As a result, parameter data to be referred to in deriving parameter data among a plurality of individual images included in the image group correspond to the same update timing. Therefore, the processing load for deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A14. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is 3D information, in a virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual 3D space (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135); and projecting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane. Generated data (drawing data) generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151 and rendering unit 152) having drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) a storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on display means (symbol display device 31);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means is configured to simultaneously display an image group including a plurality of individual images by using specific generated data,
The image data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means for displaying the image group is such that each of the plurality of individual images included in the image group is associated with each vertex data. A game machine characterized by being image data of an object (particle dispersion object PC 17).

According to feature A14, realistic image display using three-dimensional information is possible. In this case, when displaying the image group, it is only necessary to arrange one object in the virtual three-dimensional space. Therefore, it is possible to display the image group while reducing the processing load.

Feature A15. The arrangement means sends drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information designating image data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing and parameter data to be applied to the image data to the drawing instruction means (display CPU 131). ), it is possible to generate generated data corresponding to the drawing instruction information by arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the information indicated by the drawing instruction information. and
The drawing instruction means includes use instruction information of image data of the specific object in the drawing instruction information when displaying the image group,
The arranging means displays the image group by arranging the image data of the specific object in the virtual three-dimensional space when the drawing instruction information includes use instruction information of the image data of the specific object. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that it is capable of generating generation data that causes a game to be played.

According to feature A15, when displaying an image group, the drawing instruction means only needs to include use instruction information about one object in the drawing instruction information. Therefore, the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. In addition, the data capacity of the drawing instruction information can be reduced.

The invention of the above characteristic group A is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data, the image data memory stores image data for displaying the background and image data for displaying characters and the like. It is Further, by reading the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in storage means such as a VRAM. By outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, polygons, which are three-dimensional image data, are set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and textures, which are two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, are pasted on the polygons. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

Here, by making the display direction of the individual images complicated or displaying a plurality of individual images at the same time, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the images displayed on the display unit. However, when displaying such an image, it is not preferable that the processing load increases significantly or the data volume increases significantly.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of performing good display effects while suppressing the processing load.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is 3D information, in a virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual 3D space (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135); and projecting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. ), and data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151 and rendering section 152) having a drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) to generate data generated by a storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
display means (symbol display device 31) to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means, and display control means (of the VDP 135) to update the content of the image when a predetermined update timing comes a display circuit 155);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data of the object to be placed in the virtual three-dimensional space by the placement means includes data capable of defining a plurality of planes, and a three-dimensional shape based on the plane data (plane data SD). contains image data (sea surface object PC 19) of a multi-surface object capable of defining
The data generation means is
When arranging the image data of the multifaceted object in the virtual three-dimensional space in order to display the multifaceted image corresponding to the image data of the multifaceted object over a plurality of update timings, the display mode of the multifaceted image is changed. arrangement mode changing means for changing the arrangement mode of at least some of the plurality of surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing arithmetic processing for sea surface display in display CPU 131, sea surface display in VDP 135 function to execute setting processing) and
By changing the color information applied to the plane data whose arrangement mode has been changed by the arrangement mode changing means for each plane data according to the arrangement mode of the plane data, at least one of the multi-plane images is changed. a display color changing means (a function of executing color information setting processing for sea surface display in the VDP 135) that enables image display in which the display color of the area of the part is different between a plurality of update timings;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, the layout of at least some of the plurality of plane data is changed, and the color information applied to the plane data whose layout has been changed is changed in accordance with the change of the layout. be done. As a result, it is possible to complicate the display effect and increase the player's interest in the display effect.

Further, the color information is changed in units of surface data according to the layout of the surface data. This makes it possible to set color information in accordance with the layout of surface data without pre-storing a large number of textures corresponding to patterns in which color information is changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display performance while suppressing an increase in data volume.

It should be noted that the above configuration includes a configuration in which "the arrangement mode changing means changes at least one of the orientation, shape, and size of at least a portion of the plurality of surface data when changing the arrangement mode". included.

Feature B2. The arrangement mode changing means is means for changing the arrangement mode of some of the plurality of plane data and making the arrangement mode of the other plane data correspond to the change in the arrangement mode of the part of the plane data. (a function of executing normal parameter setting processing in the VDP 135).

According to feature B2, it is possible to individually control the layout of the surface data while maintaining the continuity between the surface data.

Feature B3. The arrangement mode changing means changes a predetermined parameter, which is at least one of orientation, shape, and size, for discontinuous plane data (applied plane data SD1) in which corresponding areas in the multi-plane image are not continuous. and making the predetermined parameter of the plane data (buffer plane data SD2) corresponding to the discontinuous plane data correspond to the discontinuous plane data. (a function of executing normal parameter setting processing in the VDP 135).

According to feature B3, it is possible to individually control the layout of the surface data while maintaining the continuity between the surface data. In particular, discontinuous surface data is used as a target for positively changing the arrangement mode, and surface data that is continuous with the discontinuous surface data is made to correspond to the discontinuous surface data. The processing load required for the adjustment to ensure the continuity between the plane data can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed without performing the change.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature B3,
"Each of the surface data is determined by a plurality of vertex data, and the predetermined plurality of surface data share a part of the vertex data with each other,
The arrangement mode changing means changes a predetermined parameter, which is at least one of orientation, shape, and size, for surface data (surface data SD1 to be applied) that do not share the vertex data, and changes the parameters. Means for making the predetermined parameters of the surface data (buffer surface data SD2) sharing vertex data with the target surface data correspond to the surface data to be changed (normal parameter setting processing in the VDP 135). It has the ability to execute
A configuration can be considered.

Feature B4. each of the surface data is defined by a plurality of vertex data, and the predetermined plurality of surface data share a part of the vertex data;
Characteristic B1, wherein the arrangement mode changing means changes at least one of the orientation, shape, and size of each face data by individually changing the coordinates of each vertex data; or The gaming machine described in B2.

According to feature B4, by changing the coordinates of one vertex data, it is possible to change at least one of the orientation, shape, and size of a plurality of surface data. By controlling the parameters in units of vertex data instead of controlling parameters in units of surface data in this way, even if you do not set a processing configuration to ensure continuity between surface data, It is possible to individually control the arrangement mode.

Feature B5. The arrangement mode changing means is
Data for reading individual control data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) for individually changing the arrangement of the plurality of surface data from the storage means (memory module 133); reading means (function for executing step S2503 in VDP 135);
Application changing means (function for executing the processes of steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and S2512 in the VDP 135) for changing the manner in which the individual control data is applied to the image data of the multifaceted object between the plurality of update timings )and,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic B5, in the configuration for changing the layout of the plane data using pre-stored individual control data, the display mode of the multi-plane image is changed between a plurality of update timings while using the individual control data. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature B6. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and the unit control data are applied to the surface data or data defining the surface data,
The application changing means changes the correspondence relationship between the target data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data in the image data of the multi-faceted object according to the switching of the update timing. The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and S2512.

According to feature B6, by switching the correspondence relationship between the data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data, the display mode of the multi-view image is changed between a plurality of update timings. It is possible to reduce the processing load in a configuration in which the display mode of the multi-faceted image is changed while using .

Feature B7. The application changing means includes multiple applying means for reflecting the content of the plurality of unit control data on one data to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multifaceted object (steps S2506 and S2507 in the VDP 135). , a function of executing the processes of steps S2511 and S2512).

According to the feature B7, in the configuration for changing the arrangement mode while referring to the unit control data, the arrangement mode to be changed is diversified.

Feature B8. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and the unit control data are applied to the surface data or data defining the surface data,
The data reading means reads a plurality of the individual control data from the storage means,
The application change means is
Multiple application means (step S2507 in VDP 135 and step a function to execute the processing of S2512);
In the image data of the multifaceted object, the correspondence relationship between the target data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data is changed according to the switching of the update timing, and the change in the correspondence relationship is changed by the plurality of individual control data. Correspondence changing means for each of
The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B8, it is possible to change the layout in a complicated manner while facilitating the design of the individual control data in the game machine design stage.

Feature B9. The arrangement mode changing means is
a first change unit (function of executing arithmetic processing for sea surface display in the display CPU 131, function of executing steps S2504 and S2509 in the VDP 135) for collectively changing the layout of a group of data including a plurality of surface data; ,
A second changing unit for individually changing the layout of each face data included in the group of data whose layout has been changed by the first changing unit (the processing of steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and S2512 in the VDP 135). function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B9, it is possible to change the arrangement mode in units of plane data in a complicated manner while changing the arrangement mode along a general flow.

In addition, as a more specific configuration for producing such a function and effect, "the type of arrangement mode changed by the first change means is at least one of position, orientation and size, and the second change means A configuration is conceivable in which at least part of the types of placement targets changed by the first changing means are included in the types of placement modes changed by the means.

Further, there is a configuration in which ``the image data of the multifaceted object includes a plurality of the groups of data, and the first changing means individually changes the layout of the groups of the plurality of data''. Conceivable.

Feature B10. The display color changing means is
Section specifying means (step S2702 to step function to execute S2705);
color information for selecting color information to be applied to the face data identified as being included in the predetermined division by the division identifying means from among a plurality of stages of color information based on a parameter of a type different from the arrangement mode; selection means (function for executing steps S2706 and S2707 in VDP 135);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B10, the color information is determined based on parameters different from the layout mode while changing the color information according to the layout mode, so it is possible to set the color information in a complicated manner. This makes it possible to realize realistic image display.

Feature B11. The arrangement mode changing means changes at least the orientation of the plane data,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the display color changing means changes color information applied to the plane data based on an angle of the plane data with respect to the viewpoint. .

According to the feature B11, it is possible to set color information according to the direction of the surface, and it is possible to display a multi-surface image realistically.

Feature B12. The display color changing means is
According to the direction of the surface data changed by the arrangement mode changing unit, the section identifying means (steps S2702 to a function to execute step S2705);
Color information selection for selecting color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined section by the section identifying means from among a plurality of levels of color information based on a parameter of a type different from the direction. means (the function of executing steps S2706 and S2707 in the VDP 135);
The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B12, the color information is determined based on a parameter different from the surface orientation while changing the color information according to the surface orientation. Therefore, it is possible to set the color information in a complicated manner. This makes it possible to display a multifaceted image realistically.

Feature B13. The color information selection means selects the color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined division by the division identification means, based on the distance in a predetermined direction from the viewpoint. The game machine according to feature B12, characterized in that it is selected from among.

According to the characteristic B13, since the color information changes depending on not only the direction of the surface but also the position of the surface, it is possible to display a multi-surface image realistically.

The invention of the characteristic group B is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the object. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured object onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, it is not preferable that the data capacity increases significantly in order to further improve the display effect.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) and a predetermined update timing comes, display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of an image;
In a game machine equipped with
The display mode of the images on the display section includes a mode in which the plurality of individual images are displayed in such a manner that the player recognizes that they are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display section. ,
The data generation means generates an individual image displayed so that the player can recognize that it exists on the near side in the depth direction with respect to the predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the image on the far side in the depth direction. The target individual image, which is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as existing at the reference position, has an outline compared to the image recognized by the player as existing at the reference position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a blurring setting means (a function of executing adjustment processing for focus effect in a VDP 135) for displaying a blurry state by blurring a line.

According to the feature C1, it is possible to perform a display effect as if the focus is on the reference position, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of depth.

Feature C2. The data generating means generates the generated data based on setting the image data, and sets the image data in a state in which a depth parameter corresponding to the display position in the depth direction is applied. Based on this, the display mode is such that the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction,
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set,
The blur setting means includes:
Parameter deriving means for deriving the depth parameter for each data corresponding to the image data set in the setting storage means and generating each unit data (executing steps S3101 to S3107 in VDP 135) function) and
Blur execution for displaying an image portion corresponding to the data in a blurred state by executing blur generation processing on data whose depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter corresponding to the reference position. Means (function for executing steps S3110 to S3115 in VDP 135);
The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C2, since it is not necessary to store the image data for the blurred state in advance, it is possible to display the blurred state while reducing the data capacity. Further, since the depth parameter is derived for each piece of data that generates each piece of data, it is possible to finely control display in a blurred state.

Feature C3. The display effect in the display means includes a blurred display effect in which the display in the blurred state is performed over a plurality of update timings,
The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the parameter derivation means derives the depth parameter at each of one update timing and another update timing of the blurred display effect. .

According to the feature C3, it is possible to change the display in the blurred state according to the progress of the display effect.

Feature C4. The data generation means includes placement means (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135) for placing image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. a viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the two-dimensional information projected onto the projection plane drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) that generates generation data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The parameter deriving means derives the depth parameter for each unit data included in the projected two-dimensional information data,
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the blurring execution means executes the blurring process on the projected two-dimensional information data using the depth parameter. .

According to the feature C4, the depth parameter derivation and blur generation processing are performed not on the data of the three-dimensional information but on the data of the two-dimensional information, so that the processing load can be reduced. However, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

Feature C5. As the blur generation process, the blur execution means blends the color information of the unit data included in the data of the two-dimensional information after projection with the color information of the surrounding unit data (steps S3206 and S3212 in the VDP 135). and a function of executing step S3217).

According to the feature C5, since the blending process is executed when blurring occurs, it is possible to display the blurred state according to the type of the image to be displayed in the blurred state display effect. , it is possible to suitably display the blurred state. In this case, the blending process is performed not on the data of the three-dimensional information, but on the data of the two-dimensional information. can be preferably performed.

Feature C6. The data generation means includes arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. a viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and two-dimensional information projected onto the projection plane drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data, which is two-dimensional information, based on the data of
The blurring setting means is characterized in that the target individual image is displayed in a blurred state by executing a blurring generation process on the projected two-dimensional information data. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5.

According to the feature C6, since the blurring generation process is performed not on the data of the three-dimensional information but on the data of the two-dimensional information, it is possible to reduce the processing load as described above. It becomes possible to exhibit an excellent effect.

Feature C7. When the blurring setting means performs display in the blurring state, the special images (individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching) are present at positions shifted in the depth direction with respect to the reference position. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein even if it is displayed so as to be recognized by the player, it is excluded from the display objects in the blurred state.

According to feature C7, when displaying in a blurred state, display in a uniformly blurred state is applied to individual images that are displayed as if they exist at positions shifted from the reference position. If you try, there is a possibility that it will be difficult for the player to recognize the information that should be recognized. On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the special image is displayed as if it were present at the reference position, the special image is excluded from being displayed in the blurred state. While suppressing the occurrence of , it is possible to realize display in a blurred state.

Incidentally, the special image includes a teaching image used for teaching the game situation to the player.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the special image is an image displayed so as to be recognized by the player as existing on the front side in the depth direction with respect to the reference position.

According to feature C8, in a configuration in which the special image is excluded from the blurred display targets, it is easy for the player to recognize that the special image is intentionally excluded. Therefore, it is possible to exclude the special image from the blurred display target without giving a sense of discomfort to the blurred display effect.

Feature C9. Equipped with an operation reception means (an effect operation device 48) that receives an operation by a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the blurring setting means changes the reference position based on the player's operation on the operation receiving means.

According to the characteristic C9, the uniformity of the display effects in the blurred state is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the display effects.

Feature C10. The blurring setting means does not display the blurred state during a predetermined first display period (game time), and the processing load of the processing excluding the processing required for displaying the blurred state is reduced to the first display period. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein the blurred state is displayed in a second display period (round game) shorter than the period.

According to the feature C10, an extreme increase in the processing load of the update timing when displaying a blurred state is suppressed.

Feature C11. The data generating means generates the generated data based on setting image data,
The blurring setting means causes the target individual image to be displayed in a blurred state by blending at least part of the color information determined by the image data with surrounding color information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized by:

According to the feature C11, since the blending process is executed when blurring occurs, it is possible to display the blurred state according to the type of the image to be displayed in the blurred state display effect. , it is possible to suitably display the blurred state.

Feature C12. The data generating means generates the generated data based on setting the image data, and sets the image data in a state in which a depth parameter corresponding to the display position in the depth direction is applied. Based on this, the display mode is such that the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction,
The blurring setting means blurs the target individual image corresponding to the image data by executing blurring generation processing on the image data whose depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter corresponding to the reference position. It is intended to be displayed in the state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the reference parameter has a predetermined parameter range such that the reference position corresponds to the predetermined range in the depth direction.

According to the feature C12, it is possible to display a blurred state with the depth of field widened to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display in a blurred state.

Feature C13. The blurring setting means exists at a position farther in the depth direction than the image recognized by the player as being at a position away from the reference position by the predetermined distance in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C12, wherein the image recognized by the player as being blurred is displayed to a greater extent.

According to the feature C13, it is possible to display the blurred state more realistically.

Feature C14. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is 3D information, in a virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual 3D space (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135); and projecting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. ), and data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151 and rendering section 152) having a drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) to generate data generated by a storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on display means (symbol display device 31);
In a game machine equipped with
The display mode of the images on the display section includes a mode in which the plurality of individual images are displayed in such a manner that the player recognizes that they are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display section. ,
The data generating means generates an individual image displayed such that the player recognizes that it exists on the near side in the depth direction with respect to the predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the image on the far side in the depth direction. The target individual image, which is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as existing at the reference position, has an outline compared to the image recognized by the player as existing at the reference position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising blurring setting means (a function of executing adjustment processing for focus effects in a VDP 135) for displaying lines in a blurred state by blurring them.

According to the feature C14, it is possible to perform a display effect as if the focus is on the reference position, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of depth.

The invention of the characteristic group C is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data, the image data memory stores image data for displaying the background and image data for displaying characters and the like. It is Further, by reading the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in storage means such as a VRAM. By outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the object. Rendering data is created by projecting the textured object onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

Here, in order to increase the player's attention to the display effect, it is preferable to display a more realistic image, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) and a predetermined update timing comes, display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of an image;
with
In the gaming machine, wherein the data generating means generates the generated data based on using image data and applying parameter data that determines a display mode of an image based on the image data,
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set,
The data generation means is a set data derivation means (step in VDP 135) for deriving set data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blur map data) to be used for each generation unit data that generates each unit data. a function of executing S2503, a function of executing steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135), and applying each unit parameter data included in the set data derived by the set data deriving means to each of the generation unit data. and by changing at least one of the method of applying aggregated data and the contents of the aggregated data to be applied, generating the generated data in which the same type of individual image is displayed in a different manner A gaming machine characterized in that it

According to feature D1, each unit parameter data group is treated as set data, so that the processing of data handling can be simplified. In addition, by changing at least one of the method of applying aggregated data and the content of aggregated data to be applied, generation data is generated in which the same type of individual image is displayed in a different manner. It is possible to diversify the display effects while suppressing the amount of image data to be stored in advance.

Feature D2. The collective data deriving means derives the collective data by reading out the collective data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) from the storage means (memory module 133). The gaming machine according to feature D1.

According to the feature D2, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while reducing the processing load.

Feature D3. The data generation means includes placement means (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135) for placing image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. a viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the two-dimensional information projected onto the projection plane drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) that generates generation data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The set data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) derived by the set data deriving means is applied to the image data of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that

According to the feature D3, it is possible to change the layout of the image data of the three-dimensional information using the set data, so that more complex image display can be performed while realizing realistic image display. becomes. In this case, in the case of displaying the complicated image, it is possible to achieve a balance between both the data capacity and the processing load because of the configuration using the set data as described above.

Feature D4. The set data deriving means derives the set data (blur map data) by specifying each unit parameter data (Z value) corresponding to the set state in the state in which the image data is set. is a
Features D1 to D3, wherein the data generating means generates the generated data based on applying the derived set data to data generated from the image data. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature D4, since it is not necessary to store aggregated data in advance, it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects while reducing the data volume.

Feature D5. Characteristic feature D4 according to feature D4, wherein the aggregate data deriving means derives the aggregate data corresponding to each of the generated data in a situation where the aggregate data is used to generate the generated data. game machine.

According to the feature D5, it is possible to use different set data at each update timing, and it is possible to diversify the display effects. Also, even in this case, the set data is not stored in advance, but is created each time. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display effect while reducing the data capacity.

Feature D6. The data generation means includes arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. a viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and two-dimensional information projected onto the projection plane drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data, which is two-dimensional information, based on the data of
The set data derivation means derives the set data (blur map data) by specifying each unit parameter data (Z value) according to the arrangement mode of the image data of the object by the arrangement means. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5, characterized by:

According to feature D6, in a configuration that realizes realistic image display by using image data of three-dimensional information, aggregate data is created in accordance with a data setting mode that enables realistic image display. , it is possible to prevent the use of aggregated data from adversely affecting realistic image display.

Feature D7. The data generation means includes arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. a viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and two-dimensional information projected onto the projection plane drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data, which is two-dimensional information, based on the data of
The aggregate data (blurred map data) derived by the aggregate data deriving means is applied to the data of the two-dimensional information after projection, according to any one of features D1 to D6. game machine.

According to the feature D7, the set data is applied not to the data of the three-dimensional information but to the data of the two-dimensional information. It is possible to achieve excellent effects such as

Feature D8. The data generating means changes the display mode of the same type of individual image based on different modes of applying the unit parameter data of the collective data to the generation unit data between a plurality of update timings. Generating and executing means for generating the generated data corresponding to changes (function for executing the processes of steps S2506, S2507, steps S2511 and S2512 in the VDP 135, and function for executing steps S1010 to S1012). The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that

According to feature D8, it is possible to change the display mode of the same type of individual image between a plurality of update timings while using a single set of data. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature D9. The generation execution means includes a correspondence change means (steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and S2511 in the VDP 135) that changes the correspondence between each unit parameter data and each generation unit data according to the change of update timing. function of executing the processing of S2512).

According to feature D9, by switching the correspondence relationship between the unit parameter data and the generation unit data, the display mode of the image is changed between a plurality of update timings. Therefore, the image is displayed while using the collective data. In the configuration for changing the mode, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature D10. The generation execution means includes multiple application means (steps S2506 and S2507 in the VDP 135) for reflecting the contents of a plurality of unit parameter data on one data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each of the generation unit data. , a function of executing the processes of steps S2511 and S2512).

According to the feature D10, in the configuration in which the display mode is changed while referring to the unit parameter data, the changed display mode is diversified.

Feature D11. The collective data derivation means derives a plurality of the collective data,
The generation execution means is
Multiple application means (steps S2507 and S2512 in the VDP 135) for reflecting the content of the unit parameter data of each of the plurality of set data on one data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each of the generation unit data function to execute the processing of
changing the correspondence relationship between the data to which the unit parameter data is applied and the unit parameter data in each of the generation unit data in accordance with a change in update timing, and changing the correspondence relationship between the plurality of set data; Correspondence changing means for each (function for executing the processing of steps S2506 and S2511 in the VDP 135);
The gaming machine according to feature D8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D11, it is possible to change the display mode in a complicated manner while facilitating the design of the collective data in the game machine design stage.

Feature D12. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is 3D information, in a virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual 3D space (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135); and projecting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. ), and data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151 and rendering section 152) having a drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) to generate data generated by a storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on display means (symbol display device 31);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set,
The data generation means is a set data derivation means (step in VDP 135) for deriving set data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blur map data) to be used for each generation unit data that generates each unit data. a function of executing S2503, a function of executing steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135), and applying each unit parameter data included in the set data derived by the set data deriving means to each of the generation unit data. and by changing at least one of the method of applying aggregated data and the contents of the aggregated data to be applied, generating the generated data in which the same type of individual image is displayed in a different manner A gaming machine characterized in that it

According to feature D12, each unit parameter data group is treated as set data, so that the processing of data handling can be simplified. In addition, by changing at least one of the method of applying aggregated data and the content of aggregated data to be applied, generation data is generated in which the same type of individual image is displayed in a different manner. It is possible to diversify the display effects while suppressing the amount of image data to be stored in advance.

The invention of the characteristic group D is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data, the image data memory stores image data for displaying the background and image data for displaying characters and the like. It is Further, by reading the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in storage means such as a VRAM. By outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the object. Rendering data is created by projecting the textured object onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, it is not preferable that the data capacity increases significantly in order to further improve the display effect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is 3D information, in a virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual 3D space (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135); and projecting the image data of the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. ), and data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151 and rendering section 152) having a drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP 135) to generate data generated by a storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
display means (symbol display device 31) to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means, and display control means (of the VDP 135) to update the content of the image when a predetermined update timing comes a display circuit 155);
In a game machine equipped with
The data generating means comprises texture setting means (function for executing texture mapping processing for a special character in VDP) for setting texture image data for the image data of the object,
The object image data includes predetermined object data (special object PC20) used when displaying a predetermined individual image (special character), and the texture image data is set for the predetermined object data. contains predetermined texture data (first partial textures PC21 to PC23, second partial textures PC24 to PC27),
The predetermined texture data is
first texture data (first partial textures PC21 to PC23) set for the first part data (main body part portion BP) of the predetermined object data;
second texture data (second partial textures PC24 to PC27) set for the second part data (attached part parts AP1 to AP4) of the predetermined object data;
contains
The texture setting means is
a first setting means (a function of executing steps S3401 to S3403 in the VDP 135) for changing the type of the first texture data to be set for the first parts data;
When setting the second texture data for the second parts data, second setting means for changing the setting positional relationship of the second texture data for the second parts data (steps S3405 to S3409 in the VDP 135 functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, when changing the appearance of the predetermined individual image, the type of the first texture data, which is a part of the texture data, is changed instead of changing the type of texture data to be set all at once. , the second texture data, which is another part of the texture data, is configured to change the set positional relationship with respect to the second part data. As a result, the appearance of part of the predetermined individual image is changed in a complex manner, while the data volume of the other part is reduced in exchange for reducing the complexity of the appearance change. Therefore, it is possible to change the appearance of the predetermined individual image as described above while balancing the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein a ratio of the second parts data in the predetermined individual image is smaller than a ratio of the first parts data.

According to feature E2, regions where the set positional relationship, not the type of texture data, is changed are less likely to change when changing the appearance than regions where the type, not the set positional relationship, of texture data is changed. However, since the former area is smaller, it is possible for the player to recognize that the appearance of the predetermined individual image as a whole has changed significantly.

Feature E3. In the region occupied by the first part data in the predetermined individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data, there is an image portion (pattern portion of eyes and mouth) whose relative position with respect to a specific outer edge portion in the predetermined individual image does not change. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that

According to the feature E3, since the image portion that is not preferable when the relative position changes is set as the first texture data, it is possible to appropriately change the appearance of the area including the image portion.

Feature E4. In the second texture data, the color information set at one boundary portion has continuity with the color information set at the opposite boundary portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E3.

According to feature E4, when the set positional relationship of the second texture data is changed, the occurrence of a pattern boundary in the predetermined individual image is suppressed.

Feature E5. A plurality of combinations of the second parts data and the second texture data exist,
Characteristic features E1 to E4, wherein the second setting means changes the set positional relationship of the other second texture data when changing the set positional relationship of one of the second texture data. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to feature E5, in a configuration in which a plurality of second texture data exist, the processing load required for setting the second texture data can be reduced.

The invention of the characteristic group E is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the object. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured object onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, it is not preferable that the data capacity increases significantly in order to further improve the display effect.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G);
display storage means (memory module 133) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used for reproducing moving images,
The display control means is
a rendering means (moving image decoder) for rendering any moving image data in an rendering area and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for an image corresponding to the moving image data;
By using the still image data for a plurality of update timings developed by the development means in the order determined in the moving image data, one moving image corresponding to the moving image data is generated for the plurality of update timings. Display effect execution means for executing a display effect to be displayed over a period of (function of executing arithmetic processing for round effect in display CPU 131, function of executing setting process for round effect and mapping process for round effect in VDP 135) and,
with
The display effect executing means is configured to be able to execute display effects of a plurality of types of display patterns using the one moving image by inserting a predetermined image in a part of specific periods of the effect period of the display effect. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature F1, by executing display effects of a plurality of types of display patterns using one moving image, the amount of data required for display effects is reduced compared to a configuration in which moving image data is prepared for each display effect. can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data while diversifying display effects.

Feature F2. the display storage means stores predetermined image data (insertion image data IPD0) which is image data used for displaying the predetermined image and has a data amount smaller than that of the moving image data;
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the display effect executing means is capable of displaying the predetermined image using the predetermined image data during the specific period.

According to the feature F2, the predetermined image is displayed using the predetermined image data. The predetermined image data is set to have a data amount smaller than that of the moving image data. As a result, it is possible to diversify display effects with a small amount of data compared to a configuration in which moving image data is prepared for each display effect.

Further, the configuration for displaying a predetermined image using predetermined image data eliminates the need to execute processing related to creating a predetermined image, compared to the configuration for creating and displaying a predetermined image. The processing load associated with displaying a predetermined image is likely to be lightened. As a result, the processing load required to display a predetermined image can be reduced while reducing the amount of data related to the display effect, and the reduction of the data amount and the processing load can be balanced.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the display effect executing means displays the predetermined image instead of the image related to the one moving image during the specific period.

According to the feature F3, there are cases in which an image related to a moving image is displayed and in which a predetermined image is displayed in a specific period. As a result, the display of an image related to one moving image can be used as one of the display patterns of the display effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify display effects with a small amount of data.

As a specific configuration of this feature, it is conceivable that "the display effect executing means overwrites the image related to the one moving image with the predetermined image in the specific period." According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a predetermined image instead of an image related to one moving image without performing special processing in the processing related to moving image display.

Feature F4. The display effect executing means is characterized in that, in the specific period, the image related to the one moving image and the predetermined image are superimposed to create a composite image, and display the composite image. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

According to the feature F4, since a composite image of an image related to one moving image and a predetermined image is displayed, an image different from the image related to the one moving image is displayed using the image related to one moving image. be able to.

In particular, due to the characteristics of moving image data, it is necessary to hold continuous data for each update timing. In this regard, according to this feature, the continuous data can be preferably used by creating a composite image using the continuous data, and the amount of data related to the entire display effect can be reduced. It can be done suitably.

Further, according to the relationship with the feature F2, the display area of the predetermined image can be reduced compared to the configuration in which only the predetermined image is displayed, so that the data amount of the predetermined image data can be reduced. be able to. As a result, the amount of data required to display a given image can be reduced.

Feature F5. Arranging means for arranging object image data in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing setting processing for round effect in VDP 135); a function to execute conversion processing to) and projection data created by projecting the image data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint to generate generated data, and the direction in which the viewpoint faces When a plurality of the image data are arranged in a row, drawing setting means ( A function for executing drawing data creation processing for rendering in the VDP 135), and a storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing generated data (drawing data) generated by
The display control means causes the display unit to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means,
the display storage means stores predetermined image data (insertion image data IPD0) which is image data used for displaying the predetermined image and has a data amount smaller than that of the moving image data;
Said object includes:
a first object (moving image object) to which still image data generated from the moving image data is pasted as a texture;
a second object (insertion object) to which the predetermined image data is pasted as a texture;
contains
The arranging means arranges each of the objects such that the distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint faces is smaller than that of the first object in the specific period. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or feature F4, characterized by:

According to the feature F5, the still image data generated from the moving image data is pasted as a texture to the first object, and the still image data is updated each time the update timing comes, thereby forming one moving image. is displayed. Further, a predetermined image is displayed by pasting the predetermined image data as a texture on the second object. In this case, since the second object related to the predetermined image is arranged on the front side of the first object related to the one moving image, the predetermined image is arranged so as to overlap the image related to the one moving image by the hidden surface elimination configuration. is displayed. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed in place of an image related to one moving image, or an image related to one moving image and a predetermined image are synthesized by using the hidden surface elimination configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image. You can let

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein each of the objects is a plate-shaped object to which each texture is applied on at least one surface.

According to the feature F6, it is possible to reduce the processing load by using a plate-shaped object with a relatively small processing load as a pasting target of each image data.

Feature F7. The moving image data includes first unit moving image data (first round moving image data RMD0a) and second unit moving image data (second round moving image data RMD0b) divided into predetermined units. cage,
The display effect executing means displays the moving image based on the second unit moving image data after displaying the moving image based on the first moving image data unit, and displays the moving image based on the second unit moving image data based on the elapse of the specific period. It displays videos,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the display effect executing means displays the predetermined image for the specific period.

According to the feature F7, one moving image is displayed using at least the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data instead of using a single moving image data. As a result, for example, at the start of moving image display in 1 above, it is possible to execute processing for expansion on the first unit moving image data, and then execute processing for expansion on the second unit moving image data. becomes. In this case, compared to a configuration in which both pieces of moving image data are developed collectively, it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load when starting the moving image display in 1 above.

In such a configuration, the predetermined image is displayed for a predetermined period provided between the moving image display based on the first unit moving image data and the moving image display based on the second unit moving image data. As a result, the moving image display related to each divided moving image data is continuously displayed via a predetermined image, and the player can recognize it as one moving image.

Moreover, according to such a configuration, it is not necessary to simultaneously perform the processing related to moving image display and the processing related to predetermined image display. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load associated with image display.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the display effect executing means can change the predetermined image to be displayed during the specific period.

According to the feature F8, by changing the predetermined image to be displayed in the specific period each time the display effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the display effect is different. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the display patterns of the display effects.

As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, "the display storage means stores a plurality of types of predetermined image data with different display contents, and the display effect execution means stores the plurality of types of predetermined image data. comprising a selection means for selecting one of predetermined image data, and displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined image data selected by the selection means in the specific period using the predetermined image data selected by the selection means. is" configuration is conceivable.

Feature F9. The display effect executing means causes the moving image to be repeatedly displayed a plurality of times when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the moving image is displayed a predetermined number of times among the plurality of moving image displays. a first predetermined image is displayed as the predetermined image in the specific period of time, and a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image is displayed in the specific period of the number of moving image display times different from the predetermined number of moving image display times. The gaming machine according to feature F8, characterized in that it displays the .

According to feature F9, moving image display may be repeatedly executed. In this case, since the predetermined image to be displayed is different between the predetermined number of moving image display and the different number of moving image display from the predetermined number of times, a display effect with different variations as a whole is executed. . As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the display effect due to the repeated performance of the display effect.

Feature F10. Based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player (function for executing win/fail determination processing in the main controller 50);
When the determination result of the determination means is a transition corresponding result corresponding to shifting the game state to the specific game state, the transition means for shifting to the specific game state (game state transition processing in the main controller 50 function) and
with
In the specific game state, a specific unit game that is started at a predetermined timing in the specific game state and continues until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is repeated multiple times,
The display effect executing means is executed each time the specific unit game is performed, and displays a different predetermined image according to the number of executions of the specific unit game during one specific game state. The gaming machine according to feature F8 or feature F9, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the feature F10, during the specific game state, the specific unit game is repeated multiple times. In this case, every time a specific unit game is played, a display effect using one moving image is executed. As a result, the player can understand that the specific unit game is being repeatedly performed by repeatedly executing the display effect.

In this case, when the same display effect is executed, the player's attention to the display effect decreases. On the other hand, if a configuration is adopted in which a completely different display effect is executed, the inconvenience of an increase in the amount of data may occur.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, by changing the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the specific unit game, variations are possible using one moving image data in the specific game state in which the specific unit game is repeatedly performed. It becomes possible to execute different display effects, and the above inconvenience can be avoided.

The feature group F is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU and elements such as a memory storing control programs related to games are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. Note that there is also known a configuration in which the CPU and memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the gaming machines described above, there is known one equipped with a display device having a display section, such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit using the image data read out from the memory.

Also, a configuration is known in which moving image data is provided as image data. Since the amount of moving image data is larger than that of still image data, it is stored in a compressed state in the image data memory. When reproducing a moving image related to the compressed moving image data, the moving image data is decompressed in a predetermined memory area using a decoder to form a plurality of still image data, and the image is updated using the plurality of still image data. It is necessary to use them in a predetermined order every time the timing comes.

Here, in order to diversify display effects, there are cases where it is desired to reproduce a plurality of types of moving images. In this case, a configuration is conceivable in which a plurality of types of moving image data are provided, one of the plurality of types of moving image data is decoded, and a moving image related to the moving image data is reproduced. However, with such a configuration, there is concern about an increase in the amount of moving image data.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G);
display storage means (memory module 133) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used for reproducing moving images,
The display control means is
a rendering means (moving image decoder) for rendering any moving image data in an rendering area and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for an image corresponding to the moving image data;
By using the still image data for a plurality of update timings developed by the development means in the order determined in the moving image data, the moving image of the image corresponding to the moving image data is generated for the plurality of update timings. a moving image display executing means (a function of executing setting processing for moving images in the VDP 135) for displaying over the display period of
with
The moving image data is divided into a plurality of unit moving image data according to the aspect of the moving image displayed by the moving image data,
The moving image display execution means displays a series of moving images by sequentially displaying the moving images of the respective unit moving image data in a predetermined order,
Each of the moving image data units is compressed in such a manner that the amount of data assigned to each moving image data unit differs according to the aspect of each moving image displayed by each moving image data unit. game machine.

According to the feature G1, a series of moving image display is performed by sequentially using each unit of moving image data instead of using a single piece of moving image data. As a result, for example, at the start of the series of moving image display, processing for expansion is executed for one unit of moving image data, and then processing for expansion is executed for other units of moving image data. It becomes possible. In this case, it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load at the time of starting the series of moving image display, as compared with a configuration in which both units of moving image data are developed collectively.

In such a configuration, the amount of data assigned to each unit of moving image data differs depending on the aspect of the moving image displayed by each unit of moving image data. As a result, it is possible to adjust the image quality according to the mode of the moving image, so it is possible to efficiently adjust the image quality.

Feature G2. The display period includes a first section and a second section in which the aspect of the moving image is different,
In the unit video data,
first unit moving image data (first round moving image data RMD0a) corresponding to the first section;
second unit moving image data (second round moving image data RMD0b) corresponding to the second interval;
is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are set to have different amounts of data for image display per unit period.

According to feature G2, by varying the amount of data for displaying an image per unit period of each unit of moving image data, it is possible to display a moving image while suppressing deterioration in the image quality of the moving image displayed by each unit of moving image data. It is possible to reduce the data amount of the entire image data.

Feature G3. The first section and the second section are a large change section and a small change section in which the amount of change in the image between each update timing is relatively large and small,
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the first unit moving image data is set to have a larger amount of data for image display per unit period than the second unit moving image data.

According to the feature G3, a relatively large amount of data is allocated to the first unit moving image data corresponding to a large-change section in which the amount of change in the image is relatively large, so that block noise, mosquito noise, and the like occur. hard to do.

On the other hand, since a relatively small amount of data is assigned to the second unit video data corresponding to the small change section in which the image change amount is relatively small, the data amount of the second unit video data should be reduced. can be planned.

Feature G4. The first section and the second section are a high-definition section and a low-definition section in which the definition of an image related to still image data is relatively high and low,
The feature G2 or feature G3 according to feature G2 or feature G3, wherein the first unit moving image data is set to have a larger amount of data for image display per unit period than the second unit moving image data. game machine.

According to the feature G4, a relatively large amount of data is allocated to the first unit moving image data corresponding to a high-definition section with relatively high image definition, so that block noise, mosquito noise, and the like occur. hard to do.

On the other hand, a relatively small amount of data is assigned to the second unit video data corresponding to the low-definition section with relatively low image detail. can be planned.

Feature G5. The game machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, wherein the update timing interval is set to be the same regardless of each section.

According to feature G5, the update timing interval is set to be the same regardless of each section. In addition, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of the moving image, and to reduce the program capacity by the amount of the program that executes the processing related to the change.

Also, even in this case, by adjusting the amount of data for image display per unit period, it is possible to compress the entire data amount of the moving image data to a predetermined amount while suppressing deterioration in image quality. can.

Feature G6. predetermined image data (insertion image data IPD0) corresponding to a predetermined image is stored in the display storage means;
The display control means is
Predetermined image display executing means for displaying the predetermined image on the display section using the predetermined image data (function for executing the processing of steps S3510 to S3516 of the display CPU 131, steps S3704 to S3707 of the VDP 135, steps S3804 and function of executing the processing of step S3807), and simultaneously executing both the moving image display execution means and the predetermined image display execution means, it is possible to simultaneously display the moving image and the predetermined image. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that

According to the characteristic G6, by combining a moving image and a predetermined image, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the image.

In this case, in order to display the moving image and the predetermined image at the same time, it is necessary to execute processing related to display control of both the moving image display and the predetermined image display. Therefore, there is concern about an increase in processing load.

On the other hand, according to the relationship with the feature G5, the processing load during display of the moving image can be reduced by the amount of the processing load associated with changing the update timing interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing from dropping when both the moving image and the predetermined image are displayed at the same time.

Feature G7. predetermined image data (insertion image data IPD0) corresponding to a predetermined image is stored in the display storage means;
The moving image display executing means, when displaying a moving image based on predetermined unit moving image data among the plurality of moving image data units, determines that a predetermined period of time has passed since the moving image display based on the predetermined unit moving image data has been displayed. Based on this, the moving image based on the subsequent unit moving image data is displayed,
The display control means is
Means for displaying the predetermined image on the display unit using the predetermined image data for the predetermined period (function for executing the processing of steps S3912 to S3915 in the display CPU 131) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5.

According to the feature G7, a predetermined image is displayed over a predetermined period provided between the moving image display by the predetermined unit moving image data and the subsequent moving image display by the unit moving image data. As a result, the moving image display related to both divided moving image data units is continuously displayed via a predetermined image, so that the player can recognize it as a series of moving images.

Moreover, according to such a configuration, it is not necessary to simultaneously perform the processing related to moving image display and the processing related to predetermined image display. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load associated with image display.

The feature group G is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which a CPU and elements such as a memory storing control programs related to games are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the gaming machines described above, there is known one equipped with a display device having a display section, such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit using the image data read out from the memory.

Also, a configuration is known in which moving image data is provided as image data. Since the amount of moving image data is larger than that of still image data, it is stored in a compressed state in the image data memory. When reproducing a moving image related to the compressed moving image data, the moving image data is decompressed in a predetermined memory area using a decoder to form a plurality of still image data, and the image is updated using the plurality of still image data. It is necessary to use them in a predetermined order every time the timing comes.

Depending on the relationship between the storage capacity of the memory for image data and other image data, it may be necessary to compress the amount of moving image data to a predetermined set amount. In this case, depending on the compression mode of the moving image data, the image quality of the moving image using the moving image data may be degraded, resulting in the inconvenience that the degree of attention to the moving image is reduced.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Image data storage means (memory module 133) storing various image data including image data of objects and image data of textures to be pasted on the objects; arrangement means (VDP 135) for arranging the objects in virtual three-dimensional space; function to execute the processing of steps S4602, S4609, and S4610 in step S4602, step S4609, and step S4610); execution function), pasting means for pasting the texture to the object (function for executing color information setting processing in the VDP 135), and pasting the texture on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Rendering setting means for projecting the projected object and generating generated data (rendering data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane (a function of creating a rendering list in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing rendering processing in the VDP 135) and storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing generated data generated by data generation means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135),
Display control means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The objects include a deformation target object (refracting object OB10) set as a deformation target,
The data generating means includes distortion forming means (a function of executing distortion effect calculation processing in the display CPU 131 and various processes for distortion effect in the VDP 135) that distorts at least a part of the image by deforming the deformation target object A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

According to the feature H1, at least part of the image displayed on the display unit can be distorted by deforming the deformation target object. This eliminates the need to prepare a dedicated texture for distorting the image. Therefore, it is possible to express image distortion relatively easily while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

Feature H2. The characteristic feature H1 according to feature H1, wherein the distortion forming means deforms the deformation target object by individually updating coordinates of at least a part of vertices constituting the deformation target object. game machine.

According to the feature H2, by updating the coordinates of at least some of the vertices forming the deformation target object, the individual image based on the deformation target object can be visually recognized as distorted.

It should be noted that "coordinate mapping data specifying coordinates at each vertex constituting the object to be transformed is provided, and a plurality of types of the coordinate mapping data are set with different specified coordinates, and The distortion forming means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the coordinate mapping data to be referred to each time a predetermined update timing occurs, so that the deformation target object It is something that transforms so that it fluctuates." According to such a configuration, fluctuations in an image can be expressed, and compared to a configuration in which a calculation formula for each coordinate is given and calculated from the calculation formula, the coordinates of each vertex of the object to be transformed are individually set. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for

Feature H3. Characteristic feature H2, wherein the distortion forming means does not change the coordinates of the vertices constituting the object to be transformed, of the vertices related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the object to be transformed. game machine.

According to the feature H3, since the coordinates of the vertices of the outer edge of the individual image based on the deformation target object are not changed, the boundary between the individual image based on the deformation object and its surrounding images is less noticeable. This makes it possible to distort a part of the image while blending the two.

Feature H4. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the deformation target object is a plate-like object having a plane set corresponding to the image to be distorted.

According to the feature H4, by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the object to be transformed, the object to be transformed can be easily transformed. As a result, the processing load for distorting can be reduced.

Feature H5. The distortion forming means arranges the deformation target object closer to the viewpoint than a predetermined object for displaying a predetermined image, and applies image data corresponding to the predetermined image to the deformation target object as the texture. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that the game machine sticks as an image.

According to the feature H5, the predetermined image is distorted by deforming the deformation target object. As a result, it is possible to standardize the processing in that there is no need to change the processing for a given object between when it is distorted and when it is not distorted.

In addition, since the case of distorting and the case of not distorting can be dealt with by arranging or not arranging the deformation target object, it is possible to relatively easily switch between the case of distorting and the case of not distorting. .

Feature H6. The arranging means includes means for arranging the predetermined object among a plurality of objects set as display targets (function for executing the processing of step S4602 in the VDP 135),
The drawing setting means is a means for projecting the predetermined object and generating predetermined generated data corresponding to an image including the predetermined image based on the data projected onto the projection plane (the processing of step S4608 in the VDP 135). function),
The data generation means extracts the image data corresponding to the predetermined image included in the predetermined generation data to generate the texture to be pasted on the deformation target object (steps S4801 and S4802 in the VDP 135). function to execute the processing of
The distortion forming means arranges at least the object to be transformed in the virtual three-dimensional space, pastes the texture generated by the texture generating means on the object to be transformed, and projects the object to be transformed. The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized in that the predetermined image is distorted by distorting the predetermined image.

According to the feature H6, the predetermined generation data is generated by performing the first projection on the predetermined object, and the texture to be applied to the transformation target object is generated using the predetermined generation data. Then, a predetermined image can be distorted by performing a second projection on the deformation target object to which the texture is attached. As a result, the amount of data can be reduced in that it is not necessary to store in advance the texture to be applied to the transformation target object.

In addition, since the texture applied to the object to be transformed is generated by projecting a predetermined object, the image associated with the texture is actually displayed using the predetermined object. It can resemble a predetermined image. As a result, the image based on the object to be transformed and the surrounding image can be blended together.

Feature H7. The predetermined image is configured to be updateable each time the update timing is reached,
The predetermined generation data is generated each time the update timing comes,
The texture generating means is characterized in that, every time the update timing comes, the texture to be pasted on the deformation target object is generated using the predetermined generation data generated at the update timing. The gaming machine described in H6.

According to feature H7, the predetermined generation data is generated each time the update timing comes, and the texture to be pasted on the transformation target object is generated. Thereby, even when the predetermined image is updated, the updated predetermined image can be distorted.

A specific configuration of ``the predetermined image is configured to be updateable each time the update timing'' is, for example, ``the arranging means updates the predetermined object each time the update timing comes.'' The predetermined image is scrolled in a predetermined direction by updating the coordinates at which the image is arranged," and the configuration "moves the viewpoint in a predetermined direction each time the update timing comes." Conceivable.

Feature H8. The distortion forming means arranges the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, pastes a texture corresponding to the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object to form the predetermined image. is to create distortion generation data (drawing data for effects and patterns) corresponding to the distorted image,
The data generating means is characterized in that it comprises synthesizing means (a function of executing the processing of step S4617 in the VDP 135) for generating one piece of generated data by synthesizing the predetermined generated data and the distortion generated data. The gaming machine according to feature H6 or feature H7.

According to feature H8, the process of generating predetermined generated data for a predetermined image and the process of generating distortion generated data are distinguished, and the two are combined to generate one piece of generated data. , the process of generating the texture to be pasted on the object to be transformed can be used as the process of generating 1 generation data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

Moreover, according to the above feature, it is possible to reduce the number of overlapping objects arranged in two projections. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load caused by overlapping arrangement, overlapping projection, and the like.

Feature H9. The data generating means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The various parameter information includes individual reflection value information (individual α value) and
The distortion forming means adjusts the individual reflection value information applied to the deformation target object so that the color information related to the individual image based on the deformation target object is less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, characterized in that it is configured to:

According to the feature H9, the color information of the individual image based on the object to be transformed becomes less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image. As a result, the outer edge side of the individual image based on the deformation target object is displayed as an image that blends in with the other regions. Therefore, it is possible to make the boundary between the area where the distorted image is displayed and other areas inconspicuous.

Feature H10. The data generating means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The various parameter information includes reflection value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree of reflection of the color information of the texture applied to the object on the display unit,
The distortion forming means gradually adjusts the reflection value information applied to the deformation target object, thereby gradually not reflecting the color information related to the individual image based on the deformation target object ( The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S4519 by the display CPU 131 .

According to the feature H10, since the image representing the distortion gradually disappears, the process of disappearing the distortion is less noticeable. As a result, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player when the distortion disappears.

Feature H11. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H10, wherein the image to be distorted is a part of a background image displayed on the entire display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display section, the data amount of the image data tends to be larger than that of the individual image displayed on a part of the display section. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared in order to partially distort the background image, the amount of data tends to become large.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since it is possible to partially distort the background image without preparing multiple types of background image data, it is possible to suitably reduce the amount of data.

The feature group H is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, polygons, which are three-dimensional image data, are set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and textures, which are two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, are pasted on the polygons. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

Here, in order to increase the degree of attention to the game, an effect may be performed to more realistically express the image displayed on the display unit. As the effect, for example, there is a effect expressing spatial distortion based on refraction of light. In this case, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which the degree of reflection of refraction of light is derived by calculation, there is concern about an increase in processing load. On the other hand, if the image data reflecting the refraction of light is stored in advance, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. a display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G);
Using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (the function of creating a drawing list in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the drawing process in the VDP 135), the image is displayed on the display unit, and the predetermined display control means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) for updating the content of an image when it is time to update;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generating means generates predetermined first generated data (drawing data for background) using a plurality of types of image data, and utilizes at least the first generated data to create data different from the first generated data. 2 Generate data (drawing data for effects and patterns, or 1 drawing data),
The gaming machine, wherein the display control means causes the display unit to display an image using at least the second generated data.

According to feature I1, the first generated data is generated, and the second generated data is generated using the generated first generated data. Accordingly, by displaying an image using the second generated data, an image using the image related to the first generated data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display effects, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data since it is not necessary to store the first generated data in advance.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the data generating means processes at least part of the first generated data and generates the second generated data using the processed data. .

According to feature I2, at least part of the first generated data is processed to generate the second generated data. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variations of the image to be displayed as compared with the configuration in which the first generated data is used as it is.

Feature I3. The data generating means generates the first generated data related to the target image so as to perform a display effect in which a predetermined target image changes over a plurality of update timings, and generates at least the first generated data The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the second generation data corresponding to the transition of the target image can be generated by partially processing the target image.

According to the feature I3, by using the first generated data and the second generated data, it is possible to execute a display effect in which the target image changes over a plurality of update timings. As a result, it is possible to diversify the display effect, and to reduce the amount of data because it is not necessary to prepare image data corresponding to the transition for each update timing.

Feature I4. The data generating means combines the first generated data and the second generated data to generate the generated data corresponding to one update timing (a function of executing the process of step S4617 in the VDP 135). ), the gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.

According to the feature I4, by synthesizing the first generated data and the second generated data, the generated data corresponding to the update timing of 1 is generated. Therefore, the first generated data used in the second generated data is generated. can be diverted to the process for generating the generated data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when generating the generated data while generating the first generated data at one update timing.

Feature I5. The data generation means is
Arrangement means for arranging objects in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S4602, S4609, and S4610 in the VDP 135);
viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in the VDP 135);
Pasting means for pasting a texture to the object (function for executing color information setting processing in the VDP 135);
Rendering setting means for projecting the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating the generation data based on the data projected onto the projection plane (function for executing various rendering data generation processing in the VDP 135) )and,
with
The objects include a specific object (refracting object OB10) used when generating the second generated data,
The second generated data is generated by arranging at least the specific object and projecting the specific object,
The pasting means uses at least part of the first generated data as a texture to be pasted on the specific object (object for refraction OB10) when generating the second generated data. The game machine according to any one of I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, at least part of the first generated data is used as the texture pasted on the specific object. As a result, the amount of data can be reduced because it is not necessary to store the texture to be pasted on the specific object in advance.

Feature I6. The data generation means is
a first arranging means (function for executing the processing of step S4602 in the VDP 135) for arranging a predetermined object among a plurality of objects to be displayed in the virtual three-dimensional space;
viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in the VDP 135);
Pasting means (function for executing color information setting processing in the VDP 135) for pasting a texture to at least the predetermined object;
projecting the predetermined object arranged by the first arranging means onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating the first generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane; 1 rendering setting means (function for executing the processing of step S4608 in the VDP 135);
Texture generation means (function for executing the processes of steps S4801 and S4802 in the VDP 135) for generating a texture to be pasted on a predetermined specific object (object for refraction OB10) using the first generation data;
a second arrangement unit (function for executing the processing of steps S4609 and S4610 in the VDP 135) that arranges at least the specific object in the virtual three-dimensional space;
A second rendering for projecting the object arranged by the second arrangement means onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating the second generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane. setting means (function for executing the process of step S4616 in the VDP 135);
with
The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the pasting means pastes the texture generated by the texture generating means to the specific object.

According to feature I6, the first generated data is generated by performing the first projection on a predetermined object, and the texture to be applied to the specific object is generated using the first generated data. Then, the second generated data can be generated by performing the second projection on the specific object to which the texture is pasted. As a result, the amount of data can be reduced because it is not necessary to store the texture to be pasted on the specific object in advance.

In addition, since the texture applied to the specific object is generated by projecting the predetermined object, the image related to the texture is actually displayed using the predetermined object. can resemble the image of As a result, the image based on the predetermined object and the surrounding image can be blended together.

Furthermore, since the texture to be pasted on the specific object can be generated by the same processing as the processing for generating the second generation data, it is possible to divert the processing.

Feature I7. the specific object is a deformation target object set as a deformation target;
The arranging means is means for arranging the deformation target object so as to overlap the object for displaying the change target image set as the change target from the viewpoint side (function of arranging the refraction object OB10 in the VDP 135). with
The data generating means is characterized in that it comprises changing means (function for displaying the distorted images CP15 and CP16 in the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135) for changing the image to be changed by deforming the object to be deformed. The gaming machine according to feature I5 or feature I6.

According to the feature I7, the change target image can be changed without storing the texture to be pasted on the deformation target object.

Feature I8. The game according to feature I7, wherein the changing means transforms the transformation target object by individually updating coordinates of at least a part of vertices constituting the transformation target object. machine.

According to feature I8, the individual image based on the object to be transformed can be changed by updating the coordinates of at least some of the vertices forming the object to be transformed.

It should be noted that "coordinate mapping data specifying coordinates at each vertex constituting the object to be transformed is provided, and a plurality of types of the coordinate mapping data are set with different specified coordinates, and The changing means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the referenced coordinate mapping data each time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that the object to be transformed is It is something that transforms so that it fluctuates." According to such a configuration, fluctuations in an image can be expressed, and compared to a configuration in which a calculation formula for each coordinate is given and calculated from the calculation formula, the coordinates of each vertex of the object to be transformed are individually set. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for

Feature I9. The game according to feature I8, wherein the changing means does not change the coordinates of the vertices that form the object to be transformed and that relate to the outer edge of the individual image based on the object to be transformed. machine.

According to feature I9, since the coordinates of the vertices of the outer edge of the individual image based on the deformation target object are not changed, the boundary between the individual image based on the deformation object and its surrounding images is less noticeable. As a result, it is possible to change the image to be changed while familiarizing the two.

Feature I10. The game machine according to any one of features I7 to I9, wherein the object to be transformed is a plate-like object having a plane set corresponding to the image to be changed.

According to the feature I10, by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the object to be transformed, the object to be transformed can be easily transformed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for changing the change target image.

Feature I11. The changing means is distortion forming means for distorting the image to be changed by deforming the object to be deformed. function).

According to the feature I11, distortion of the image can be expressed by deforming the object to be deformed.

Feature I12. The data generating means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The various parameter information includes individual reflection value information (individual α value) and
The changing means adjusts the individual reflection value information applied to the object to be transformed so that the color information relating to the individual image based on the object to be transformed becomes less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features I7 to I11, characterized in that it is designed to

According to the feature I12, the color information of the individual image based on the object to be transformed becomes less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image. As a result, the outer edge side of the individual image based on the deformation target object is displayed as an image that blends in with the other regions. Therefore, it is possible to make the boundary between the area where the changed image is displayed and the other area inconspicuous.

Feature I13. The data generating means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The various parameter information includes reflection value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree of reflection of the color information of the texture applied to the object on the display unit,
The changing means gradually adjusts the reflection value information applied to the deformation target object so as to gradually stop reflecting the color information related to the individual image based on the deformation target object (display unit). A gaming machine according to any one of features I7 to I12, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S4519 by the CPU 131.

According to the feature I13, since the image based on the object to be transformed gradually disappears, the disappearing process of the image is inconspicuous. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the image based on the deformation target object disappears.

Feature I14. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I13, wherein the first generated data is image data relating to a background image displayed on the entire display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display section, the data amount of the image data tends to be larger than that of the individual image displayed on a part of the display section. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared to process a part of the background image, the amount of data tends to become large.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since it is possible to perform an effect using a part of the background image without preparing multiple types of background image data, it is possible to suitably reduce the amount of data.

The feature group I is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data, the image data memory stores image data for displaying the background and image data for displaying characters and the like. It is Further, by reading the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in storage means such as a VRAM. By outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, polygons, which are three-dimensional image data, are set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and textures, which are two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, are pasted on the polygons. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

Here, in order to raise the degree of attention to the display effect, it is conceivable to diversify the display effect. However, if a plurality of pieces of image data are provided in order to diversify the display effect, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G);
Using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (the function of creating a drawing list in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the drawing process in the VDP 135), the image is displayed on the display unit, and the predetermined Display control means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) for updating the content of an image when it is time to update;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means converts a change target portion (distortion region PE1, superimposition region PE2), which is a part of a specific individual image (background image, character image CP22) displayed on the display unit, using specific image data. It is characterized by having changing means for changing the specific individual image by changing it (the function of displaying the distorted images CP15 and CP16 in the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135, and the function of displaying the partial images CP23 to CP25). game machine.

According to the feature J1, the specific individual image can be changed by changing the change target image using the specific image data. As a result, it is possible to diversify display effects. In this case, since the specific image data is for changing the change target part, the amount of data relating to the specific image data can be reduced compared to the image data corresponding to the entire specific individual image. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data accompanying the diversification while diversifying the display effects.

Feature J2. The data generation means includes means for generating predetermined generation data corresponding to the specific individual image (function for executing the processing of step S4608 in the VDP 135),
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the changing means displays an image based on the specific image data instead of the image based on the predetermined generation data at the change target portion.

According to the feature J2, the specific individual image is changed by displaying an image based on the specific image data instead of the image based on the predetermined generation data at the change target site. As a result, compared to a configuration in which an image related to the predetermined generated data and an image related to the specific image data are combined, it is possible to easily change the change target region.

Feature J3. The data generation means is
Arranging means for arranging objects in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S4602, S4609, and S4610 in the VDP 135);
viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in the VDP 135);
pasting means for pasting a texture to the object (function for executing the processes of steps S4607 and S4615 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means (steps S4608, S4616 and S4617 in VDP 135) for projecting the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating the generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane. function to perform processing) and
with
The objects include a specific object that is used to display the specific individual image and in which the change target part is set,
the specific image data is a specific texture set in correspondence with the change target part;
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the changing means changes an image displayed on the change target portion using the specific texture.

According to the feature J3, it is possible to change the image displayed on the change target region using the specific texture. In this case, since the specific texture is set in correspondence with the part to be changed, the amount of data of the specific texture tends to be small compared to the structure in which the texture for the entire specific object is prepared. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Feature J4. The object includes a plate-shaped object formed corresponding to the change target part,
The changing means arranges the specific object and the plate-like object so that the plate-like object overlaps the part to be changed from the viewpoint side, and pastes the specific texture on the plate-like object. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the image of the change target portion is changed to an image corresponding to the specific texture.

According to feature J4, since the plate-shaped object is a polygon having relatively few vertices, the number of vertices of the plate-shaped object is likely to be not less than the number of vertices corresponding to the change target portion in the specific object. As a result, the processing load for pasting the specific texture can be reduced compared to the structure for pasting the specific texture to the change target portion of the specific object.

In addition, since the case of changing and the case of not changing can be dealt with by whether or not the plate-shaped object is arranged, switching between the case of changing and the case of not changing can be relatively easily performed.

Feature J5. A plurality of types of the specific texture are prepared,
The changing means uses the plurality of types of specific textures in a predetermined order each time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that a series of operations are performed in the change target portion. The gaming machine according to feature J4, characterized by:

According to the feature J5, a series of actions are performed in the change target part by using the specific textures to be used in a predetermined order. In this case, since the amount of data for one specific texture is smaller than the amount of data for the entire texture of the specific object, the amount of data for a series of operations can be greatly reduced. As a result, it is possible to display images related to the series of operations with a small amount of data.

Feature J6. The data generation means is
Arrangement means for arranging objects in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S4602, S4609, and S4610 in the VDP 135);
viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in the VDP 135);
pasting means for pasting a texture to the object (function for executing the processes of steps S4607 and S4615 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means (steps S4608, S4616 and S4617 in VDP 135) for projecting the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating the generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane. function to perform processing) and
with
The objects include a specific object that is used to display the specific individual image and in which the change target part is set,
the specific image data is a deformation target object set as a deformation target;
The changing means arranges the specific object and the transformation target object so that the transformation target object overlaps the transformation target part from the viewpoint side, and transforms the transformation target object to change the transformation target part. The game machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that the image displayed on the screen is changed.

According to the feature J6, by arranging the deformation target object so as to overlap the change target part and deforming the deformation target object, the individual image based on the deformation target object changes, and the image displayed on the change target part changes. It will change. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of textures as image data for changing an image.

Feature J7. The game according to feature J6, wherein the changing means transforms the transformation target object by individually updating coordinates of at least a part of vertices constituting the transformation target object. machine.

According to the characteristic J7, the individual image based on the deformation target object can be changed by updating the coordinates of at least some of the vertices forming the deformation target object.

It should be noted that "coordinate mapping data specifying coordinates at each vertex constituting the object to be transformed is provided, and a plurality of types of the coordinate mapping data are set with different specified coordinates, and The changing means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the referenced coordinate mapping data each time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that the object to be transformed is It is something that transforms so that it fluctuates." According to such a configuration, fluctuations in an image can be expressed, and compared to a configuration in which a calculation formula for each coordinate is given and calculated from the calculation formula, the coordinates of each vertex of the object to be transformed are individually set. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for

Feature J8. The game according to feature J7, wherein the changing means does not change the coordinates of the vertices constituting the object to be transformed, of the vertices related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the object to be transformed. machine.

According to the feature J8, since the coordinates of the vertices of the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object are not changed, the boundary between the image of the change target region and the surrounding images is less noticeable. As a result, it is possible to change the image of the part to be changed while familiarizing the two.

Feature J9. The game machine according to any one of characteristics J6 to J8, wherein the object to be transformed is a plate-like object having a plane set corresponding to the part to be changed.

According to feature J9, by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the object to be transformed, the object to be transformed can be easily transformed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for changing the part to be changed.

Feature J10. The changing means is a distortion forming means for distorting the image of the part to be changed by deforming the object to be deformed. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J9, characterized in that the function of executing

According to the characteristic J10, distortion of the image can be expressed by deforming the object to be deformed.

Feature J11. The changing means arranges the deformation target object closer to the viewpoint than the specific object, and pastes image data corresponding to an image displayed on the change target region to the deformation target object as the texture. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J10, characterized in that:

According to the feature J11, the image of the change target portion is changed by deforming the deformation target object. As a result, it is possible to standardize the processing in that there is no need to change the processing for a predetermined object depending on whether it is changed or not.

Further, since the case of changing and the case of not changing can be dealt with by arranging or not arranging the deformation target object, it is possible to relatively easily switch between the case of changing and the case of not changing.

Feature J12. The arranging means includes means for arranging the specific object among a plurality of objects set as display targets (function for executing the processing of step S4602 in the VDP 135),
The drawing setting means is means for projecting the specific object and generating predetermined generation data corresponding to the image including the specific individual image based on the data projected onto the projection plane (the process of step S4608 in the VDP 135 is functions to execute),
The data generation means extracts image data corresponding to the change target portion of the specific individual image included in the predetermined generation data, thereby generating a texture to be pasted on the deformation target object. A function to execute the processing of steps S4801 and S4802),
The changing means arranges at least the object to be transformed in the virtual three-dimensional space, pastes the texture generated by the texture generating means on the object to be transformed, and projects the object to be transformed. The gaming machine according to feature J11, wherein the image of the change target portion is changed by:

According to the feature J12, the predetermined generation data is generated by performing the first projection on the specific object, and the texture to be pasted on the deformation target object is generated using the predetermined generation data. Then, by performing the second projection on the object to be transformed to which the texture is applied, the image of the part to be changed can be changed. As a result, the amount of data can be reduced in that it is not necessary to store in advance the texture to be applied to the transformation target object.

In addition, since the texture applied to the deformation target object is configured to be generated by projecting the specific object, the image related to the texture is actually displayed using the specific object. It can resemble an image. As a result, the image based on the object to be transformed and the surrounding image can be blended together.

Furthermore, since the process of generating the texture to be pasted on the specific object and the process of changing the image of the part to be changed are common in that they are projected, it is possible to standardize the processing configuration for both. .

Feature J13. The specific individual image is configured to be updateable each time the update timing is reached,
The predetermined generation data is generated each time the update timing comes,
The texture generating means is characterized in that, every time the update timing comes, the texture to be pasted on the deformation target object is generated using the predetermined generation data generated at the update timing. The gaming machine described in J12.

According to the characteristic J13, the predetermined generation data is generated each time the update timing comes, and the texture to be pasted on the deformation target object is generated. Thereby, even when the specific individual image is updated, the updated specific individual image can be changed.

In addition, as a specific configuration of "the specific individual image is configured to be able to be updated at each update timing", for example, "the arrangement means updates the specific object at each update timing." A configuration in which the specific individual image is scrolled in a predetermined direction by updating the arranged coordinates, a configuration in which the viewpoint is moved in a predetermined direction each time the update timing is reached, etc. can be considered. be done.

Feature J14. The changing means arranges the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, pastes a texture corresponding to the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object, thereby changing the deformation target part. creating change generation data in which the image has changed,
The data generation means is characterized by comprising synthesis means (a function of executing the processing of step S4617 in the VDP 135) for generating one generation data by synthesizing the predetermined generation data and the change generation data. The gaming machine according to feature J12 or feature J13.

According to the feature J14, the process of generating the predetermined generated data corresponding to the image including the specific individual image is divided into the process of generating the change generated data, and the two are combined to generate one generated data. As a result, the process of generating the texture to be pasted on the object to be transformed can be used as the process of generating 1 generation data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

Moreover, according to the above feature, it is possible to reduce the number of overlapping objects arranged in two projections. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load caused by overlapping arrangement, overlapping projection, and the like.

Feature J15. The data generating means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines the display mode of the image based on the image data to the image data,
The various parameter information includes individual reflection value information (individual α value) that determines the degree to which the color information of the image data is reflected on the display unit for each predetermined unit area (pixel),
The changing means adjusts the individual reflection value information applied to the specific image data so that the color information relating to the image based on the specific image data is less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the image. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J14, characterized in that

According to the feature J15, the color information of the image based on the specific image data is less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the image. As a result, an image that blends in with other regions is displayed toward the outer edge of the image based on the specific image data. Therefore, it is possible to make the boundary between the image of the change target site and the image of the other area inconspicuous.

Feature J16. The data generating means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines the display mode of the image based on the image data to the image data,
The various parameter information includes reflection value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree of reflecting the color information of the image data on the display unit,
The changing means is means for gradually not reflecting the color information of the specific image data by adjusting the reflection value information applied to the specific image data step by step. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J15, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the feature J16, the image based on the specific image data displayed in the change target region gradually disappears, so the disappearing process of the changed image is inconspicuous. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the changing image disappears.

Feature J17. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J16, wherein the specific individual image is a part of a background image displayed on the display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display section, the data amount of the image data tends to be larger than that of the individual image displayed on a part of the display section. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared in order to partially change the background image, the amount of data tends to become large.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since a part of the background image can be changed without preparing a plurality of types of background image data, the amount of data can be suitably reduced.

The above feature group J is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data, the image data memory stores image data for displaying the background and image data for displaying characters and the like. It is Further, by reading the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in storage means such as a VRAM. By outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, polygons, which are three-dimensional image data, are set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and textures, which are two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, are pasted on the polygons. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

Here, it is considered possible to diversify the display effects by performing a display effect in which a part of the image displayed on the display unit is changed. However, if image data for the entire display section is provided for performing the display effect, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Arrangement means for arranging an object, which is 3D information, in the virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135); a function of executing the processing of steps S1005 and S1006); pasting means for pasting a texture to the object (a function of executing color information setting processing in the VDP 135); and a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Projection means for projecting the object onto the VDP 135 (function for executing the processes of steps S1010 and S1011 in the VDP 135), and drawing setting means for generating generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane ( a function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135); storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, VDP 135);
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on a display unit (display surface G) and for updating the content of the image when a predetermined update timing comes. ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The objects include predetermined objects (objects OB1 to OB4) used when displaying a predetermined first predetermined image (sand beach background image BP10) on the display unit, and the texture includes the A texture to be pasted on a predetermined object, which includes predetermined textures (each texture TD1 to TD4) corresponding to an image when the predetermined object is viewed from a predetermined specific viewpoint,
the projection means includes perspective projection and parallel projection as projection patterns for projecting the object onto the projection plane;
The data generation means is
A first generation means for generating generated data corresponding to the first predetermined image using the predetermined object and the predetermined texture by setting the viewpoint to the specific viewpoint and the projection pattern to the perspective projection. (a function of executing arithmetic processing for a sandy beach background in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing drawing processing in the VDP 135);
a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image using the predetermined object and the predetermined texture by changing the viewpoint from the specific viewpoint to a predetermined changed viewpoint and setting the projection pattern to the parallel projection; second generation means for generating generation data corresponding to (the function of executing the background arithmetic processing of the sandy beach running effect in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the drawing processing in the VDP 135);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K1, the first predetermined image can be obtained without complicating the predetermined object by setting the viewpoint to the specific viewpoint, setting the perspective projection as the projection pattern, and pasting the predetermined texture to the predetermined object. can be made into a perspective image.

In such a configuration, the predetermined texture corresponds to the image when the predetermined object is viewed from the specific viewpoint. Therefore, when the viewpoint is changed from the specific viewpoint to the changed viewpoint, the image displayed with the predetermined object and the predetermined texture and the other image are displayed. The perspective is inconsistent with the image of For this reason, the second predetermined image becomes an image that makes the player feel uncomfortable, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the second predetermined image is generated by performing perspective projection without considering the depth, the image displayed by the predetermined object and the predetermined texture and the other image It is possible to achieve matching of perspective at Thereby, two different predetermined images can be displayed while using the same texture. Therefore, it is possible to diversify display effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

Feature K2. Arrangement means for arranging an object, which is 3D information, in the virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135); a function of executing the processing of steps S1005 and S1006); pasting means for pasting a texture to the object (a function of executing color information setting processing in the VDP 135); and a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Projection means for projecting the object onto the VDP 135 (function for executing the processes of steps S1010 and S1011 in the VDP 135), and drawing setting means for generating generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane ( a function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135); storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, VDP 135);
display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display section (display surface G) and for updating the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing comes; ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The objects include a plurality of predetermined objects (objects OB1 to OB4) used when displaying a predetermined first predetermined image (sand beach background image BP10) on the display section, and the texture includes: , a plurality of predetermined textures (each texture TD1 to TD4) corresponding to an image when each predetermined object is viewed from a predetermined specific viewpoint, which are textures to be affixed to each of the predetermined objects. and
the projection means includes perspective projection and parallel projection as projection patterns for projecting the object onto the projection plane;
The data generation means is
generating data corresponding to the first predetermined image using each predetermined object and each predetermined texture by setting the viewpoint to the specific viewpoint and the projection pattern to the perspective projection; generation means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for a sandy beach background in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing drawing processing in the VDP 135);
By changing the viewpoint from the specific viewpoint to a predetermined modified viewpoint and setting the projection pattern to the parallel projection, a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image using the predetermined objects and the predetermined textures is obtained. a second generating means (a function of executing background arithmetic processing for the sandy beach run effect in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing drawing processing in the VDP 135) for generating generated data corresponding to a predetermined image (background image for effect BP20);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K2, by setting perspective projection as a projection pattern, arranging each predetermined object at different positions in the depth direction, and attaching each predetermined texture to each predetermined object, each predetermined object can be made complex. It is possible to make the first predetermined image an image with a sense of perspective.

In such a configuration, each predetermined texture corresponds to an image when each predetermined object is viewed from a specific viewpoint. Therefore, when the viewpoint is changed from a specific viewpoint to a changed viewpoint, a certain predetermined object and a predetermined texture corresponding to it are displayed. There is a mismatch in perspective between the displayed image and the image displayed by other predetermined objects and their corresponding predetermined textures. For this reason, the second predetermined image becomes an image that makes the player feel uncomfortable, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the second predetermined image is generated by performing perspective projection without considering the depth, it is possible to match the perspective between the two. Thereby, two different predetermined images can be displayed while using the same texture. Therefore, it is possible to diversify display effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

Feature K3. The second generating means is characterized in that the generated data is generated such that the second predetermined image moves by moving each image displayed using each predetermined object in the same direction. The gaming machine according to feature K2.

According to the feature K3, by moving the images displayed using the predetermined objects in the same direction, the second predetermined image can be moved, thereby diversifying the display effects. On the other hand, if the images are moved in the same direction, the inconsistency in the sense of perspective between the images is likely to be noticeable, and the display effect in which the second predetermined image is moved tends to be uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the feature K2, the generated data corresponding to the second predetermined image is generated by parallel projection, so that the mismatch can be made less conspicuous. can be preferably performed.

Feature K4. The data generating means generates the generated data based on applying parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The parameter information includes magnification information of the object,
Characteristic feature K2, wherein the second generating means sets the magnification information applied to each predetermined object smaller as the distance between the changed viewpoint and each predetermined object increases, or The game machine according to feature K3.

According to the feature K4, the image related to the predetermined object located farther from the changed viewpoint is displayed in a smaller size. As a result, since a pseudo perspective effect is generated, an image with a perspective effect can be expressed in parallel projection.

Feature K5. The data generating means generates the generated data based on applying parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The parameter information includes magnification information of the object,
Magnification information and coordinates of each of the predetermined objects are set so that a region onto which each of the predetermined objects is projected when each of the predetermined objects is parallel projected is the same as a region when each of the predetermined objects is projected by perspective projection. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3, characterized in that

According to the feature K5, an image obtained by parallel projection of each predetermined object can be made to resemble an image obtained by perspective projection of each predetermined object. This makes it possible to make an image obtained by parallel projection look like an image with perspective obtained by perspective projection.

Feature K6. The second generating means includes at least moving means (function for executing the processing of step S4313 in the display CPU 131) for moving each of the predetermined objects at a predetermined speed,
The moving speed of each predetermined object is set such that the relative speed of each predetermined object with respect to the changed viewpoint decreases as the distance between the changed viewpoint and each predetermined object increases. The game machine according to any one of K2 to K5.

According to the feature K6, the predetermined object that is farther from the changed viewpoint appears to move slowly, and the predetermined object that is closer to the changed viewpoint appears to move faster. As a result, a pseudo perspective can be generated in a configuration that performs parallel projection.

Feature K7. each of the predetermined objects is a plate-shaped object,
the plate-like objects are arranged side by side in the depth direction of the specific viewpoint while being inclined with respect to the projection plane;
Any one of features K2 to K6, characterized in that the texture applied to each of the predetermined objects is set in correspondence with the inclination so as to correspond to the image viewed from the specific viewpoint. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature K7, it is possible to generate an image with perspective using a relatively simple plate-like object by performing perspective projection, so that the processing load associated with displaying the image can be reduced. On the other hand, a shift in perspective between individual images due to a change in viewpoint is likely to be conspicuous.

On the other hand, according to the feature K2, parallel projection can suppress the shift in the sense of perspective that accompanies the change of the viewpoint.

The feature K group described above is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

In recent years, attempts have been made to display a more stereoscopic image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, polygons, which are three-dimensional image data, are set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and textures, which are two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, are pasted on the polygons. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A stereoscopic image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effects, it is preferable to diversify the display effects. On the other hand, an extreme increase in the amount of data is not preferable in order to diversify the display effects.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. Then, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a privilege is given to the player according to the patterns after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine 31... Symbol display device 48... Operation device for production 131... Display CPU 133... Memory module 135... VDP 142... Frame buffer 151... Geometry calculation unit 152... Rendering unit 155... Display circuit, AP1 to AP4...Attachment parts, BP...Main body parts, CH15...Individual image for teaching, CH16...Individual image for teaching, KD1...First key data, KD2...Second key data, ND1...Second 1 normal map data, ND2...second normal map data, PC17...particle dispersion object, PC19...sea surface object, PC20...special object, PC21 to PC23...first partial texture, PC24 to PC27...second partial texture , PT1...Particle single image, PT2...Particle single image, SD...Surface data, SD1...Surface data to be applied, SD2...Surface data for buffering, RMD0...Round moving image data, IPD0...Inserted image data, IP1...Second 1 inserted character image, IP2...second inserted character image, RMD0a...first round moving image data, RMD0b...second round moving image data, OB1...sand beach object, OB2...wave object, OB3...sea object, OB4...sky object , TD1... sandy beach texture, TD2... wave texture, TD3... sea texture, TD4... sky texture, PV1... specific viewpoint, PV2... another viewpoint, BP10... sandy beach background image, BP20... background image for presentation, OB10... object for refraction, SKD1... α data for refraction, MD1... First coordinate mapping data, MD2... Second coordinate mapping data, CP13... Expanded coral image, CP14... Contracted coral image, CP15... First distorted image, CP16... Second distorted image, PE1 ... distortion area OB21 ... base object OB22 ... partial object OB31 ... head object TD11 ... base texture TD12 ... partial texture TD21 to TD23 ... first to third partial textures CP21 ... base image CP23 to CP25 . . . First to third partial images, PE2 .

Claims (1)

a display means having a display;
display storage means for storing image data in advance;
display control means for displaying an image on the display section using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used for reproducing a moving image of a size that can be displayed on the entire display unit, and a smaller size and smaller amount of data than the moving image data. predetermined image data, and
The display control means is
a rendering means for rendering any moving image data in a rendering area to create still image data;
display effect executing means for executing a display effect for displaying a moving image of an image corresponding to the moving image data over a predetermined display period by using the still image data developed by the developing means;
with
As effects based on the image data stored in the display storage means, a first effect in which a background image and a predetermined moving character image that overlaps the background image and moves over time are displayed; A second effect that does not include a background image and includes a background image is configured to be continuous,
By inserting a predetermined image using the predetermined image data, the display effect executing means inserts the image related to the second effect and the predetermined image in at least a part of the effect period of the display effect. is provided with means capable of displaying an image superimposed on
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to prevent the predetermined moving character image from being displayed from a predetermined display area of the display unit by moving the predetermined moving character image.

Images